complete solution for motor protection · instruction manual mcomp user manual - rev. c complete...
TRANSCRIPT
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
Complete Solution for Motor Protection
The content of this publication is subject to change
without notice. Larsen & Toubro Limited reserves the
right to make product-improvement changes which
may or may not be re�ected in this publication. Larsen
& Toubro Limited is not responsible for any inadvertent
admissions, omissions, or errors. Larsen & Toubro
Limited assumes no liability for damages arising out of,
or in connection with, the application or use of any
product or application described herein.
© 2016 Larsen & Toubro Limited. All rights reserved.
L&T Electrical & AutomationElectrical Systems & Equipment
Head of�ce7C, TC II, Tower B, L&T Business Park,L&T Gate No. 5, Saki Vihar Road, Powai,Mumbai 400 072, India
Rev. CReleased Date - September, 2016
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
CONTENTS
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
PREFACE � Manual Overview Version� Purpose of This Manual� � Safety and General Information � Conventions and Nomenclature Conventions� Nomenclatures�
INTRODUCTION � About the Relay Reasons for Motor Protections� � Product Overview Relay Main unit� Status of LED Indication� � Current Module (CM) � Display unit � DIO Expansion unit LED Indication on expansion unit � � MCOMP Order Codes � Getting Started
SPECIFICATIONS � General � Dimensions � Type Tests � Certi�cations � Environmental Conditions � Relay Elements � Metering � Monitoring
INSTALLATION � Overview � Mechanical Installation Dimensions� Main unit Dimensions � CM 1 Dimensions� CM 2-5 Dimensions� DIO Expansion Module Dimensions� Display Dimensions� � Product Identi�cation Label � Mounting Relay Mounting� CM Mounting� Display Mounting� DIO Expansion Module Mounting�
0102020202020203
050606070707080808090911
121314151515161818
192020202020212121222222222323
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
CONTENTS
5.0
� Electrical Installation� Relay Main Unit Wiring 3 Phase Voltage Connections� 3-Phase Current Connections� Con�guration Port Connection� RTD/PTC and Analog O/P Connections� Communication Port Connection� Auxiliary Power Supply Connection� Digital Input Connections� Digital Output Connections�� Current Module (CM) Wiring� Display Wiring� Expansion Unit Wiring
METERING AND MONITORING� Overview� Metering Current Based Metering� RMS Line Current� Earth Fault Current� Average RMS Current� Thermal Capacity� Current Unbalance� Voltage Based Metering� RMS Line Voltage� RMS Phase Voltage� Average RMS Voltage� Frequency� Power and Energy Based Metering� Power� Energy� Power Factor� Miscellaneous Parameter� Temperature� Digital Input/Output Status� COMPlogic output Status�� Monitoring Motor Speci�c Data Monitoring� Phase Sequence� Motor Starting Time� CM Type� Number of Starts� Number of Stops� Motor Run Hours� Total Motor Run Hours� Starting Peak Current� Annunciations�
24252626272828303031313335
373838383838383838383838383839393939393939393939393940404040404040
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
CONTENTS
6.0
7.0
PROTECTIONS� Overview� Thermal Protection Overload (49)�� Current Based Protection Over current Protection (50P)� Under current Protection (37)� Current unbalance Protection (46)� Earth Fault Protection (50N or 50SG)� Locked Rotor Protection (50LR)� IDMT Overcurrent (51P/51N)� Phase Loss Protection (47A)�� Voltage Based Protection Over voltage Protection (59)� Under voltage Protection (27)� Voltage unbalance Protection (47)� Phase reversal Protection (47B)�� Frequency Based Protection Under frequency Protection (81L)� Over frequency Protection (81H)�� Advanced Features Re-acceleration (27LV)� Temperature Monitoring� Maximum Number of Starts Protection (66)� Fail to Stop Protection� Interlock 1 to 12� Communication Failure Monitoring� Excessive Start Time Protection� Analog Input Monitoring�
COMMUNICATION� Overview� Communication Interface� Communication Protocol Modbus RTU� Supported Modbus Function Codes � Modbus RTU Settings � Modbus memory map � Pro�bus DP� Pro�bus Settings� Pro�bus memory map� Modbus TCP/IP� Modbus TCP/IP Settings� Modbus TCP/IP Memory Map�� Parameter Mapping Status Word�� Communication Architecture Modbus Architecture� Pro�bus Architecture�
4142434346464647474848494949505051515151515153545454545454
56575757575858585859595959606062626262
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
CONTENTS
8.0
9.0
SETTINGS� Overview� Setting Parameters System Setting Parameters� Protection Setting Parameters� Digital Input Output Setting Parameters� Basic Digital Input/Output� DIO Expansion Module� Digital Input Settings� Digital Output Settings� Analog Output Settings� Communication Setting Parameters� COMPlogic Setting Parameters� COMPlogic Modules� Truth Table� Signal Conditioner� Counters� Timers� List of logical Inputs� � Relay Con�guration Relay Con�guration through the Display� Relay Con�guration through MCOMP suite� Relay Con�guration through Communication�� Examples of Relay Selection and Basic Settings using Motor data Case 1:� Solution:� Case 2:� Solution:�Setting Sheet System Settings� Protection Settings� Communication Settings� DIO Settings (Digital Input/Output)� Parameter Mapping Settings� COMPlogic Settings�
USER INTERFACE� Overview� MCOMP Suite Interface Installation Guide� .NET Framework 3.5 Service Pack installation� Multi-version MCOMP Suite Installation� MCOMP Suite Installation� Operation Guide� MCOMP Suite Con�guration� Monitoring Mode� Con�guration Mode�� Display Interface Operation Guide� Metering�
6465656569696969707273747474747475767778788082
82828283838585879191115115
119120120120120122123124124125132144144145
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
CONTENTS
10.0
Settings � View Records � Commands � Display Settings � Connect to PC �
TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING� Overview� Testing Connection Setup Requirement� Metering testing� Phase current and voltage:� Power, Energy & Power factor:� Protection Testing�� Troubleshooting� Special Commands� Inhibit Status� Motor Stop Cause
Memory MapsOverviewA] Modbus RTU Memory Map Trip Record Table Event Record Table Table A-3. Event Record Cause TableB] Pro�bus memory map Cyclic Data Data Representation Data Modules available in GSD �le Acyclic DataC] Modbus TCP/IP Memory Map
Application NotesOverviewA] Starter Application DOL Starter RDOL Starter STAR/DELTA StarterB] Non Motor Load ApplicationC] Re-acceleration ApplicationD] 3P-3W, 3P-4W ApplicationE] Two Phase Voltage Inputs (R and Y phase input) ApplicationF] Winding Heating ApplicationG] Analog Output ApplicationH] Pro�bus Communication ApplicationI] Protection Function Application Thermal Overload Case Study Locked Rotor ProtectionJ] Watchdog ApplicationK] Single Phase Motor Application
146147148148149
150151151151151151151151152153154154
156157157169172172176176180189190192
218218218218219220221221222
223223223224227227229229231
Manual Overview
The MCOMP Instruction Manual provides complete information necessary to install, operate, and maintain the MCOMP Relay and its accessory components.
An overview of each section of this manual is as follows:
Preface: Describes the manual organization, Safety & General Information and conventions & nomenclatures used in this manual.
Introduction: Provides a brief overview of the product and the manual.
Speci�cations: Lists the Relay technical speci�cations.
Installation: Describes mechanical installation and electrical wiring of the Relay.
Metering and Monitoring: Describes the operation and calculation of each metering functions.
Protection: Describes the operating characteristics of each protection element provided in the Relay.
Communication: Describes communication interface and protocols supported by the Relay.
Settings: Describes the different setting parameters meaning with its use and how to enter settings into the relay. It also de�nes the setting sheet describing all the settings available in the relay.
User Interface: Describes how to con�gure the Relay through local interface using MCOMP Suite and the Display.
Testing and Troubleshooting: Describes the common problems encountered during the Relay testing and various troubleshooting techniques.
Version
This is revision C release of the manual by Larsen & Toubro Ltd.
Purpose of This Manual
This manual intends to help the users of the MCOMP Relay, to operate, maintain and troubleshoot the device. It may be used by following users:
� Design and Planning Engineers
� System Integrators
� Maintenance Engineers
Safety and General Information
This manual uses following safety statements:
Conventions and Nomenclature
Conventions
In this manual,
� Relay refers to MCOMP Main Unit
� Display Unit refers to MCOMP Display Unit
� CM refers to MCOMP Current Module
� Expansion unit refers to add-on DIO/AI unit
2MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
PREFACE
Immediate Hazard.SEVERE personal injury or death WILL result.
Hazards or unsafe practices. MINOR personal injury or damage to products orproperty MAY result.
Hazards or unsafe practices.SEVERE personal injury or death MAY result.
Essential advisory information.
Additional or explanatory information.
IMPORTANT
NOTE
WARNING
DANGER
CAUTION
3MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
Nomenclatures
Following are the different Nomenclature and their descriptions used in this Manual.
Table 1-1: Nomenclature and Description
PREFACE
Nomenclatures Descriptions
CAT
CBCT
CM
CRC
DCS
DHCP
DI
DIN
DIO
DO
DOL
DP
DTE
EEPROM
EWS
FS
GSD
GMT
IEF
IFLC
IOC
IR
ISET
Category
Core Balance Current Transformer
Current Module
Cyclic Redundancy Check
Distributed Control System
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
Digital Input
German Institute for Standardization
Digital Input/Output
Digital Output
Direct On Line
Decentralized Peripherals
Data Terminal Equipment
Electrically Erasable and Programmable Read Only Memory
Engineering Work Station
System Frequency
General Station Description
Greenwich Mean Time
Set Value for Earth Fault Current
Full Load Current
Instantaneous Over Current
Running Current
Set Value for Over load curve
LCS
LED
LRC
LSB
MFLA
MSB
OLED
Local Control System
Light Emitting Diode
Longitudinal Redundancy Check
Least Significant Bit
Multiple of Full Load Current
Most Significant Bit
Organic Light Emitting Diode
PTC
PWR/COMM
RDOL
Positive Temperature Coefficient
Power/Communication
Reverse Direct On Line
RMS Root Mean Square
4MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
PREFACE
Suggestions for Improving this Manual
For any feedback to improve this manual and its contents, kindly contact at [email protected].
Table 1-1: Nomenclature and Description
SCADA
SNTP
TCC
TCP/IP
TM
Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
Simple Network Time Protocol
Trip Curve Characteristics
Transfer Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
Thermal Memory
RTD
RTU
Resistance Temperature Detector
Remote Terminal Unit
About the Relay
MCOMP is designed as a reliable building block for Motor Control Centres (MCCs) and a product designed to provide complete motor protection. It covers conventional & advanced motor protection, metering and annunciation in MCC feeders into single, easy to con�gure, compact communicating module with a optional OLED Display. The MCOMP is used as a protection controller for Low Voltage Contactor Controlled Motor Starter Feeders.
Reasons for Motor Protections
Electric motors are the major operands of any industry. These motors come in with a wide variety of ratings, types and applications. Depending on the criticality of the process or application, the motor protection is selected.
Motor Protection is required for the following reasons:
Varying Input Voltages and Load Currents
� Motor is a rotating equipment and its performance is dependent on the availability of tolerable levels of input voltages and variable loads. Faults occur when either of these parameters �uctuates. Therefore, motor protection controllers
are designed to monitor key parameters of the motor to alert the operator of a condition of outage or damage.
Varying Starting Condition
� The protection controller must be able to differentiate between starting condition and running condition.
� During starting condition, a LV motor (up to 300 KW) has starting current of about 550-700 % of its full load current, with a starting time usually ranging from 1 to 10 seconds.
� It should be able to monitor pre-start conditions of the motor to prevent starting of motor under unfavorable conditions like inadequate thermal capacity available and voltage unhealthiness.
� It should check the pre-start, starting and running conditions of the motor completely for safe operation of the motor.
MCOMP as a Microprocessor Equipped Intelligent Controller, allows a user to set parameters of the motor according to the application and process requirements.
Based on the instantaneous measurement of the parameters, MCOMP monitors different conditions of the motor as shown in Table 2-1.
6MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
INTRODUCTION
Table 2-1: Motor Conditions
Condition of Motor Possible Irregularities
Prevents starting of the motor on under-voltage lockout.
Prevents starting of the motor until the thermal memory(thermal capacity) falls below a certain value.
Prevents starting of the motor until a inhibit period is elapsed.
Prevents starting of the motor until it is reset.
Relay trips the motor due to Excessive Start Time protection.
Action by MCOMP
Relay stops the motor due to contactor feedback fault whenone of the DI is configured as feedback.
Prevents starting of the motor until Stop Input is high.
Relay indicates an alarm and trips the motor if theirregularity continues for an amount of time due tothe corresponding protection.
Relay indicates alarm and trips the motor if the irregularitycontinues for set amount of time (or instantaneous) due tothe corresponding protection.
Pre-start: Before themotor starts (inhibitconditions)
Starting: After STARTinput is given or issensed till the motorpicks up speed
Running: Motor runsin a stable manner
Starting and runningconditions
Under-voltage on the supply side.
Not cooled enough for next start.
Frequent starting / Number of starts per defined time
Not reset after Trip
Exceed set starting time
Contactor feedback is not available even after STARTcommand is given for a specified amount of time.
Any of the Digital Input is selected as Stop Input,and is low.
Over-heating of the winding and insulation (Overload).
Jamming (Locked Rotor).
Supply voltage goes low.
Current is considerably lower than the running current.
Leakage current flows in the motor (Earth Fault).
Supply frequency is not proper (under and over-frequency).
One of the supply phases is disconnected (Phase Loss).
Number of starts exceeds permitted number within acertain period.
Sequence of the 3-phase supply is changed (Phase Reversal).
7MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
INTRODUCTION
Product Overview
The MCOMP facilitates following bene�ts to users:
� Flexible protection, control and communication options to suit any Low Voltage (LV) contactor controlled motor starter application.
� Integrated push button and LED indicators reduce external components and wiring.
� Flexibility to choose from various standard communication protocols allow affordable integration to larger and complex Substation monitoring & control systems.
� The Relay comes with its own high accuracy current module eliminating the three conventional CTs required for each phase. The built in 4-20 mA Analog Output eliminates the
need of transducer for remote metering. This reduces the overall module size making it more compact and cost effective.
� Reset push button is available on the Relay and the Display thereby reducing the need for one DI to be con�gured as Reset (Auto reset option is available for thermal overload and under-voltage protection).
� The optional OLED Display is provided with the Relay for display of all metering, protection and setting parameters.
� Conformal coating on the PCB inside the Relay resists the corrosive environment, hazardous chemicals, dust, etc,. and increases the life & reliability of the product.
Relay Main unit
This is a self-contained and fully functional unit housing the main
processor, input/output board, voltage sensing module and communication module in a single modular enclosure. The current module gets connected to the Relay unit for current sensing. The Relay is further provided with bi/tri color LED indicators. There is also a reset push button available for local trip reset.
There are mainly three variants of the Relay main unit depending on selection of communication protocol:
1. Modbus RTU
2. Pro�bus
3. Modbus TCP/IP
Refer MCOMP order codes section for all possible variants of MCOMP relay.
Table 2-2 shows the LED status description.
LED Indications on Main unit
One LED for Fault:
� Glows Red when the Relay senses Trip condition.
One Tri-color LED for Motor status RUN/STOP/INHIBIT
� Glows Green when the Relay senses the motor is OFF and ready to START.
� Glows Red when the Relay senses the motor is ON.
� Glows Amber when the Relay senses the motor is in INHIBIT mode.
One Bi-color LED for Alarm/Pickup
� Glows Amber when Alarm condition is sensed by the Relay.
� Glows Red when Pickup condition is sensed by the Relay.
Figure 2.1 � Product overview
Expansion DIO UnitDisplay Unit
CM Unit
Relay Main Unit
FRC Cable
Display Cable
Expansion Unit Cable
Drive LED�s
Status of the Drive Drive Status Alarm/Pick up Trip
Running
Alarm
Pickup
Trip
Inhibit
Ready to Start
RED
X
X
AMBER
AMBER
GREEN
X
AMBER
RED
OFF
X
X
OFF
OFF
OFF
RED
X
OFF
8MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
INTRODUCTION
Table 2-2: LED Status Description
Reset Button
� Resets the Trip condition of the Relay.
� Resets the Relay to default settings when pressed for 3 seconds and released.
Table 2-3: CM Type and Range
CM Type IFLC Range Motor Rating for 415V System
CM - 1
CM - 2
CM � 3
CM � 4
CM - 5
With external conventional CT
0.6 to 2.0 A
1.8 to 5.4 A
4.5 to 13.5 A
12.6 to 37.8 A
36 to 80 A
50* to 600 A
0.375 to 1.125 kW
1 to 3 kW
2.5 to 7.5 kW
7 to 21 kW
20 to 45 kW
Up to 333 kW
Current Module (CM)
CM, provided with MCOMP, is used for 3-phase current sensing in motor starters ranging from 0.375 kW. Requisite connecting cable for connection of CM to the Relay is supplied along with the CM. Only one CM is required (up to 45 kW) for metering and protection, reducing the space which is required for conventional CTs in the module.
There are two different sizes of CM, covering �ve different current ranges as shown in Table 2�3.
Display unit
The OLED Display is a detachable optional unit provided with the MCOMP for display of metering, protection and motor-speci�c parameters. The Display can additionally be used to con�gure the Relay. The OLED Display is also provided with micro-USB front port to enable local parameterization through laptop using MCOMP Suite provided with the Relay.
DIO Expansion unit
The DIO Expansion unit is detachable optional unit provided with MCOMP for increasing the count of Digital/Analog input and digital output as per application requirement. The expansion unit comes in three types as 4DI/2DO module having 4 digital inputs & 2 digital outputs, 5DI/2AI module having 5 digital inputs & 2 analog inputs and 8DI module having 8 digital inputs. Depending on the requirement of number of DI/DO or AI, suitable expansion module can be selected. The requisite connection cable of 0.4m length comes along with expansion module. Maximum three expansion modules can be connected to a single relay main unit. Refer table 8-10 in chapter Settings for details of all possible combination of DIO expansion unit connection to relay main unit.
Note: *When MCOMP is used with external conventional CT, it is required to enable the �external CT ratio� setting. In this case the starting range for IFLC is 50% of the �primary current value� set in the �external CT ratio� setting. 50A mentioned in Table 2-3 is considering the by default primary current as 100A in external CT ratio setting. If primary current value changes, starting IFLC value changes accordingly.
While selecting CM, it is strictly recommended to match the IFLC of the motor speci�ed by motor manufacturer with CM IFLC range.
Motor rating in kW speci�ed above is with considering approximate scale factor of 1.8 between motor rating and IFLC. For IFLC range higher than 80A, conventional CTs are required along with MCOMP CM. CM1 and CM2 is used when secondary of conventional CT is 1 A and 5 A respectively.
Note: X � Does not matter
9MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
INTRODUCTION
LED Indications on Expansion unit
One LED for Power (PWR):
� Glows Green when the expansion unit gets power from relay main unit.
One LED for Communication status (COMM):
� Glows Red when communication between the Relay main unit and expansion module is healthy.
LED�s for DI/DO status:
� Glows Red when corresponding DI/DO status is high / energized state.
Test Button (T):
� Tests the DI/DO circuitry and corresponding LEDs by switching it ON and OFF. It is recommended to use this button only when drive is in stop condition and 3 phase voltage is not available to the drive/motor.
MCOMP Order Codes
Part number selection MCOMP MAIN UNIT PART NUMBER
MCOMP_MAIN_UNIT_U_P_YI_R
Universal (80 � 230 V AC/DC)
24 V DC
Modbus RTU
Modbus TCP/IP
Profibus DP
Universal (80 � 230 V AC/DC)
230 V AC/DC
110 V AC/DC
24 V DC
RTD Input PortPTC Input Port
U
O
D
P
R
T
P
YI
UI
YI
ZI
DI
R
RP
MAIN UNIT
Auxiliary Voltage
Communication
Voltage sensing forDigital Input Card
Temperature Input
Part number selection MCOMP CURRNET MODULE PART NUMBER
MCOMP_CURRENT_MODULE_C1_H
Cable of 0.3 mCable of 0.5 mCable of 0.75 m
cable of 1 m
C1
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
HCURRENT MODULE
CM Type
CM � Main unit Cable
Table 2-4: Main unit order code
Table 2-5: Current Module order code
S H M 1
CM Type 1 ( Iflc : 0.6 � 2 A)
CM Type 2 ( Iflc : 1.8 � 5.4 A)
CM Type 3 ( Iflc : 4.5 � 13.5 A)
CM Type 4 ( Iflc : 12.6 � 37.8 A)
CM Type 5 ( Iflc : 36 � 80 A)
10MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
INTRODUCTION
Part number selection MCOMP DISPLAY UNIT PART NUMBER
D1
D1
D2
DISPLAY UNIT
Auxiliary Voltage
MCOMP_DISPLAY_UNIT_D1_1
Universal (80 � 230 V AC/DC)
24 V DC
Cable of 0.5 m
Cable of 1 m
Cable of 2 m
Display � Main unit Cable
1
H
1
2
Table 2-6: Display Unit order code
Table 2-7: Expansion Unit order code
Part number selection MCOMP MAIN UNIT PART NUMBER
MCOMP_EXPANSION_UNIT_A_YI_H
4DI/2DO Expansion Unit
8DI Expansion Unit
5DI/2AI Expansion Unit
Universal (80 � 230 V AC/DC)
230 V AC/DC
110 V AC/DC
24 V DC
Cable of 0.4 m
A
A
B
C
H
H
EXPANSION UNIT
Module Type
Voltage sensing forDigital Input Card
Expansion � Mainunit cable
YI
UI
YI
ZI
DI
Table 2-8: Accessories order code
Part number selection MCOMP LOOSE CABLE PART NUMBER
MCOMP_LOOSE_CABLE_BB
ACCESSORIES/LOOSE CABLES
Cable Type Display � Main unit cable of 0.5 mDisplay � Main unit cable of 1.0 mDisplay � Main unit cable of 2.0 m
CM � Main unit cable of 0.5 mCM � Main unit cable of 1.0 m
Expansion � Main unit cable of 0.4 mCM - Main unit cable of 0.3 mCM - Main unit cable of 0.75 m
ABCDEFGH
Note: While selecting CM, it is strictly recommended to match the IFLC of the motor speci�ed by motor manufacturer with CM IFLC range. For IFLC range higher than 81A, conventional CTs are required along with MCOMP CM. CM1 and CM2 is used when secondary of conventional CT is 1 A and 5 A respectively.
While selecting main unit, 24 VDC voltage digital input card can be selected only if auxiliary voltage is selected as 24 VDC.
Above selection of MCOMP units and accessories is applicable for �at lid (ZX8* series CAT numbers) MCOMP relays. Ordering information of earlier version of MCOMP units and CM units with dimensions 67 x 59.3 x 55 (D x W x H) for CM-1 module & 109.2 x 107.8 x 60 for CM 2-5 modules is available upon request.
11MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
INTRODUCTION
Getting Started
For understanding the full functionality of the Relay a basic knowledge is required. It includes powering-up the Relay, setting date & time for recording of events/trips records.
The steps to be followed are shown below:
1. For powering-up the Relay, check for the power supply requirement mentioned on the side label: 80-240 V AC/DC or 24 V DC.
2. Check for polarity of power supply as L/+ (Relay terminal 72/Display terminal 75) and N/- (Relay terminal 71/Display terminal 76) on the Relay/ Display.
3. Once powered on, the motor status LED on the Relay and PWR/COMM LED on the Display glows.
4. If Display is present in the system, ensure a proper connection is established between the Relay and the Display. After connection, the Display shows L&T logo screen followed by metering screen within 3 seconds. This ensures healthy communication between the Relay and the Display.
5. Set date and time of the Relay from Display Menu (Refer System Settings in chapter User Interface) or from special commands in MCOMP Suite (Refer Special Commands in chapter User Interface).
13MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SPECIFICATIONS
General
Full Load Current Setting (IFLC)
Setting Range
Rated Voltage Setting (VL-L)
Setting Range
Power Supply
Aux Supply Voltage
Operational Aux Supply Voltage
Power Consumption
0.6 - 600 A
380 � 800 V
For universal Aux supply:
AC: 110 - 240V
DC: 110 - 220V
For 24 VDC Aux supply:
24 VDC
For universal Aux supply:
AC: 70-265 VAC,
DC: 93-265 VDC
For 24 VDC Aux supply:
18-28 VDC
Main unit:
For universal Aux supply : ~ 20VA or 20W
For 24 VDC Aux supply : ~ 18W
(Above power consumption values are including two expansion units connected to main unit)
Display unit:
For universal Aux supply : ~ 5VA or 5W
For 24 VDC Aux supply : ~ 5W
Frequency and Phase Sequence (settable)
System Frequency 50 or 60 Hz
Phase Sequence RYB or RBY
Digital Inputs
Inputs Optically Isolated
Sensing Range (current consumption andsure-ON voltage of DI channel)
Sure On voltages (AC):
1] 60-240 V AC/DC card = 63VAC (3mA)
2] 110 V AC/DC card = 73VAC (3mA)
3] 240V AC/DC card = 144VAC (2.5mA)
Sure On voltages (DC):
1] 60-240 V AC/DC card = 75VDC (3mA)
2] 110 V AC/DC = 80VDC (3.1mA)
3] 240V AC/DC = 184VDC (2.6mA)
4] 24V DC = 18VDC (2.2mA)
Sure Off voltages (AC):
1] 60-240 V AC/DC card = 53VAC
2] 110 V AC/DC card = 61VAC
3] 240V AC/DC card = 122VAC
Sure Off voltages (DC):
1] 60-240 V AC/DC card = 65VDC
2] 110 V AC/DC = 71VDC
3] 240V AC/DC = 168VDC
4] 24V DC = 16VDC
Table 3-1 (1): General Speci�cations
14MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SPECIFICATIONS
Digital Output Contacts
Base unit have all Form C contacts
Expansion unit have all Form A contacts
Rated Current 10 A on 240 V AC
10 A on 24 V DC
Maximum Breaking Capacity AC 2400 VA
Life expectancy Mechanical: 10,000,000 operations min. (at 18,000 operations/hr under no load)Electrical: 100,000 operations average. (at 1,800 operations/hr under rated load)
Analog Output
Current Output
Accuracy
Max. Load
Isolation
Assignable Parameters
4 � 20 mA
±5 %
200 Ohms
2500 V
Voltage, Current, Power, Temperature, Frequency
Analog Input
Input Range
Accuracy
Resolution
Input shunt resistance
Max Input Current (Destructive)
Conversion time
4�20 mA/0�20 mA (user selectable)
±1 % of full scale value
12 bits
50 Ohms
24 mA
600 ms
Temperature Input
Input Type RTD (PT-100) or PTC Thermistor
Communication Ports
Micro-USBRJ 11 (RS 485 support)4 Terminal Screw Type (RS 485 support)DB9 ConnectorRJ 45 portProtocol
1 on display front1 for MCOMP suite/display communication1 in case of Modbus serial communication1 in case of Profibus communication1 in case of Modbus TCP/IP communicationModbus or Profibus-DP or Modbus TCP/IP
Dimensions
Table 3-2: Dimensions
Component
103.95
35
67
109.2
102
Depth (mm) Width (mm) Height (mm)
Relay
Display
CM � 1
CM � 2 to CM � 5
Expansion Unit
92
96
59.3
107.8
83
120
51
55
60
70
Table 3-1 (2): General Speci�cations
Digital output operating time Pickup time - 4.8 msDrop off time - 4.4 ms
15MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SPECIFICATIONS
Type Tests
Tests
IEC 60068-2-1
IEC 60068-2-14
IEC 60068-2-6
IEC 60068-2-2
IEC 60068-2-30
IEC 60255-21-2
IEC 60255-5:2000(Cl. No 6.1.4)
IEC 60255-5:2000(Cl. No 6.1.3)
Standard Test Level
Cold
Temperature Cycling
Vibration
Dry Heat
Damp Heat
Shock Resistance
Bump
Enclosure Protection
Dielectric
Impulse
-20oC, 72 Hours
-20oC to 70oC, 3 hrs, 2 cycles
10 to 150 Hz, 1G
-20oC to 70oC, 3hrs
55oC, 6 cycles, 24 hrs/cycle, 95% relative humidity
30G, 18 shocks
25G, 6000 bumps
IP 41 enclosed in a panel
2kV, 1 min
4kV
IEC 61000-4-11
IEC 60255-5:2000(Cl. No 6.2.2)
IEC 61000-4-2, edition 1.2, 2001-04
Voltage Dip and Interruption
Insulation Resistance
Electrostatic Discharge Immunity
Class A
500 VDC, 5 sec
8kV air discharge 6kV contact discharge
IEC 61000-4-3Radiated RF Immunity Severity Level 3 Field Strength 10 V/m
IEC 61000-4-4
IEC 61000-4-5
IEC 61000-4-6
IEC 61000-4-18
CISPR 22 @ IEC : 2005
CISPR 22 @ IEC : 2005
Fast Transient, Burst Immunity
Surge Immunity
Conducted RF Immunity
High Frequency Disturbance Immunity
Conducted Emission
Radiated Emission
4kV @ 5kHz
4kV line-to-earth
Severity Level 3 Voltage level: 10 Vrms
1kV, 3 pulses
Certifications
Certification
ISO: Relay is designed and manufactured using ISO 9001 certified quality program.
CE: CE Mark- Low Voltage Directive, EMC Directive.
PNO: Relay is certified with PNO certificate from Profibus International for Profibus variant of the Relay.
Environmental Conditions
Environmental Conditions
Typical conditions under which the Relay is designed to operate:
Temperature
Supply Voltage Fluctuation
Relative Humidity
-20 to 70 °C (operating)
-40 to 85 °C (storage) Since the equipment consist of Electrolyticcapacitors, it is advised to Power ON the relay continuously at leastfor an hour in period of one year.
10 % of nominal voltage
5 to 95 %
Table 3-5: Environmental Conditions
Table 3-4: Certi�cations
Table 3-3: Type Tests
16MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SPECIFICATIONS
Relay Elements
Relay Elements
20 � 100 % IFLC
5 � 30 %
Overload (49)
Setting Range
Thermal Memory Reset Value
Locked Rotor (50LR)
Setting Range
Trip Delay
150 � 1000 % IFLC
0.5 � 30 sec
Phase Reversal (47B)
Setting Range
Trip Delay
RYB or RBY
Instantaneous
Phase Loss (47A)
Trip Delay 0.1 � 30 sec
Earth Fault (50N or 50 SG)
Type
Setting Range
Trip Delay
Vector Sum or CBCT
Vector Sum = 20-500% IFLC CBCT = 0.1-20 A Primary
0.1 � 60 sec
Excessive Start Time
Setting Range
Mode
1 � 200 sec
Enable/Disable
Max Number of Starts (66)
Setting Range
Number of permissive starts
Inhibit Period
15 � 60 min
1 � 30
1 � 120 min
Under Current (37)
Setting Range
Trip Delay
30 � 85 % Ir
1 � 120 sec
Over Current (50P)
Setting Range
Trip Delay
50 � 1000 % IFLC
0.1 � 10 sec
Under Voltage (27)
Setting Range
Trip Delay
20 � 85 % VN
0.2 � 25 sec
Current Unbalance (46)
Setting Range
Trip Delay
5 � 100 % IFLC
1 � 30 sec
Table 3-6 (1): Relay Elements
17MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SPECIFICATIONS
Voltage Unbalance (47)
Setting Range
Trip Delay
5 � 50 % VN
0.2 � 20 sec
Over Voltage (59)
Setting Range
Trip Delay
101 � 130 % VN
0.2 � 25 sec
Under Frequency (81L)
Setting Range
Trip Delay
94 � 98 % FS
1 � 30 sec
Over Frequency (81H)
Setting Range
Trip Delay
101 � 105 % FS
1 � 30 sec
Over Frequency (81H)
Type : RTD or PTC 1 Pt-100 RTD or max. 6 PTC in series
Reacceleration (27LV)
Voltage Dip
Voltage Restoration
Restart Time
Restart Delay
20 � 90 % VN
65 � 95 % VN
0.2 � 60 sec
4 � 1200 sec
Communication Failure
Setting Range
Trip Delay
Trip only in Remote
2 � 10 sec
1 � 30 sec
Enable/Disable
Time Delayed Phase Over Current (51P) Stage 1 and Stage 2
Setting Range
Time Constant
IEC Curves
20 � 1000 % IFLC
0.5 � 600 sec
Inverse, Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse
Time Delayed Neutral Over Current (51N) Stage 1 and Stage 2
Setting Range
Time Constant
IEC Curves
20 � 1000 % IFLC
0.5 � 600 sec
Inverse, Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse
Analog Input (Trip/Alarm)
Setting Range
Trip Delay
Mode of reset
0/4 � 20mA
1 � 30 sec
Local / Auto / Communication / Remote
Table 3-6 (2): Relay Elements
18MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SPECIFICATIONS
Metering
Metering Specifications
Line Currents Measurement Range
Earth fault current measurement range
Phase Voltages Measurement Range
Line Voltages Measurement Range
Analog input measurement
System Frequency
Active, Reactive, Apparent Power
Active, Reactive, Apparent Energy
Power Factor
Thermal Capacity
Temperature Measurement Range
0 � 6000A with accuracy + 1% from 0.5 times IFLC to 1.5 times IFLC and beyond that + 5%
+ 1% or + 50mA whichever is greater
0 � 600V with accuracy + 1% up to Nominal Voltage and + 5% after nominal voltage
0 � 1000V with accuracy + 1% up to Nominal Voltage and + 5% after nominal voltage
0 / 4 � 20mA with ± 1% of full scale value up to 20mA and ±5% after 20mA till 24mA.
+ 1%
+ 5%
+ 5%
0.9 to 1 with + 2%
0.707 to 0.9 with + 3%
0.5 to 0.707 with + 5%
+ 2%
o0°C to +180°C in case of RTD, ±3 C
0� to 10K� in case of PTC
Monitoring
Monitoring Specifications
Records
Hour Meter
Operation Counters
Starting Curve
Starting Time
Starting Current
DIO Status
Stores last five event records with date and time stamp.
Stores last five trip records with date and time stamp. Record gets stored with current, voltage, temperature,frequency values present at the time of tripping.
Stores last stop cause
Records and stores last operational hours and total operation hours
Records and stores number of starts, stops and trips of the drive
Records and stores the starting characteristics of the drive
Records and stores the start time taken
Records the peak current taken during starting of the drive
Shows real time status of digital input and output of the relay
Table 3-7: Metering Speci�cations
Table 3-8: Monitoring Speci�cations
Note: The Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Overview
This section provides information about the installation of the Relay and the various connections attaching to the ports of the Relay, CM, Display and DIO Expansion Module.
The user must be familiar with all con�gurations and features in the Relay before installing, for safe installation and connection.
Mechanical Installation
This section provides description about the Mechanical
Component
103.95
35
67
109.2
102
Depth (mm) Width (mm) Height (mm)
Relay
Display
CM � 1
CM � 2 to CM � 5
Expansion Unit
92
96
59.3
107.8
83
120
51
35
35
70
Main Unit Dimensions
Figure 4-1: Main Unit Dimension
20MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
INSTALLATION
Installation of the Relay along with the dimensions and product labels. These dimensions help in identifying proper installation space for the Relay and its wiring connections.
Dimensions
The complete relay product package consists of the Relay, CM, Expansion Module and the Display. The dimensions of all the units are mentioned below. Some units may or may not be present depending on the ordering by the end user. Figure 4�1 to Figure 4�5 shows the dimensions in diagrams.
CM 1 Dimensions
Figure 4-2: CM 1 Dimensions
TOP VIEW FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW
92
120
103.95
103.
95
92
LEGENDMM
TOP VIEW
59.3
35
FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW
59.3
67
35
LEGENDMM
CM 2-5 Dimensions
Figure 4-3: CM 2-5 Dimensions
21MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
INSTALLATION
FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW
107.8
109.
2
3535
LEGENDMM
TOP VIEW107.8
35
DIO Expansion Module Dimensions
Figure 4-4: DIO Expansion Module Dimensions
Display Dimensions
Figure 4-5: Display Dimensions
TOP VIEW
96
35
FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW
96
51
35
LEGENDMM
PWR/COMM
MOTOR STATUS
ALARM/PICKUP
TRIPRST ENT
Mini USB PortLN
FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW
84
70
TOP VIEW
LEGENDMM
102
102
Product Identification Label
The product identi�cation label gives information about the product model, serial number, and revision number. It is located on the side of the units. Figure 4�6 shows format of the product identi�cation label.
Figure 4-6: Product Identi�cation Label
Relay Mounting
The Relay is mounted on 30 mm DIN Rail provided in the motor starter module. Figure 4�7 shows the Relay mounting.
Figure 4-7: Relay Mounting
22MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
INSTALLATION
Procedure:
1. Before mounting the Relay, ensure that power supply to control panel is disconnected and the relay is free from all power connections.
2. Pull the DIN Clip.
3. Position the Relay on the DIN Rail properly.
4. Push the DIN Clip to �x the Relay.
5. Follow the reverse procedure for removal of the Relay.
Mounting
Din Clip
4
Din Rail
2
3
CM Mounting
CM is mounted on the 15mm DIN Rail provided in the motor starter module. Figure 4�8 shows the mounting of CM.
Figure 4-8: CM Mounting
Din Rail
2
1
Din Clip3
Procedure:
1. Pull the DIN Clip.
2. Position the CM unit on the DIN Rail properly.
3. Push the DIN Clip to �x the CM unit.
4. Follow the reverse procedure for removal of the CM.
Note: Note: Mounting of Current module with increased height as compared to height mentioned in this manual requires 30mm DIN rail instead of 15mm DIN rail.
Display Mounting
The Display can be mounted in a cut-out on the front door by using mounting clips provided. The cut out dimension required is (W x H) : 92.5 x 45 mm. Figure 4�9 shows the Display Mounting.
Figure 4-9: Display Mounting
DisplayCutout
23MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
INSTALLATION
Procedure:
1. Before installation, ensure that power supply to control panel is disconnected and the relay is free from all power connections.
2. Place the Display at the respective attaching place on the cut- out of the control plate.
3. To install the Display use the mounting clips. Place the clip on the slot provided and push it towards the control plate. Or it can be directly place to the end of control plate and �t it by just pressing it on Display.
4. Follow the reverse procedure the removal of the Display.
PanelFrame
MountingClip
DIO Expansion Module Mounting
The DIO Expansion Module is mounted on 30mm DIN Rail provided in the motor starter module. Figure 4�10 shows the DIO Expansion Module installation.
Figure 4-10: DIO Expansion Module Mounting
Din Rail2
3
Din Clip
4
Procedure:
1. Before installation, ensure that power supply to control panel is disconnected and the DIO Expansion module is free from all power connections.
2. Pull the DIN Clip.
3. Position the DIO Expansion Module on the DIN Rail properly.
4. Push the DIN Clip to �x the DIO Expansion Module.
5. Follow the reverse procedure for removal of the DIO Expansion Module.
24MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
INSTALLATION
Electrical Installation
This section describes about the electrical installation of the Relay main unit, CM, Display and DIO Expansion module. Figure 4�11 shows the typical relay wiring diagram.
Figure 4-11: Typical wiring diagram
PWR/COMM
MOTOR STATUS
ALARM/PICKUP
TRIPRST ENT
Mini USB PortLN
CM UNIT
R Y B
CBCT
R Y BS2
S1
M
RYBN
SFU / MCCB
CONTACTOR
61 Dl1
62 Dl2
63 Dl3
64 Dl4
65 Dl5
66 Dl6
67 COM
DIG
ITA
L IN
PUTS
3 4
Y R
3-PH.VOLTAGE
1 2
N B
71
N/-
72
L/+
AUX.VOLT
CONTACTOR COIL
TRIP INDICATION
DIG
ITA
L O
UTP
UT
CO
NTA
CTS 82
8381858684888987919290
L/+
N/-
FUSE
START
STOP
RESET
RTD/PTC
Tl1 Tl2
ANALOG O/P
AO1 AO2 D+ D-
RS485
MODBUS RS485 LOOPING
4-20mA OUTPUTTO FIELD AMMETER
RTD/PTC
25MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
INSTALLATION
Relay Main Unit Wiring
VRVYVB
NEU
1
2 4
5 7
8
63A
3B
4321
Tl1Tl2
AO1AO2
L/+N/-
7271
CM C
onne
ctor
Pro�
bus
TripDrive StatusAlarm/Pick up
Reset
Disp
lay
Port
Expa
nsio
nPo
rt
67666564636261
COMl/P6l/P5l/P4l/P3l/P2l/P1
929190898887868584838281
N/C4COM4
N/04N/C3
COM3N/O3N/C2
COM2N/O2N/C1
COM1N/O1
54535251
Figure 4-12 (1): Overview of the Relay Main Unit
Table 4-2 lists the terminal description for Relay main unit. The relay main unit package consists of MCOMP main unit with its mounting din clip and terminal connectors for wire termination.
Table 4-2: Relay main unit terminal description
Label
3-Phase Reference Voltage Connector (R,Y, B, N)
Current Module Connector
Expansion Module Connector
Display/MCOMP Suite Connector
Communication Port (Modbus RTU/Profibus/Modbus TCP/IP)
Temperature Input (RTD or PTC) and Analog Output Connector
Digital Input Connector
Auxiliary Supply Connector
Digital Output Connector
2.5 sq. mm *(Screw Thread = M2.5, Tightening torque = 0.51 Nm)
Prefabricated cable
Prefabricated cable
Prefabricated cable
For Modbus � 0.5 sq. mm(Screw Thread = M2, Tightening torque = 0.2 Nm)For Profibus, TCP/IP � Respective cable with standard connector
0.5 sq. mm *(Screw Thread = M2, Tightening torque = 0.2 Nm)
2.5 sq. mm *(Screw Thread = M2.5, Tightening torque = 0.51 Nm)
2.5 sq. mm *(Screw Thread = M2.5, Tightening torque = 0.51 Nm)
2.5 sq. mm *(Screw Thread = M2.5, Tightening torque = 0.51 Nm)
Terminal Description Possible Wire Size
1
2
3A
3B
4
5
6
7
8
Note: * In case terminals 3A and 3B is present on the Relay as a combined single terminal, refer MCOMP manual revision B for wiring of such type of a relay. The wire size mentioned here may not be applicable in such case.
Figure 4-12 (2): Main unit
26MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
INSTALLATION
3 Phase Voltage Connections
Figure 4-13: 3 Phase Voltage Connections
FUSE
NLK
RYBN
3 4
Y R
3-PH.VOLTAGE
1 2
N B
71
N/-
72
L/+
AUX.VOLT
61 Dl1
62 Dl2
63 Dl3
64 Dl4
65 Dl5
66 Dl6
67 COM
DIG
ITA
L IN
PUTS
Connection to this particular terminal depends on the application of the relay. Refer Application Notes for various types of connections as per application requirement. The typical connection for this terminal in case of 3P-4W system is shown in Figure 4�13.
Procedure to wire the voltage connector:
1. Ensure that the Relay is free from all power connections.
2. Check the connector cable for proper operation.
3. Loosen the terminal screws of the connector.
4. Insert the RYBN wires (as per application requirement) in their respective terminals.
5. Tighten the terminal screws.
6. Anchor the connector by using two connector screws.
Procedure for removal of the voltage connector:
1. Ensure that the Relay is free from all power connections.
2. Loosen the two connector screws.
3. Detach the connector from the Relay.
The connection to the current input port is from the CM. Figure 4�14 shows the 3-phase current cable connection.
Procedure to wire the current connector:
1. Ensure that the Relay is free from all power connections.
2. Check the CM cable for proper operation.
3. Press the notch and insert the CM cable connector in the Relay current connector.
4. Release the notch.
Procedure for removal of the current connector:
1. Ensure that the Relay is free from all power connections.
2. Press the notch and remove the CM cable connector from the Relay current connector.
3. Release the notch.
3-Phase Current Connections
61 Dl1
62 Dl2
63 Dl3
64 Dl4
65 Dl5
66 Dl6
67 COM
DIG
ITA
L IN
PUTS
CM UNIT
CB
CT
Figure 4-14: 3 Phase Current Connections
27MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
INSTALLATION
Configuration Port Connection
The Relay con�guration can be done in two ways by using:
1. Display
2. MCOMP Suite
Figure 4-16 shows the con�guration port connection using MCOMP Suite.
Procedure to wire the connector:
1. Ensure that the Relay is free from all power connections.
2. Check the Display RS485 connector cable for proper operation.
Figure 4-15: Con�guration Port Connection
61 Dl1
62 Dl2
63 Dl3
64 Dl4
65 Dl5
66 Dl6
67 COMD
IGIT
AL
INPU
TS
Figure 4-16: Con�guration Port connection using MCOMP suite
RS485CONVERTER
3. Press the notch and insert the Display RS485 cable connector in the Relay con�guration port.
4. Release the notch.
Procedure for removal of the connector:
1. Ensure that the Relay is free from all power connections.
2. Press the notch and remove the Display RS485 cable connector from the Relay con�guration port.
3. Release the notch.
28MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
INSTALLATION
RTD/PTC and Analog O/P Connections
Positive Temperature Coef�cient (PTC) or RTD input is directly connected to this port. PT100 is used as a temperature sensing unit. The output of PT100 will act as RTD input in the Relay and the temperature range can be measured between 0 to 180 °C.
RTD or PTC inputs in the Relay are dependent on the ordering code. For RTD/PTC input, the wire should get connected at terminal 53/TI2 and 54/TI1. If no RTD/PTC is connected, the RTD/PTC Alarm and Trip setting must be disabled.
The analog output ranges from 4-20 mA. It can be mapped to any of the parameters like 3-Phase Voltage, 3-Phase Current, Frequency, Power, etc,. This output is given to an analog meter like LCS meter (4�20 mA), DCS for monitoring, etc,. For analog output the wire should get connected at terminals 52/AO1 (+ve) and 51/AO2 (-ve). Figure 4�17 shows the cable connections.
Procedure to wire the connector:
1. Ensure that the Relay is free from all power connections.
2. Check the RTD/PTC/Analog connector cable for proper operation.
3. Loosen the terminal screws of the connector.
4. Insert the cables in their respective terminals.
5. Tighten the terminal screws.
6. Anchor the connector by using two connector screws.
Procedure for removal of the connector:
1. Ensure that the Relay is free from all power connections.
2. Loosen the two connector screws.
3. Detach the connector from the Relay.
Figure 4-17: Temperature and Analog output connections
Relay
AO1 AO2
RTD/PTC
T1 TI2 D+ D-
RS485ANALOG O/P
RTD/PTCTO FIELD AMMETER4-20mA OUTPUT
MODBUS RS485LOOPING
RS485 and RJ45 are available for communication. These ports are used to communicate with the upper level systems such as EWS/DCS/SCADA on either Modbus RTU / Profibus / Modbus TCP/IP protocol. Figure 4�18 to Figure 4�26 show the communication connection with looping diagrams.
Communication Port Connection
RS485 Port Connection for MODBUS RTU
Figure 4-18: Modbus RS485 connection
Relay
AO1 AO2RTD/PTCT1 TI2
ANALOG O/PRS485 MODBUS
41 42 43 44D+D+ D- D-
MODBUS RS485LOOPING
RS485 Port Connection for PROFIBUS
Figure 4-19: Pro�bus RS485 port connection
Relay
AO1 AO2RTD/PTCT1 TI2
ANALOG O/P
PROFIBUS RS485LOOPING
RS485 PROFIBUS
29MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
INSTALLATION
Figure 4-20: Modbus/Pro�bus looping connections
Relay
Relay
Relay
EWS / SCADA / DCS
Relay
41 D+
42 D+
43 D-
44 D-
Relay
41 D+
42 D+
43 D-
44 D-
Relay
41 D+
42 D+
43 D-
44 D-
D-D+
D-
D+EWSSCADADCS
Procedure to wire the connector:
1. Ensure that the Relay is free from all power connections.
2. Check the communication cable for proper operation.
3. Press the notch and insert the communication cable in the Relay communication port.
4. Release the notch.
Procedure for removal of the connector:
1. Ensure that the Relay is free from all power connections.
2. Press the notch and remove the cable from the Relay communication port.
3. Release the notch.
RJ45 Port Connection for MODBUS TCP/IP
Figure 4-21: Modbus TCP/IP RJ 45 port connection
Relay
RJ45 PORT
AO1 AO2RTD/PTCT1 TI2
ANALOG O/P
RJ45 MODBUSTCP/IP PORT
30MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
INSTALLATION
Auxiliary Power Supply Connection
Auxiliary power supply is required to power up the Relay. Universal power supply ranging from 80 to 240 V AC/DC or 24 V DC is used as an auxiliary supply. Figure 4�22 shows auxiliary supply connection.
Procedure to wire the auxiliary supply connector:
1. Check the connector cable for proper operation.
2. Loosen the terminal screws.
3. Insert the supply wires in their respective terminals. Make sure the power supply rating of the Relay before inserting the supply wires into it.
4. Tighten the terminal screws.
5. Anchor the auxiliary supply connector by using two connector screws.
Procedure for removal of the connector:
1. Ensure that the Relay is free from all the possible power connections.
2. Loosen the two connector screws.
3. Remove the auxiliary supply connector from the Relay.
Figure 4-22: Auxiliary Supply connection
N / -
L / +
61 Dl1
62 Dl2
63 Dl3
64 Dl4
65 Dl5
66 Dl6
67 COM
DIG
ITA
L IN
PUTS
1 2 3 4
N B Y R
3-PH.VOLTAGE
71 72
N/- L/+
AUX.VOLT
Digital Input Connections
The Relay main unit has six DIs and one common terminal through which it senses the status of the motor and commands; and works accordingly. Six isolated digital inputs sense the voltage ranging from 60 V to 240 V AC/DC or 24 V DC and is dependent on the selected voltage sensing range during ordering of the relay. The six contact inputs can be programmed to any of the input functions such as Stop, Start, Interlock, Reset, etc,.
Figure 4�23 shows digital input connection.
Procedure to wire the connector:
1. Check the connector cable for proper operation.
2. Loosen the terminal screws.
3. Insert the wires in their respective terminals.
4. Tighten the terminal screws.
5. Anchor the DI connector cable by using two connector screws.
Procedure for removal of the connector:
1. Ensure that the Relay is free from all power connections.
2. Loosen the two connector screws.
3. Remove the DI connector cable from the Relay.
Note: For proper sensing of Digital Inputs, the common terminal must be connected to neutral in case of AC, and to negative (-ve) in caseof DC.
Figure 4-23: Digital Input connections
61 Dl1
62 Dl2
63 Dl3
64 Dl4
65 Dl5
66 Dl6
67 COM
DIG
ITA
L IN
PUTS
N / - L / +
31MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
INSTALLATION
Digital Output Connections
The Relay main unit has four change-over potential free output contacts. These DOs have the current carrying capacity of 10 A on 240 V AC. Each change-over contact has following terminals:
N/O (Normally Open) - It is normally not connected to the common of the corresponding DO. When a DO is activated, the corresponding N/O contact is shorted to the common of that DO.
N/C (Normally Closed) - It is normally connected to the common of the corresponding DO. When a DO is activated, the corresponding N/C contact becomes open to the common of the corresponding DO.
COM - It is the common terminal available to which NO and NC terminals are connected alternately according to the activation of the corresponding output.
These outputs can be programmed to any of the output functions like alarm, trip, etc,. Figure 4�24 shows digital output connection.
Procedure to wire the connector:
1. Check the connector cable for proper operation.
2. Loosen the terminal screws.
3. Insert the wires in their respective terminals.
4. Tighten the terminal screws.
5. Anchor the DO connector by using two connector screws.
Procedure for removal of the connector:
1. Make sure that the Relay is free from all the power connections.
2. Loosen the two connector screws.
3. Detach the DO connector from the Relay.
Figure 4-24: Digital Output connections
CM UNIT
R Y B
CBCT
R Y BS2
S1
M
RYBN
SFU / MCCB
CONTACTOR
CONTACTOR COIL
TRIP INDICATIONN / -
L / +
N / -
L / +
DIG
ITA
L O
UTP
UT
CO
NTA
CTS 82
8381858684888987919290
Current Module (CM) Wiring
Figure 4-25 shows overview of the Current Module Unit.
Table 4-3 lists the terminal description for Current module unit. The current module unit package consists of MCOMP current module unit with its mounting din clip and prefabricated FRC cable for connection with Relay main unit. The length of the cable is dependent on the ordered part number.
Figure 4-25: Current Module unit overview
Table 4-3: Current Module terminal description
CM 1 pass through dia.: 4.5 mm
CM 2-5 pass through dia.: 16 mm
0.5 sq. mm*
(Screw Thread = M2,Tightening torque = 0.2 Nm)
Prefabricated cable
Possible Wire Size/DiameterLabel
3-Phase CurrentPass through Hole
CBCT InputConnector
Current ModuleConnector
TerminalDescription
(R,Y,B)
1
2
Note: * In case separate terminal for CBCT connection is not available on CM unit, refer MCOMP manual revision B for wiring of such type of a relay. The wire size mentioned here may not be applicable in such case.
32MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
INSTALLATION
earth fault current under abnormal conditions. This is used as an input by the Relay to measure earth fault current. Figure 4�26 shows CM wiring.
� In case where external conventional CTs are required to sense the current if the motor IFLC is greater than 80 A, the connection will be as shown in Figure 4�27. Based on the secondary of external CT, MCOMP current module is selected for the required application.
Figure 4-26: Current Module connections
CM UNIT
R Y B
CBCT
R Y B
S2
S1
M
R
Y
B
N
The Relay is provided with its own CM. CM is available in 5 types.
� CM has pass through arrangement, through which the motor supply wires (R, Y and B) enters (all three wires should enter from same side) in to the CM before connecting to the motor.
� The connecting wire from CM to the Relay is of two types based on its length (0.5 m and 1 m).
� In case of sensitive earth fault, CBCT is used. The 3-phase supply to the motor passes through CBCT which senses the
33MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
INSTALLATION
Figure 4-27: External Conventional CT connections
Display Wiring
The OLED Display is an optional unit provided with the Relay to display metering, protection and drive speci�c parameters. Figure
Figure 4-28: Display front and bottom view
D-
D+
L/+ N/+
PWR/COMM
MOTOR STATUS
ALARM/PICKUP
TRIPRST ENT
Mini USB PortLN
PWR/COMM
MOTOR STATUS
ALARM/PICKUP
TRIPRST ENT
Mini USB PortLN
61 Dl1
62 Dl2
63 Dl3
64 Dl4
65 Dl5
66 Dl6
67 COM
DIG
ITA
L IN
PUTS
3 4
Y R
3-PH.VOLTAGE
1 2
N B
71
N/-
72
L/+
AUX.VOLT
CONTACTOR COIL
TRIP INDICATION
DIG
ITA
L O
UTP
UT
CO
NTA
CTS 82
8381858684888987919290
L/+
N/-
RTD/PTC
Tl1 Tl2
ANALOG O/P
AO1 AO2 D+ D-
RS485
MODBUS RS485 LOOPING
4-20mA OUTPUTTO FIELD AMMETER
CM UNIT
B Y R
CBCT
R Y BS2
S1
M
RYBN
SFU / MCCB
FUSE
START1
STOP
RESET
RTD/PTC
START2CONTACTOR BCONTACTOR A
1 13 3 55
2 24 4 66
EXTERNAL CT
4�28 shows the Display front and bottom view. The Display unit package consists of MCOMP
Note: Ensure that all cables (RYB) enter from single side. The Relay auto detects the CM type. Ensure power recycle of the Relay after proper connection with the CM.
34MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
INSTALLATION
Display unit along with its 4 mounting clips and Display-cable for connecting to relay main unit. The length of the Display-cable is dependent on the ordered part number.
1. Con�guration Port connection.
Con�guration port (RJ-11) is provided to communicate with the Relay. Figure 4�29 shows the con�guration port available at bottom side of the Display. A prefabricated cable comes along with the display to connect to the relay main unit.
Figure 4-29: Display con�guration port connections
2. Auxiliary Supply Connection.
An auxiliary supply is needed to power up the Display, which will get connected to the port provided at the bottom side of the Display. Figure 4�30 shows the Display auxiliary supply connection. Possible wire size for termination is 0.5 sq. mm.
Figure 4-30: Display auxiliary supply connection
D-
D+
L/+ N/+
Auxiliary Supply
D-
D+
L/+ N/+
3. Front USB Port Connection.
The OLED Display is provided with a USB port in the front. It enables local con�guration through computer/laptop using MCOMP Suite. Mini USB cable is required for the connection. Figure 4�31 shows the Display front port connection.
Figure 4-31: Display front USB port connection
PWR/COMM
MOTOR STATUS
ALARM/PICKUP
TRIPRST ENT
Mini USB PortLN
Note: * In case RJ11 port is not available on display unit, refer MCOMPmanual revision B for wiring of such type of a relay.
35MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
INSTALLATION
Expansion Unit Wiring
The DIO Expansion unit is detachable optional unit used along with MCOMP main unit for increasing the count of Digital/Analog input and digital output as per application requirement. The expansion unit comes in three types as 4DI/2DO module having 4 digital inputs & 2 digital outputs, 5DI/2AI module having 5 digital inputs & 2 analog inputs and 8DI module having 8 digital inputs. The expansion unit package consists of MCOMP expansion unit with its mounting din clip and expansion-cable of 0.4 meter for connecting to relay main unit. Refer Digital input and Digital output wiring sections in Main unit wiring for expansion DIO wiring connections.
Maximum three expansion modules can be connected to a single relay main unit provided:
� Maximum number of 4DI/2DO units allowed to be connected to main unit is 2.
� Maximum number of 5DI/2AI or 3DI/2DO/2AI units allowed to be connected to main unit is 1. 5DI/2AI unit and 3DI/2DO/2AI unit cannot be connected together to main unit.
� If 5DI/2AI or 3DI/2DO/2AI unit is connected along with 4DI/2DO or 8DI expansion unit then it should be connected as last unit in the series.
Table 4-4 lists the terminal description for various types of Expansion module units.
Table 4-5 shows all possible combination of expansion units which can be successfully connected together to the main unit.
Figure 4-32 shows MCOMP main unit and expansion unit connection representation:
DI1-DI8:
Field input connection points
DO1(1-2),DO2(3-4):
N/O Digital output connection points
AI1+/-, AI2+/-:
Analog inputs connection points
COM:
Wire neutral in case of AC digital inputs, -ve supply in
case of DC digital inputs
Expansion Module Type Label, Terminal Description and possible wire size
T:
Test push button
1,2,3,4 Dip switches:
Select module ID for expansion module as per
configuration done in relay main unit
When �1000� => module id 1
When �0100� => module id 2
When �1100� => module id 3
Possible wire size for all termination points: 2.5 sq. mm.
(Screw Thread = M3, Tightening torque = 0.45-0.5 Nm)
4DI/2DO Module
1 2 3 4
DO1 DO2
Dl1 Dl2 Dl3 Dl4 COM COM
T
1 2 3 4
Dip switches
8Dl Module
Dl7 COM COM Dl8
Dl1 Dl2 Dl3 Dl4 COM COM
T
1 2 3 4
Dip switches
Dl5 Dl6
5Dl/2Al Module
Dl4 COM COM Dl5
Dl1 Dl2 Dl3 COM Al2+ Al2-
T
1 2 3 4
Dip switches
Al1+ Al1-
Table 4-4: Expansion Module terminal description
36MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
INSTALLATION
Table 4-5: Expansion unit connection combinations
Single unit Combination
4DI/2DO
8DI
5DI/2AI
3DI/2DO/2AI
Expansion unit 1 Expansion unit 2 Expansion unit 3
1
2
3
4
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Two unit Combination
4DI/2DO
4DI/2DO
4DI/2DO
4DI/2DO
8DI
8DI
8DI
Expansion unit 1 Expansion unit 2 Expansion unit 3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8DI
4DI/2DO
5DI/2AI
3DI/2DO/2AI
8DI
5DI/2AI
3DI/2DO/2AI
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Three unit Combination
4DI/2DO
4DI/2DO
8DI
8DI
8DI
8DI
8DI
Expansion unit 1 Expansion unit 2 Expansion unit 3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
4DI/2DO
8DI
8DI
8DI
8DI
4DI/2DO
4DI/2DO
8DI
8DI
8DI
5DI/2AI
3DI/2DO/2AI
5DI/2AI
3DI/2DO/2AI
Figure 4-32: Main unit and expansion unit connection
Relay main unit
Expansion unit 1 Expansion unit 2 Expansion unit 3
8Dl Module
Dl7 COM COM Dl8
Dl1 Dl2 Dl3 Dl4 COM COM
T1 2 3 4
Dip switches
Dl5 Dl6
8Dl Module
Dl7 COM COM Dl8
Dl1 Dl2 Dl3 Dl4 COM COM
T1 2 3 4
Dip switches
Dl5 Dl6
8Dl Module
Dl7 COM COM Dl8
Dl1 Dl2 Dl3 Dl4 COM COM
T1 2 3 4
Dip switches
Dl5 Dl6
VRVYVB
NEU
4321
Tl1Tl2
AO1AO2
L/+N/-
7271
CM C
onne
ctor
Pro�
bus
TripDrive StatusAlarm/Pick up
Reset
Disp
lay
Port
Expa
nsio
nPo
rt
67666564636261
COMl/P6l/P5l/P4l/P3l/P2l/P1
929190898887868584838281
N/C4COM4
N/04N/C3
COM3N/O3N/C2
COM2N/O2N/C1
COM1N/O1
54535251
38MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
METERING AND MONITORING
Overview
This chapter describes the various parameters available in the Relay for metering and monitoring. The Relay measures real-time values of Current, Voltage, Power, Analog Output, Temperature and monitors motor speci�c data like number of starts, stops, running hours, etc,.
All values measured by the Relay can be accessed using following interfaces:
� Display
� MCOMP Suite
� Communication Port
Metering
Current Based Metering
True RMS Line Current
The Relay measures RMS values of line currents (Ir, Iy and Ib) through CM.
Ir: Current �owing through R phase
Iy: Current �owing through Y phase
Ib: Current �owing through B phase
Earth Fault Current
Earth Fault Current is an unbalanced current which can be represented by vector summation. In case of 3-phase system, under healthy conditions, Earth Fault current will be zero. It is present only when Earth Fault occurs. The Relay measures the Earth Fault current in following ways.
Vector Summation
Earth Fault Current is equal to the vector sum of three line current values. It is calculated using formula:
Ie = Ir + Iy + Ib
Where Ie is Earth Fault Current.
CBCT (Core Balance Current Transformer)
CBCT is used for earth leakage and sensitive Earth Fault conditions. The 3-phase supply to the motor passes through CBCT which senses the Earth Fault current under abnormal conditions. The output of CBCT is used as an input by the Relay to measure Earth Fault current.
Average of True RMS Current
The average current is calculated using formula:
Iavg = (Ir + Iy + Ib)/3
Thermal Capacity
The Thermal Capacity is the tolerable capacity that the motor can withstand under overload condition. It is calculated internally by the Relay as per IEC 60255 curve. To calculate the Thermal Capacity, the Relay uses the IFLC of the Motor, instantaneous running current and trip class of the Motor.
Current Unbalance
Current unbalance is calculated in percentage as explained in Protection Chapter under Current Unbalance Protection. It is instantaneously available for monitoring in MCOMP suite & Display monitoring window.
Voltage Based Metering
True RMS Line Voltage
The Relay measures the RMS value of the line voltage (Vry, Vyb and Vbr).
Vry: Voltage of R phase with respect to Y phase
Vyb: Voltage of Y phase with respect to B phase
Vbr: Voltage of B phase with respect to R phase
True RMS Phase Voltage
The Relay measures phase to neutral voltages (Vr, Vy and Vb).
Vr: Voltage of R phase with respect to neutral
Vy: Voltage of Y phase with respect to neutral
Vb: Voltage of B phase with respect to neutral
Average of True RMS Voltage
Average RMS voltage is calculated using formula:
Vavg = (Vr + Vy + Vb)/3
Frequency
Relay measures the frequency of the 3-phase voltage supplied to the Motor.
39MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
METERING AND MONITORING
Power and Energy Based Metering
Power
Active, Reactive, and Apparent Power are based on the following factors:
� 3-phase RMS phase voltage Vr,Vy,Vb
� 3-phase RMS line current Ir,Iy,Ib
� Power factor (cosφ)
Active power is also known as real power which gives the RMS value of power. It is calculated using formula:
Active Power (kW) = VrxIrxcosφx VyxIyxcosφ+ VbxIbxcosφ
Reactive Power is calculated using formula:
Reactive Power (kVAR) = VrxIrxsinφx VyxIyxsinφ+ VbxIbxsinφ
Apparent Power is calculated using formula:
Apparent Power (kVA) = (Total Active Power)² + (Total Reactive Power)²
Energy
The energy consumed by the load can be calculated using formula:
Active Energy (kWh) = Total Active Power X Number of Hours Run
Reactive Energy (kVARh) = Total Reactive Power x Number of Hours
Run
Apparent Energy (kVAh) = Total Apparent Power x Number of Hours
Run
O P Re S
S
Q
O
j(lm) S
Figure 5-1: Power Factor
Miscellaneous Parameter
Temperature
Relay measures the temperature of the Motor by using RTD or PTC inputs. RTD measures temperature in terms of degree Celsius, PTC measures temperature in terms of ohmic value.
Digital Input/Output Status
Relay shows Real time (activated or deactivated) status of Digital Input/Output.
COMPlogic output Status
Relay shows Real time (activated or deactivated) status of COMPlogic outputs (Truth tables, timer, counters etc)
Power Factor
Power Factor is the cosine of the angle between the phase currents and phase voltages. It can also be represented as the absolute value of the ratio of Active Power to Apparent Power.
Power Factor is calculated using formula:
Power Factor = Active Power / Apparent Power
Monitoring
Motor Speci�c Data Monitoring
Phase Sequence
Relay detects the phase sequence (Voltage Phase Sequence) of the 3-phase motor.
Motor Starting Time
Relay measures the actual time taken by the Motor to start. The motor starting time is measured as time taken by average current to rise from 0 A to a value above IFLC and drop back below IFLC value. Figure 5�2 illustrates the starting curve of the motor.
Figure 5-2: Starting curve of the motor
MotorCurve
Cu
rren
t (R
MS)
Pre Start Starting Time Running
IFLC
Ir
40MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
METERING AND MONITORING
CM Type
Relay auto detects the type of CM connected to the Main Unit.
Number of Starts
Relay measures the total number of times the motor has started from the time factory settings of the Relay has been stored.
Number of Stops
Relay measures the total number of times the motor has stopped from the time factory settings of the Relay has been restored.
Motor Run Hours
Relay measures the number of hours the motor has run from the time it has last been started.
Total Motor Run Hours
Relay measures the total number of hours the motor has run from the time the Relay settings have been restored.
Starting Peak Current
It is the maximum current drawn by the motor during the starting time as shown in Figure 5�2.
Annunciations
Relay indicates healthy/unhealthy status of the motor such as Ready to start, Run, Trip, Alarm and Inhibit conditions using annunciation LEDs.
42MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
PROTECTIONS
Pickup Set: A setting limit for the monitored parameter that triggers Pickup of a protection function. Pickup set is calculated using formula:
Pickup Set = Pickup Set in % of corresponding parameter
= (Pickup Set in %) X (Parameter Value)/100
Example: For Locked Rotor protection, the corresponding parameter is IFLC. If IFLC value is 10 A, then the corresponding parameter value will be 10 A, for Pickup Set of 150 %:
Pickup Set Value (IOC) = (150 x 10) / 100 = 15 A
Alarm Set: A limit in % for the monitored parameter that triggers a protection function alarm. Alarm Set value is calculated using formula:
Alarm Set = Alarm Set in % of corresponding parameter
= (Alarm Set in %) X (Pickup Set)/100
Example: For Locked Rotor protection, the corresponding parameter is IOC (Pickup Set). If IOC value is 15 A, then the corresponding parameter value will be 15 A and for Alarm set of 90 %:
Alarm Set value = (90 x 15) / 100 = 13.5
Hysteresis band: This setting de�nes the reset value for the alarm and pickup set values for respective protection. Hysteresis setting is categorized into three settings as current, voltage and frequency to provide alarm/pickup reset values for all current based, voltage based and frequency based protections respectively.
Pickup Reset: A setting limit for the monitored parameter that resets (removes) the Pickup condition when the corresponding monitored parameter resumes to a safe value, else the Pickup condition persists. Pickup Reset is calculated using formula:
Pickup Reset = (Pickup Set)*(100 + Hysteresis band setting)/100
Example: If pickup set value is 15 A for locked rotor protection, and if current setting in hysteresis band is 5 % then:
Pickup Reset Value = (15)*(100 - 5) / 100 = 14.25 A
Alarm Reset: A limit that resets the alarm condition when the corresponding monitored parameter resumes to a safe value, else the alarm condition persists. Alarm Reset value is calculated using formula:
Alarm Reset = (Alarm Set)*(100 + Hysteresis band setting)/100
Overview
This section provides a detailed description about the various faults possible in the motor; their causes and the preventive measures taken by the Relay to protect the motor. Alarm is an indication which requires immediate attention. It indicates a need for corrective action to prevent fault occurrence. It may result into serious implications if not noticed. The alarm-related parameters can be con�gured for most of the protection functions.
The Relay responds to an Alarm in following ways:
� The alarm gets activated upon the occurrence of any fault.
� The cause and time for the Alarm/Pickup will be recorded.
� Alarm/Pickup LED glows Amber.
� The Relay counts and records the number of Alarm/Pickup conditions.
The Relay responds to a fault in following ways:
� On the Relay, trip LED glows Red.
� On the Relay, motor status LED glows Amber.
� DO of the Relay used for starter will go LOW.
� DO of the Relay used for tripping will go HIGH.
The Relay stores the data for the cause of fault along with the parameters such as time of fault, source of fault and corresponding values of Current, Voltage, Earth Current, Temperature, Power Factor and Frequency. The Relay keeps a count for the number of faults occurred and stores �ve events & �ve trip records which can be viewed by the user at any point of time.
The Relay clears the alarm/pickup whenever the measured value drops below the Alarm/Pickup Reset threshold.
Figure 6�1 describes a typical motor protection function. This diagram is expressed in terms of a measuring parameter.
Where,
X: Measuring Parameter
Xa: Alarm threshold value
Xp: Trip set value
Parameter
Current
Voltage
Frequency
Setting Range
3 � 15 %
3 � 15 %
1 � 15 %
Step Increase
1 %
1 %
1 %
Factory Setting
3 %
3 %
3 %
Figure 6-1: Motor Protection Function
Measuring parameter (X)
X>=XPX>=Xa
Trip DelayInstantaneous
Trip Alarm
Table 4-6: Hysteresis setting
43MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
PROTECTIONS
Example: If alarm set value is 15 A for under current protection, and if current setting in hysteresis band is 5 % then:
Alarm Reset Value = (15)*(100 + 5) / 100 = 15.75 A
Trip Delay: A time limit after which the Relay issues Trip command from the time of Pickup, if condition persists.
Trip Curve Characteristic (TCC): The Relay includes a de�nite trip characteristic for all protection functions as shown in Figure 6�2, (except the Thermal Overload function, as it has inverse trip curve characteristic shown in Figure 6�3).
De�nite TCC: The duration of the fault delay remains constant irrespective of the changes in the value of the measured quantity (current), as described in the Figure 6�2.
Inverse TCC: The duration of the time delay varies inversely with the value of the measured quantity. The possibility of damage increases along with the measured quantity and thus the time delay decreases.
Note: Factory default setting is class 10 for Overload protection.
Reset modes: Reset mode allows the user to select a desirable mode to reset the trip condition. The available modes are:
� Local: Reset from MCOMP Suite or Display
� Remote: Reset through Digital Input
� Communication: Reset through Modbus RTU, Pro�bus or Modbus TCP/IP
� Auto: Automatically reset once fault is cleared
Different reset modes can be independently selected for each protection.
Protection function is classi�ed on the basis of following parameters.
� Thermal
� Current
� Voltage
� Frequency
� Miscellaneous
Thermal Protection
The fundamental protective function of the Relay is Thermal Protection. Thermal Capacity of the motor is the tolerable capacity that the motor can withstand under overload condition. In normal condition, the motor temperature will eventually stabilize at some steady state temperature (within the limit) due to �ow of steady current. Under transient and overload conditions the Thermal Capacity of the motor rises, but within the corresponding limits. When the overload persists for a considerable amount of time, the motor temperature and thermal capacity will rise. A trip occurs when the thermal capacity used by the motor reaches its 100 %.The Thermal Capacity of motor is calculated by measuring the power circuit currents.
Majority of the motor failures are due to overheating. There are many reasons for increase in the temperature and Thermal Capacity of the motor. Fault occurs mainly due to overload, operation on unbalanced condition, poor ventilation, single phasing, short circuits, Earth Fault etc,.
Overheating of the motor damages the windings hence decrease the ef�ciency and life of the motor.
Overload (49)
Overload is a condition where current higher than the rated value �ows to the motor resulting in excessive heating of the motor. Rapid motor heating occurs during the overload, acceleration time, and stall condition. The Relay gives the Overload Protection
Figure 6-2: De�nite TCC
Measuring parameter (X)
Motor Tripped
Trip Delay
XP
Figure 6-3: Inverse TCC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 91
10
100
1000
41*10
MFLA
Tim
e In
Sec
on
ds
Class 5
Class 10Class 15Class 20Class 25Class 30
Note: Auto Reset is available only for Thermal Overload and under voltage Protections.
44MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
PROTECTIONS
based on calculated Thermal Memory (TM) and gives Trip command when thermal capacity reaches its 100 %.The overload curve controls the rate of increase of the thermal capacity used whenever the equivalent motor heating current is greater than current set point. The Thermal Memory is directly proportional to ISET value, which is the overload current setting.
The Relay detects Overload condition and gives:
� An alarm when Thermal Memory reaches above the Alarm Set value.
� Trip when Thermal Memory reaches 100%.
Pause Time Delay: Pause Time Delay is a con�gurable time after which the thermal memory will be reset to zero when the Relay trips due to Overload Protection. It is effective only when pause time setting is enabled.
Thermal Memory Reset Value: It is the value of Thermal Memory at which the trip condition due to overload is reset when the Thermal Memory falls below the Thermal Memory Reset Value. This setting is effective only when auto reset functionality in case of thermal overload is enabled.
Thermal Inhibit Setting: It is the setting for which the Relay will continue to be in inhibit mode if Thermal Memory does not falls below set Thermal inhibit setting value. In inhibit mode, the relay will not detect any auto-start from current or will not allow to the start the motor in case start command is given. This setting is available for editing only through Admin mode of MCOMP suite.
Alarm Response for this protection can be separately enabled or disabled.
Table 6-1 lists the overload protection settings available in the Relay.
Table 6-1: Overload Protection Settings
The Relay thermal model follows IEC 60255 standard model. Trip time is calculated using formula:
Where,
tp: Trip time
Ir : Rated current (ISET)
τ: Time constant
k: Asymptotic Constant of value 1.15
Ip: Current just before the overload current
I: Actual running current
tp = x ln
IIr
2
IIr
2(k)
2
pIr
I 2
Figure 6-3: Inverse TCC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 91
10
100
1000
41*10
MFLA
Tim
e In
Sec
on
ds
Class 5
Class 10Class 15Class 20Class 25Class 30
Parameter Setting Range Step Increase Factory Setting
ISET
Pickup Reset
Alarm Set
Alarm Reset
Thermal Memory Reset Value
Thermal Inhibit Setting
Alarm
Pause Setting
Pause Time Delay
Reset Modes
100 % of IFLC
95
95%
20 %
33 %
Enable
Off
Local
20 � 100 % of IFLC
80 � 100 % of TM
5 � 30 %
30 � 95 %
1 � 1200 sec
5 % of IFLC
5 % of TM
5 %
1 %
1 sec
As per Hysteresis band
As per Hysteresis band
Enable or Disable
On or Off
Local, Remote, Communication, Auto
45MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
PROTECTIONS
Table 6-2 (1): Trip Delay as per Trip Class
Multipleof ISET
Trip Class (as per 60947-4 Standard)
5 10 15 25 30 35 4020
1.151
1.2
1.25
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2.0
2.25
2.5
2.75
3.0
3.25
3.5
3.75
4.0
4.25
4.5
851.68
335.82
251.04
204.46
150.52
118.76
97.42
81.98
70.3
61.14
53.8
40.58
31.86
25.76
21.3
17.94
15.32
13.24
11.58
10.2
9.06
1703.54
671.68
502.14
408.96
301.04
237.54
194.84
163.98
140.6
122.3
107.6
81.16
63.74
51.54
42.6
35.86
30.64
26.48
23.14
20.4
18.12
2555.4
1007.56
753.24
613.46
451.58
356.32
292.28
245.98
210.92
183.46
161.4
121.74
95.5
77.3
63.92
53.8
45.94
39.72
34.7
30.58
27.16
4259.12
1679.32
1255.42
1022.46
752.66
593.88
487.14
409.98
351.52
305.76
269
202.9
159.34
128.82
106.52
89.66
76.56
66.2
57.82
50.96
45.26
5110.98
2015.2
1506.52
1226.96
903.2
712.64
584.56
491.98
421.84
366.9
322.8
243.48
191.2
154.58
127.82
107.58
91.88
79.44
69.38
61.16
54.32
5962.84
2351.08
1757.62
1431.46
1053.74
831.42
682
573.98
492.14
428.06
376.6
284.08
223.06
180.36
149.12
125.5
107.2
92.68
80.96
71.34
63.38
6814.7
2686.96
2008.72
1635.96
1204.28
950.2
779.42
655.95
562.44
489.2
430.42
324.66
254.94
206.12
170.42
143.44
122.5
105.9
92.52
81.54
72.42
3407.26
1343.44
1007.34
817.96
602.12
475.1
389.7
327.98
281.22
244.6
215.2
162.32
127.46
103.06
85.22
71.72
61.62
52.96
46.26
40.78
36.22
4.75
5.0
5.25
5.5
5.75
6.0
6.25
6.5
6.75
7.0
7.25
7.5
7.75
8.1
7.3
6.6
6
5.48
5.02
4.62
4.28
3.96
3.68
3.42
3.2
3
16.2
14.58
13.18
12
10.96
10.04
9.24
8.54
7.9
7.34
6.84
6.38
5.98
24.3
21.86
19.78
17.98
16.42
15.06
13.86
12.8
11.86
11.02
10.26
9.58
8.96
40.48
36.44
32.96
29.96
27.36
25.1
23.1
21.32
19.74
18.34
17.08
15.96
14.94
48.58
43.72
39.56
35.92
32.84
30.1
27.7
25.58
23.7
22.02
20.5
19.14
17.92
56.68
51
46.14
41.96
38.3
35.12
32.32
29.84
27.64
25.68
23.92
22.34
20.9
64.78
58.28
52.74
47.94
43.78
40.14
36.94
34.1
31.6
29.34
27.34
25.52
23.88
32.4
29.14
26.38
23.98
21.9
20.08
18.48
17.06
15.8
14.68
13.68
12.76
11.94
The tripping time depends on the trip class set in the Relay (class 5 to class 40), which de�nes time duration the Relay will take to
trip, as shown in Figure 6�3, and numerically represented byTable 6�2.
46MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
PROTECTIONS
8.0
8.25
8.5
8.75
9.0
9.25
9.5
9.75
10.0
10.25
2.8
2.64
2.48
2.34
2.22
2.1
1.98
1.88
1.8
1.7
5.6
5.26
4.96
4.68
4.42
4.18
3.96
3.76
3.58
3.4
8.4
7.9
7.44
7.02
6.62
6.28
5.94
5.64
5.36
5.1
14
13.16
12.38
11.68
11.04
10.44
9.9
9.4
8.94
8.5
16.8
15.78
14.86
14.02
13.24
12.54
11.88
11.28
10.72
10.2
19.6
18.42
17.34
16.36
15.46
14.62
13.86
13.16
12.5
11.9
22.4
21.04
19.82
18.7
17.66
16.72
15.84
15.04
14.28
13.6
11.2
10.52
9.92
9.36
8.84
8.36
7.92
7.52
7.14
6.8
Table 6-2 (2): Trip Delay as per Trip Class
Note: Thermal Overload protection is always enabled and cannot be disabled in case of motor feeder.At any given time while motor is in running condition, if Thermal Memory reaches 100 %, the relay issues a trip command.
Current Based Protection
Over current Protection (50P)
Over current fault is a condition where the current through the conductor (power circuit) exceeds its preset value. This fault is usually caused due to short circuit, load increase, improper connection, or ground fault.
The Relay detects Overcurrent condition and gives:
� An alarm when current in any of the 3-phases reaches above the Alarm Set value.
� Pickup when current in any of the 3-phases reaches above the pickup value and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after the Trip delay.
Table 6�3 lists the Over current Protection settings available inthe Relay.
Under current Protection (37)
Under current fault is a condition where the current through the conductor (power circuit) reaches below its rated minimum value. Under current condition is observed mainly during No-load. Table 6�4 lists the Undercurrent Protection settings available in the Relay.
The Relay detects Undercurrent condition and gives:
� An Alarm when current in any of the 3-phases goes below the Alarm set value.
� Pickup when current in any of the 3-phases reaches below the pickup value and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after the Trip delay.
Note: At Starting time of the motor Overcurrent is disabled.Trip and Alarm Responses for Overcurrent can be separately con�gured through MCOMP suite or Display
Table 6-3 (1): Overcurrent Protection Settings
Multipleof ISET
Trip Class (as per 60947-4 Standard)
5 10 15 25 30 35 4020
Parameter Setting range
Pickup Set
Pickup Reset
Alarm Set
Alarm Reset
Trip Delay
50 � 1000 % of IFLC
As per hysteresis band
90% of pickup set
As per hysteresis band
0.1 to 10 sec
StepIncrease
FactorySettings
50%
0.1 sec
100%
95
90%
85
0.1 sec
Alarm Enable or Disable Disable
Trip
Reset Modes
Enable or Disable
Local, Remote,Communication
Disable
Local
Parameter Setting range StepIncrease
FactorySettings
Table 6-3 (2): Overcurrent Protection Settings
47MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
PROTECTIONS
Note: Undercurrent protection is disabled for the set starting time in the Relay. Trip and Alarm Responses for Undercurrent can be separately con�gured through MCOMP suite or Display. Under current Protection will be inactive for current less than 10 % of the set full load current.
Earth Fault Protection (50N or 50SG)
Earth current calculation is done in two ways in the Relay.
1. Vector Summation
Earth Fault current is equal to the vector sum of the three line current values. It is calculated using formula:
Ie = Ir + Iy + Ib
Where,
Ie : Earth Fault current
Ir : Current �owing through R phase
Iy: Current �owing through Y phase
Ib: Current �owing through B phase
2. CBCT (Core Balance Current Transformer)
CBCT is used for earth leakage and sensitive Earth Fault conditions. The 3-phases supply to the motor passes through the CBCT which senses the Earth Fault current under abnormal conditions. The output of CBCT is used as an input by the Relay to measure Earth Fault current. It is recommended to use Manufacturer's supplied specially designed CBCT of ratio 2000:1 for MCOMP relay.
The Relay detects the Earth Fault condition and gives:
� An alarm when earth current reaches above the Alarm Set value.
� Pickup when earth current reaches above the pickup value and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after the Trip delay.
Current unbalance Protection (46)
Current unbalance is a condition where the current in the 3-Phases differs in magnitude. Current unbalance is usually caused due to load unbalance or improper motor windings. Large motors can sustain minor current unbalance in the circuit, but small motors cannot.
Current unbalance in the 3-phase circuits induces negative sequence current, which generates negative torque causing themotor to heat up. Negative sequence current affects the rotor by increasing the copper losses and overheating. Current unbalance also causes pulsating magnetic �eld in the stator which results in uneven force at the bearings thereby damaging the motor. Hence it decreases the ef�ciency and life of the motor. Table 6�5 lists the Current unbalance Protection settings available in the Relay.
The Relay detects Current unbalance condition and gives:
� An Alarm when unbalance of 3-phase currents goes above the Alarm set value.
� Pickup when unbalance of 3-phase current reaches above the pickup value and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after the Trip delay.
Current unbalance is calculated using formula:
1. When Imax > 80 % IFLC: It is unbalanced if
(Imax � Imin) / Imax > Unbalance Set Value
2. When Imax < 80 % IFLC: It is unbalanced if
(Imax � Imin) / IFLC > Unbalance Set Value
Where,
Imax: Maximum current of the 3-phases current
Imin: Minimum current of the 3-phases current
IFLC: Full load current
Trip
Reset Modes
Enable or Disable
Local, Remote,Communication
Enable
Local
Table 6-4: Undercurrent Protection Settings
Parameter Setting range
Pickup Set
Pickup Reset
Alarm Set
Alarm Reset
Trip Delay
30 � 85 % of IR
As per hysteresis band
110% of pickup set
As per hysteresis band
1 to 120 sec
StepIncrease
FactorySettings
5%
1 sec
50%
110%
10 sec
Alarm Enable or Disable Enable
Trip
Reset Modes
Enable or Disable
Local, Remote,Communication
Enable
Local
Table 6-5: Current Unbalance Protection Settings
Parameter Setting range
Pickup Set
Pickup Reset
Alarm Set
Alarm Reset
Trip Delay
50 � 100 %
As per hysteresis band
85-100% of pickup set
As per hysteresis band
1 to 30 sec
StepIncrease
FactorySettings
5%
1 sec
50%
90%
1 sec
Alarm Enable or Disable Enable
5%
Note: Trip and Alarm Responses for Current Unbalance can be separately con�gured through MCOMP suite or Display.
Table 6�6 lists the Earth Fault Protection settings available in the Relay.
48MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
PROTECTIONS
Note: Trip and Alarm Responses for Earth Fault can be separately con�gured through MCOMP suite or Display.In case of Vector Summation (VS), settings will be in % of IFLC and in case of CBCT, settings will be in absolute amperes.
Parameter Setting range StepIncrease
FactorySettings
Table 6-6: Earth Fault Protection Settings
Vector Sum or CBCT
20 � 500 % of IFLC
90 % of IEF
0.1 � 60 sec
0.1 � 20 A
0.1 � pickup set
0 � 60 sec
0 � 25 sec
0 � 60 sec
0 � 60 sec
5 %
0.1 sec
0.1
0.1
0.1 sec
0.1 sec
1 sec
1 sec
VectorSum
25 %
90 %
5 sec
1 A
5 sec
5 sec
1 sec
1 sec
Enable
Enable
Local
Earth FaultType
Pickup Set(VS)
Pickup Reset(VS)
Alarm Set(VS)
Alarm Reset(VS)
Trip Delay(VS)
Pickup Set(CBCT)
Pickup Reset(CBCT)
Alarm Set(CBCT)
Alarm Reset(CBCT)
Trip DelayRun (CBCT)
Trip DelayStart (CBCT)
Alarm DelayStart (CBCT)
Alarm DelayRun (CBCT)
Alarm
Trip
Reset Mode
As per Hysteresis band
As per Hysteresis band
As per Hysteresis Band
As per Hysteresis Band
Enable or Disable
Enable or Disable
Local, Remote, Communication
Locked Rotor Protection (50LR)
Locked rotor condition can arise during motor starting time or in motor running condition. Stalling in starting time is taken care by separate Excessive start time protection. Load jam in motor running condition is taken care by Locked rotor (50LR) protection available in the Relay.
Locked Rotor current: The current drawn by the motor, when the rotor is locked under full voltage condition. Rotor stalling is mainly due to improper connection between the shaft and rotor, over load etc,.
In Locked Rotor condition, the rotor gets locked due to presence of the excessive load. As a result, the motor draws higher current to drive the excessive load. The high current �ow in the motorheats up the rotor quickly due to skin effect.
The Relay detects jamming of the motor after starting time and gives:
� An Alarm when current in any of the 3-phases reaches above the Alarm Set value.
� Pickup when current in any of the 3-phases reaches above the pickup value and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after the Trip delay.
Table 6�7 lists the Locked Rotor Protection settings available in the Relay.
Trip
Reset Modes
Enable or Disable
Local, Remote,Communication
Enable
Local
Table 6-7: Locked Rotor Protection Settings
Parameter Setting range
Pickup Set
Pickup Reset
Alarm Set
Alarm Reset
Trip Delay
As per hysteresis band
90% of pickup set
As per hysteresis band
0.5 to 30 sec
StepIncrease
FactorySettings
50%
0.1 sec
400%
90%
5 sec
Alarm Enable or Disable Enable
Note: Locked rotor protection is disabled for the set starting time in the Relay. Trip and Alarm Responses for Locked Rotor can be separately con�gured through MCOMP suite or Display
150 � 1000 % of IFLC
IDMT Overcurrent (51P/51N)
This protection functions when the AC input current exceeds a predetermined value, and in which the input current & operating time are inversely related to a substantial portion of the performance range. The time to trip is derived from standard Time Inverse Curves. Two stages of IDMT over current settings are available, which can be enabled individually or all at once, depending on the requirement. Available Curve types are IEC curves as: Inverse, Very Inverse and Extremely Inverse.
Note: The working function remains the same for IDMT Phase Over current Stage 1, IDMT Phase Over current Stage 2, IDMT Neutral Over current Stage 1, IDMT Neutral Over current Stage 2.Trip and Alarm Responses for Overcurrent can be separately con�gured through MCOMP suite or Display.
49MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
PROTECTIONS
Table 6-8: IDMT formula
Curve Type Operating TimeEquation
α
0.02
1
2
Inverse
Very Inverse
Extremely Inverse
k
0.14
13.5
80
t = TMSkI
I Pickup( )a[ ]
t = TMSkI
I Pickup( )a[ ]
Table 6-8 enlists constant values for IEC curves for dependent time operating characteristics.
Where,
t: Theoretical operate time in seconds
k, α: Constants characterizing the selected curve
I: Measured value of the characteristic quantity
I Pickup : Setting value
TMS: Time Multiplier Setting, Time Constant
The constants, k has a unit of seconds, and α has no dimension. Table 6-9 enlists the IDMT Over current settings available in the Relay.
Table 6-9: IDMT Overcurrent Protection Settings
Trip
Reset Modes
Enable or Disable
Local, Remote,Communication
Disable
Local
Parameter Setting range
Pickup Set
Pickup Reset
Alarm Set
Alarm Reset
Time Constant
As per hysteresis band
90% of pickup
As per hysteresis band
0.5 to 600 seconds
StepIncrease
FactorySettings
5%
0.1 sec
400%
90%
5
Alarm Enable or Disable Disable
20 to 1000 % IFLC
IEC CurveType
Inverse, Very Inverse,Extremely Inverse Inverse
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Phase Loss is usually due to internal causes like improper connections in the circuit, blowing of one of the fuses, failure in switch gear contacts and external causes like line breakages, etc,.
Due to loss of a single phase, the other two normal (healthy) phases have to draw more current than the rated one to compensate the power. This increases the stator current, consequently increasing the heat generated in the windings. This leads to insulation failure which can cause further damage to the motor.
The Relay detects Phase Loss condition and gives:
� Pickup when one of phase current falls below 10 % of rated current (IFLC) and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after the Trip delay.
Table 6�10 lists the Phase Loss Protection settings available in the Relay.
Table 6-10: Phase loss Protection Settings
Parameter Setting range
Trip Delay
Mode
Reset Modes
0.1 to 30 sec
Enable or Disable
Local, Remote,Communication
StepIncrease
FactorySettings
0.1 sec
-
-
1 sec
Disable
Local
Note: When phase currents for all the 3-phases falls simultaneously below 10% of set full load current, the Relay will not detect this condition as Phase loss.
Voltage Based Protection
Over voltage Protection (59)
Over voltage is a condition where voltage in the power circuit rises above its preset value. Over voltage occurs usually due to internal causes like switching surges, insulation failure, arcing ground and Phase Loss.
The Relay detects the Over voltage condition and gives:
� An Alarm when voltage of any of the 3-phases reaches above the Alarm set value.
� Pickup when voltage of any of the 3-phases reaches above the pickup value and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after the Trip delay.
Phase Loss Protection (47A)
Phase Loss Protection is also known as single phase protection. Phase Loss is a condition in the 3-phase power circuit where one phase of the supply is not available to the motor terminals.
50MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
PROTECTIONS
Table 6-11: Overvoltage Protection Settings
Parameter Setting range
Pickup Set
Pickup Reset
Alarm Set
Alarm Reset
Trip Delay
Alarm
Trip
Reset Modes
101 to 130 % of VN
As per hysteresis band
95% of pickup
As per hysteresis band
0.2 to 25 sec
Enable or Disable
Enable or Disable
Local, Remote,Communication
StepIncrease
FactorySettings
5%
-
-
-
0.1 sec
-
-
-
120%
95%
10 sec
Disable
Disable
Local
Table 6�11 lists the Over voltage Protection settings available in the Relay.
Under voltage Protection (27)
Under voltage is a condition where the voltage in the power circuit decreases below 90 percent of its normal voltage. Usually Under voltage occurs during the heavy electrical demand (during peak hours).
Under voltage fault heats up the motor, it leads to winding insulation failure, this fails the motor permanently.
The Relay detects the Under-voltage condition and gives:
� An Alarm when any of the 3-phase voltages reaches below the Alarm set value.
� Pickup when any of the 3-phases voltage reaches below the pickup value and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after the Trip delay.
Table 6�12 Under-voltage Protection settings available in Relay.
Table 6-12: Under voltage Protection Settings
Parameter Setting range
Pickup Set
Pickup Reset
Alarm Set
Alarm Reset
Trip Delay
Alarm
Trip
Reset Modes
20 to 85 % of VN
As per hysteresis band
110 % of pickup
As per hysteresis band
0.2 to 25 sec
Enable or Disable
Enable or Disable
Local, Remote,Communication, Auto
StepIncrease
FactorySettings
1%
-
-
-
0.1 sec
-
-
-
50%
110%
5 sec
Enable
Enable
Local
Note: Under voltage protection is disabled for the starting time set in the Relay. Under voltage protection will be inactive for voltage less than 10% of nominal voltage. Trip and Alarm Responses for Under Voltage can be separately con�gured through MCOMP suite or Display.
Voltage unbalance Protection (47)
Voltage unbalance is a condition where the voltage in the 3-phases power circuit differs in magnitude or phase, or both. Voltage unbalance would not affect the motor greatly. Voltage unbalance condition occurs because of variation in the loads, unbalanced incoming supply, due to Earth Faults etc,.
Voltage unbalance leads to unbalanced current. The effects of unbalanced current are explained under Current unbalance Protection.
The Relay detects Voltage unbalance condition and gives:
� An alarm when unbalance of 3-phase voltages goes above the Alarm set value.
� Pickup when unbalance of 3-phase voltage goes above the pickup value and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after the Trip delay.
Unbalance in 3-phases voltage is calculated using formula:
[ (Vmax � Vmin) /Vavg ] * 100 > Unbalance Set Value
Where,
Vmax: Maximum voltage of the 3-phases
Vmin: Minimum voltage of the 3-phases
Vavg: Average Voltage of the 3-phases
Table 6�13 lists the Voltage Unbalance Protection setting available in the Relay.
Parameter Setting range
Pickup Set
Pickup Reset
Alarm Set
Alarm Reset
Trip Delay
Alarm
Trip
Reset Modes
5 to 50 % of VN
As per hysteresis band
90% of pickup
As per hysteresis band
0.2 to 20 sec
Enable or Disable
Enable or Disable
Local, Remote,Communication, Auto
StepIncrease
FactorySettings
5%
-
-
-
0.1 sec
-
-
-
50%
90%
5 sec
Enable
Enable
Local
Table 6-13: Voltage Unbalance Protection Settings
51MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
PROTECTIONS
Phase reversal Protection (47B)
In 3-phase motors, the direction of motor is generally �xed according to the application. Motor will run in reverse direction due to phase reversal. This condition is undesirable and leads to severe damage to the process.
Reversal of phases is mainly caused due to power interruptions in the circuit. When motor receives power after frequent power interruption, there are chances of reversal of phases. It may also occur when motors are disconnected for maintenance.
The Relay detects Phase reversal condition of 3-phase voltages (if voltage connect is enabled) or current (if voltage connect is disabled) and gives:
� Pickup and trips instantaneously when the phase sequence of the motor supply is different from the proper set sequence.
Table 6�14 lists the Phase reversal Protection settings available in the Relay.
Frequency Based Protection
Under frequency Protection (81L)
The Relay detects Under-frequency condition and gives:
� An Alarm when the frequency reaches below the Alarm set value.
� Pickup when the frequency reaches below the pickup value and if the pickup condition persists it trips after the Trip delay.
Table 6�15 lists Under-frequency Protection settings available in the Relay.
Parameter Setting range
Phase Sequence
Mode
Reset Modes
RYB or RBY
Enable or Disable
Local, Remote,Communication
StepIncrease
FactorySettings
-
-
-
RYB
Enable
Local
Table 6-14: Phase Reversal Protection Settings
Parameter Setting range
Pickup Set
Pickup Reset
Alarm Set
Alarm Reset
Trip Delay
Alarm
Trip
Reset Modes
94 to 98 % of FS
As per hysteresis band
101% of pickup
As per hysteresis band
1 - 30 sec
Enable or Disable
Enable or Disable
Local, Remote,Communication, Auto
StepIncrease
FactorySettings
1%
-
-
-
1 sec
-
-
-
94%
101%
5 sec
Enable
Enable
Local
Table 6-15: Under Frequency Protection Settings
Note: This protection will be inactive if frequency is less than 10% of rated frequency.Trip and Alarm Responses for Over Frequency can be separately con�gured through MCOMP suite or Display.
Over frequency Protection (81H)
The Relay detects Over-frequency condition and gives:
� An Alarm when the frequency reaches above the Alarm set value.
� Pickup when the frequency reaches above the pickup value and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after the Trip delay.
Table 6�16 lists Over frequency Protection settings available in the Relay.
Advanced Features
Re-acceleration (27LV)
Re-acceleration is a method where the Relay restarts the motor automatically without user intervention for momentary voltage dips.
There are two cases in Re-acceleration:
1. Motor Re-acceleration function:
Voltage restores within 200 ms from the last voltage dip or no-voltage condition: If there is a sudden voltage dip in the power source for a duration of less than 200 ms then the motor should continue to run without any interruption. The output contact of the Relay holds the contacts for 200 ms. The motor will continue to run when voltage restores within 200 ms from the last voltage dip or no-voltage condition.
Parameter Setting range
Pickup Set
Pickup Reset
Alarm Set
Alarm Reset
Trip Delay
Alarm
Trip
Reset Modes
101 to 105 % of FS
As per hysteresis band
99% of pickup
As per hysteresis band
1 - 30 sec
Enable or Disable
Enable or Disable
Local, Remote,Communication, Auto
StepIncrease
FactorySettings
1%
-
-
-
1 sec
-
-
-
10%
99%
5 sec
Enable
Enable
Local
Table 6-16: Over Frequency Protection Settings
Note: This protection will be inactive if frequency is less than 10% of rated frequency.Trip and Alarm Responses for Under Frequency can be separately con�gured through MCOMP suite or Display.
52MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
PROTECTIONS
Note: Motor must be in running condition before voltage dip/no-voltage condition occurs.Presence of any maintained stop command at the time of restart command from the Relay will inhibit starting of the motor.
Parameter Setting range
Voltage Dip
Voltage Restoration
Restart Time
Restart Delay
Aux and Motor Supply
Mode
20 to 90 % of VN
60 to 95 % of VN
0.2 to 60 sec
4 to 1200 sec
Same and Separate
Enable or Disable
StepIncrease
FactorySettings
5%
5%
0.1 sec
1 sec
-
-
65%
90%
5 sec
10 sec
Separate
Enable
Table 6-17: Re-acceleration Protection Settings
2. Motor Re-start function:
Voltage restores after 200 ms from last voltage dip or no-voltage condition: If the voltage dip persists for more than 200 ms, then the motor will stop. In this case, if voltage is restored within the restart time, then voltage will be validated for restart delay time. If the restored voltage persists for the set restart delay, then the motor will restart. However, if the motor is tripped due to UV fault during voltage dip condition, then after healthy restoration of voltage, the trip will be reset and the motor will be started. Table 6�17 lists the Re-acceleration Protection settings available in the Relay.
Motor Running(Voltage Stable)
New VoltageDip for< 200 ms(V<200)
In New V<200within 1 secondof previous(V<200)
No No drop off forMCOMP DOcontact. Motorcontinue to run
Yes Internal Timer starts(upto 1 second)
Voltage Dipfor >200ms(V>200)
�RESTARTTIME� timerstarts
Voltage resumesbefore �RESTARTTIME� timer expires
�RESTARTDELAY� timerstarts
Yes
No
Is Voltage Dip before�RESTART DELAY� andRESTART Time expires?
�RESTART DELAY� timerreloads and timer startsagain
RESTART DELAY timer expiresand start command given byMCOMP
Motor Running(Voltage Stable)
Figure 6�4 shows the Re-acceleration �ow chart with detailed working procedure of the Relay
Figure 6-4: Re-acceleration �ow chart
53MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
PROTECTIONS
Temperature Monitoring
Increase in temperature of the motor is caused mainly due to over current, locked rotor, single phasing etc,. Increase in temperature beyond the limit can cause insulation failure resulting in permanent breakdown of motor.
Temperature Protection is provided in the Relay through RTD or Thermistor (PTC) input. These sensors are placed on the windings of the motor where the temperature needs to be measured. A single RTD measures the temperature in terms of degree Celsius. In case of PTC, relay measures the temperature in terms of Ohmic value. Table 6�18 lists the temperature protection settings available in the Relay.
The Relay detects high temperature condition and gives:
� an Alarm when the temperature reaches above the Alarm Set value.
� Pickup when the temperature reaches above the pickup value and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after the Trip delay.
RTD type which can be connected to the relay is PT-100. The relay can measure the resistance from 100 to 175 ohm in case of RTD connection which is equivalently shown in MCOMP display for metering from 0 to 180oC. Any resistance greater than 175 ohm seen by the relay will be shown as 0 ohm in temperature metering. In case of Thermistor input, any PTC can be connected to the relay. Maximum of 6 PTC can be connected in series and given as an input to the relay.
In case of PTC, if measured resistance goes above 10K�, relay will issue a
trip command and trip cause will be PTC OPEN CIRCUIT. The alarm/pickup
value will be reset if the PTC resistance goes below set value of Reset
Resistance. If PTC resistance goes above set value of RESPONSE
RESISTANCE then the relay will issue a trip command and trip cause will be
PTC RESPONSE RESISTANCE. The alarm/pickup value will be reset if the
PTC resistance goes below set value of Reset Resistance. If PTC resistance
goes below Short circuit Trip Resistance (20�) then the relay will issue a
trip command and trip cause will be PTC SHORT CIRCUIT. The
alarm/pickup value will be reset if the PTC resistance goes above Short
circuit Reset Resistance (40�). Table 6-19 shows the PTC Input
Speci�cations supported by the relay.
Table 6-18: Temperature Monitoring Settings
Parameter Setting range
Sensor Type
Pickup Set (RTD)
Pickup Reset (RTD)
Alarm Set (RTD)
Alarm Reset (RTD)
Trip Delay (RTD)
Response Resistance (PTC)
Reset Resistance (PTC)
Trip Delay (PTC)
Alarm
Trip
Reset Modes
RTD or PTC
25 � 180 ºC
Pickup Reset � 5ºC
5 � 250 sec
2700 � 4000 �
1600 � 2300 �
0.1 � 60 sec
StepIncrease
FactorySettings
1
1 sec
50 �
50 �
0.1 sec
RTD
100
95
90
85
100 sec
3600
1600
0.1 sec
Local
Pickup Set � 5ºC
Alarm Set � 5ºC
Enable or Disable
Enable or Disable
Local, Remote,Communication, Auto
Figure 6-5: PTC protection working Philosophy
Time
2040
10000
PTCResistance
ResponseResistance
ResetResistance
Open Circuit Trip
ResponseResistanceTrip
Open CircuitAlarm/PickupClear
ResponseAlarm/PickupClear
Short Circuit Trip
Short Circuit Trip
Parameter
Response Resistance
Reset Resistance
Short Circuit Trip Resistance
Short Circuit Reset Resistance
PTC Open circuit resistance
Maximum voltage at PTC terminals
(R ptc = 4 K)
Maximum voltage at PTC terminals
(R ptc = open)
Maximum number of sensors
Maximum cold resistance of PTC sensor chain
Value
2700 � 4000 �
1600 � 2300 �
< 20 �
> 40 �
> 10000 �
Less than 7.5 V
30 V
6
1500
Table 6-19: PTC Thermistor Input Speci�cations
Note: Trip and Alarm response for Temperature protection can be separately con�gured through MCOMP suite or Display.
54MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
PROTECTIONS
Maximum Number of Starts Protection (66)
Maximum number of starts protection prevents the damage to the motor on effect of frequent starts. This protection allows the motor to start only for a pre-speci�ed number within a given period. If the number of starts exceeds the set value, then this protection keeps the Relay in inhibit mode, which prevents any further motor start. Table 6�20 lists the Maximum Number of Starts Protection settings available in the Relay.
Fail to Stop Protection
In some cases motor fails to stop even when it receives stop command, in this condition Fail to Stop Protection is needed. This may occur because of improper connections and settings. This protection monitors the current after STOP output is set. If the 3-phase current is still present for two seconds after STOP output is set, then a Trip will be issued on Fail to Stop Protection.
Interlock 1 to 12
The Relay is provided with 12 interlocks and any digital input can be con�gured as an interlock. Each interlock input can be assigned a function such as Alarm, Trip, Stop, Reset, etc,.which will be executed on the absence of that interlock (low signal on that con�gured interlock). Interlock con�gured as Trip causes the Relay to trip in the event of absence of the corresponding Interlock.
Communication Failure Monitoring
Communication failure monitoring provides the alarm and tripping action on failure of communication between the Relay and the master device. The master can be either DCS or PLC or SCADA. When "Trip only in Remote" setting is enabled, Relay gives trip command only when motor is running in remote mode. In case of motor running in local mode, Relay gives Alarm signal only.
The Relay detects communication failure condition and gives:
� An Alarm when Relay does not receives any query from the master device for the set time delay.
� Trip if communication failure condition persists for the trip delay after generation of an Alarm.
Table 6�21 lists Communication failure monitoring settings available in the Relay.
Excessive Start Time Protection
Excessive Start Time Protection is necessary when the motor takes more time to start than the preset time. The motor draws high current at the starting time (5-6 times of Full Load Current). If the motor continues to draw higher current even after the starting time, it causes insulation failure and burning of the windings.
The protection works on the basis of start time of the motor. It monitors the current during the starting time and if it does not follow the proper sequence then it will trip once starting time is over.
Table 6�22 lists the Excessive Start Time Protection settings available in the Relay.
Analog Input Monitoring
The two analog inputs available in expansion module supports 2 wire transmitter interface. The inputs supported are 4-20mA input or 0-20mA input. The metered value can be used trigger the alarm/trip when it crosses the set threshold value. The transmitter converts the real world signal, such as �ow, speed, position, level, temperature, humidity, pressure, etc., into the control signal necessary to regulate the �ow of current in the current loop.
Parameter Setting range
Reference Period
Permissive Starts
Inhibit Period
Mode
Reset Modes
15 - 60 min
1 � 30 starts
1 � 120 min
Enable or Disable
Local, Remote,Communication, Auto
StepIncrease
FactorySettings
1 min
1
1
-
-
60 min
20 starts
20 min
Enable
Local
Table 6-20: Maximum number of starts Protection Settings
Parameter Setting range
Time Delay
Trip Delay
Alarm
Trip
Reset Modes
2 - 10 sec
1 - 30 sec
Enable or Disable
Enable or Disable
Local, Remote,Communication, Auto
StepIncrease
FactorySettings
1 sec
1 sec
-
-
-
5 sec
5 sec
Disable
Disable
Local
Table 6-21: Communication Failure Monitoring Settings
Parameter Setting range
Mode
Reset Modes
Enable or Disable
Local, Remote,Communication
StepIncrease
FactorySettings
-
-
Enable
Local
Table 6-22: Excessive Start Protection Settings
Note: This protection is always enabled and cannot be disabled.
Note: Interlock functionality can be separately con�gured through the Display or MCOMP suite.
55MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
PROTECTIONS
Table 6�23 lists the Analog Input Protection settings available in the Relay.
Parameter Setting range
Analog input type
Pickup Set
Pickup Reset
Alarm Set
Alarm Reset
Trip Delay
Alarm
Trip
Reset Modes
4-20mA or 0-20mA
0 � 20 mA
0 � 20 mA
0 � 20 mA
0 � 20 mA
1 to 30 sec
Enable or Disable
Enable or Disable
Local, Remote,Communication, Auto
StepIncrease
FactorySettings
-
0.1 mA
0.1 mA
0.1 mA
0.1 mA
1 sec
-
-
-
4-20mA
4 mA
3.8 mA
3.6 mA
3.5 mA
1 sec
Disable
Disable
Local
Table 6-23: Analog Input Monitoring Settings
MCOMP AI terminals
24 VDC supply Transmitter/Sensor
-ve +ve +ve -ve
-ve +ve
Typical connection diagram for connecting the analog inputs in MCOMP expansion module is shown below. It is recommended to use twisted pair cable for analog input connection.
57MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
COMMUNICATION
Overview
The Relay has two ports for communication. The �rst port is the local con�guration port used to communicate with the Display and MCOMP Suite. This communication is on L&T proprietary protocol. The second port is to communicate with the higher level system such as EWS/DCS/SCADA. This communication is on modbus or pro�bus protocol.
Communication interface is the physical connection on a device. Once the physical connection is established, the Relay communicates with the master on a protocol.
This section provides a detailed description of Communication Interface, Communication Protocols and Communication Architecture of different protocols used in the Relay.
Communication Interface
The Relay communicates with higher level system using protocols. Table 7�1 enlists the different communication protocols available in the Relay. The selection of protocol depends on the application.
Communication Protocol
Modbus RTU
Modbus is a serial protocol which supports communication between a single master device and multiple slave devices. In a Modbus network, the protocol governs how each IED shall know its device address, recognize a message addressed to it, determine the kind of action to be taken, and extract any data or other information contained in the message. If a reply is required, the IED will construct the reply message and send it using Modbus protocol. Table 7�2 shows the Relay Modbus RTU port connections.
In the Relay, Modbus communication allows a Modbus Master device to:
� acquire metering, monitoring and event data from the Relay
� control the Relay output contacts
� acquire the Relay �le system data for diagnostic
Table 7-1: Communication Interface
Communication Interface Setting range
RS485
RS485
RJ45
RS485
RS485
Modbus RTU
Profibus (DPV0, DPV1)
Modbus TCP/IP
L&T Proprietary
L&T Proprietary
4 pin connector
DB-9 pin connector
RJ45 female connector
RJ11 connector
Mini USB connector
Setting range
Communication card
Communication card
Communication card
Controller card
Display front
Setting range
Table 7-2: Modbus RTU port connection
NA
NA
NA
D+
D-
NA
NA
NA
NA
Relay RS485signal
Relay PinConnectionrequiredStandard Pin Standard RS485
signalDescription
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
GND
CTS+
RTS+
RxD+
RxD-
CTS-
RTS-
TxD+
TxD-
Common Ground
Clear to Send +
Ready to Send +
Received Data +
Received Data -
Clear to Send -
Ready to Send -
Transmitted Data +
Transmitted Data -
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
NA
NA
NA
41,42
43,44
NA
NA
NA
NA
Note: The communication interface port in the Relay will depend on the selection of protocol at the time of ordering of the Relay.
58MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
COMMUNICATION
Supported Modbus Function Codes
Table 7�3 lists of function codes supported by the Relay on Modbus:
Modbus RTU Settings
Modbus requires communication parameters such as baud rate, parity, node address etc, are to be set for establishing successful communication with the master. Table 7�4 shows Modbus RTU communication protocol settings.
The communication parameter settings available in the Relay are shown below:
Mode: It de�nes the mode of communication (ASCII or RTU). The Relay supports only RTU mode.
Node Address: It de�nes the node address of the Relay.
Baud Rate: It de�nes the speed at which the Relay communicates with Modbus Master.
Parity: Parity can either be set as even, odd or none.
Stop Bits: Number of Stop Bits used can be set as one or two.
Modbus memory map
Modbus RTU memory map enlists all the metering parameters, trip & event record parameters, DI/DO status and coil status. Function codes for different registers are also mentioned in the memory map. The Modbus RTU memory map shows the addresses for slow scan parameters (or parameters pre-de�ned at certain addresses). Refer Annexure A for Modbus RTU memory map.
Pro�bus DP
Pro�bus is an open, vendor-independent, �eld bus protocol. The Relay supports Pro�bus DP-V0 for cyclic data exchange and DP-V1 protocol for acyclic date exchange (read only) between master and slave devices.
PROFIBUS DP is a network that consists of two types of devices connected to the bus: master devices and slave devices. It is a bi-directional network, meaning that one device, a master, sends a request to a slave, and the slave responds to that request. Table 7�5 shows Pro�bus port connections in the Relay.
Code Description
01
02
03
04
05
08
Read Coil Status (0X references, coils)
Read Input Status (1X references)
Read Holding Registers (4X references)
Read Input Registers (3X references)
Force Single Coil (0X references)
Diagnostics
Table 7-3: Modbus Function Codes
Parameter Setting range
Mode
Node Address
Baud Rate
Parity
Stop Bits
RTU
Even, Odd, None
One, Two
Step Increase FactorySettings
1
9600
RTU
1
9600
None
Two
1 - 247
9600 - 19200
Table 7-4: Modbus RTU Setting
Table 7-5: Pro�bus port connection
NA
NA
NA
D+
D-
NA
NA
NA
NA
Relay RS485signalRelay Pin
ConnectionrequiredStandard Pin
Standard RS485signal Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
GND
CTS+
RTS+
RxD+
RxD-
CTS-
RTS-
TxD+
TxD-
Common Ground
Clear to Send +
Ready to Send +
Received Data +
Received Data -
Clear to Send -
Ready to Send -
Transmitted Data +
Transmitted Data -
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
59MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
COMMUNICATION
Pro�bus Settings
Pro�bus requires communication parameters to be set for establishing successful communication with the master. Table 7�6 shows Pro�bus communication protocol settings available in the Relay.
The communication parameter settings available in the Relay are shown below:
Node Address: To de�ne the node address of the Relay.
Baud Rate: Baud rate is governed by the Pro�bus master
Pro�bus memory map
Refer Annexure A for Pro�bus memory map and GSD module details.
Modbus TCP/IP
Modbus TCP/IP shares the same application layer as the Modbus
RTU, however with a different physical layer (Ethernet). TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) and IP (Internet Protocol) govern the data traf�c control on the Ethernet media.
In other words, Modbus TCP/IP uses a Modbus RTU message transmitted with a TCP/IP envelope and sent over a network instead of serial lines. The Server does not have a Slave ID since it uses an IP Address instead. Table 7�7 shows Modbus TCP/IP port connections in the Relay.
The Relay communicates on Modbus TCP/IP using RJ45 port. It is recommended to use Category 5 (Cat 5) or Category 6 (Cat 6) without earth connection cable while connecting to MCOMP main unit.
Modbus TCP/IP Settings
Modbus TCP/IP requires certain communication parameters to be set for establishing successful communication with the master. Table 7�8 shows Modbus TCP/IP communication protocol settings available in the Relay.
The Relay supports Time synchronization using SNTP (Simple Network Time protocol). To use this feature, the SNTP server address and the proper time zone must be entered in the Relay settings as shown in Table 7�8. The time zone is set as per user location. In India, the time zone used is GMT+5h 30m.
Parameter Setting range
Node Address
Step Increase FactorySettings
1 1101 - 126
Table 7-6: Pro�bus Setting
Table 7-7: Modbus TCP/IP port connection
Tx+
Tx-
Rx+
NA
NA
Rx-
NA
NA
Standard Pin Standard RS485 signal Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Tx+
Tx-
Rx+
NC
NC
Rx-
NC
NC
Transmit Data +
Transmit Data -
Receive Data +
Received Data +
Received Data -
Receive Data -
Ready to Send -
Transmitted Data +
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Relay RS485 signalRelay PinConnection required
Table 7-8: Modbus TCP/IP Setting
Parameter
Mode (DHCP)
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
SNTP Server Address
Time Zone
Factory Setting
Disabled
192.168.121.127
255.255.254.0
None
Two
0
Step Increase
1
1
1
1
Setting Range
0.0.0.0 � 255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0 � 255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0 � 255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0 � 255.255.255.255
Enabled/Disabled
+ 0 to 13 hours and 0 to 59 min
60MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
COMMUNICATION
Modbus TCP/IP Memory Map
Refer Annexure A for Modbus TCP/IP memory map and parameter mapping.
Parameter Mapping
Parameter mapping setting allows de�ne/con�gure the parameters to be sent on communication networks (Modbus serial, pro�bus, modbus TCP/IP) in sequential manner/consecutive address as per requirement. The addresses for these mapped parameters are �xed in case of Modbus serial and Modbus TCP/IP.
16 words, 32 words and 142 bytes can be con�gured in parameter mapping for Modbus serial, Modbus TCP/IP and Pro�bus communication protocol respectively. 16 and 32 words which can be de�ned by MCOMP suite HMI for Modbus serial & Modbus TCP/IP can be polled using function code 4 at the addresses 0001 to 0016 and 0001 to 0032 respectively. This con�guration of parameters can be done through MCOMP suite HMI.
Table 7-9 shows the list of available inputs for con�guring in parameter mapping.
Table 7-9 (1): List of inputs available in parameter mapping
Description
R Phase RMS Current
Y Phase RMS Current
B Phase RMS Current
Earth RMS Current
Average RMS Current
R Phase RMS Voltage
Y Phase RMS Voltage
B Phase RMS Voltage
Average RMS Voltage
Frequency
Power Factor
Phase Sequence
Total Active Power
Total Reactive Power
Total Apparent Power
Total Active Energy
Total Reactive Energy
Number of Start
Starting Time
Starting Peak Current
Hours Run
Total Hours Run
Trip Counter
Trip Cause
Digital Input Status
Digital Output Status
Truth Table Outputs
Availability in case of
Modbus Serial Modbus TCP/IP Profibus
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
61MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
COMMUNICATION
Table 7-9 (2): List of inputs available in parameter mapping
Description
Signal Conditioners Outputs
Counter Outputs
Timer Outputs
Motor Status
Expansion Module Types
Expansion Module 1 status
Expansion Module 2 status
Expansion Module 3 status
R-Y Line Voltage
Y-B Line Voltage
B-R Line Voltage
Total Apparent Energy
Temperature
Thermal Capacity
Number Of Stop Operations
% Current Unbalance
Trip cause Ext
Motor Stop cause
Motor Inhibit cause
Status Word
DI-DO/ Timer/ Counter- Signal Conditioner
Logic Status
Remaining Logic status
Watchdog Register Status
Internal DIO status
External DIO status 1 & 2
Trip Record � Trip Cause
Trip Record � Date
Trip Record � Time
Trip Record � IR
Trip Record � IY
Trip Record � IB
Trip Record � IEF
Trip Record � VR
Trip Record � VY
Trip Record � VB
Availability in case of
Modbus Serial Modbus TCP/IP Profibus
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
x
x
x
√
x
x
x
x
x
x
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
x
x
x
√
x
x
x
x
x
x
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
62MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
COMMUNICATION
Table 7-9 (3): List of inputs available in parameter mapping
Trip Record � Frequency
Trip Record � Temperature/Resistance
Trip Record � Power factor
Trip Record � Trip Cause 1
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
x
x
x
x
Status Word
The status word available in parameter mapping in case of Pro�bus protocol can be con�gured as per requirement. Each bitin the status word is open for user con�guration. Table 7-10 shows brief list of available inputs for con�guring in status word.
Table 7-10: Brief list of inputs available for status word
Sr No. Parameter Category Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Base unit DI-DO
COMPlogic outputs (Truth tables, timer, counter,signal conditioner)
Expansion units DI-DO
Protection/Monitoring function bits (Alarm, Pickup, Trip)
Internal bits (run, star, delta, forward, reverse, main,high speed, low speed, Drive available, Motor status,motor direction, permissive outputs, communicationcommands, indicator outputs etc)
Watchdog register status (Individual bits)
Stop cause (Individual causes)
Inhibit cause (Individual causes)
Expansion unit failure status
Communication Architecture
Modbus Architecture
Figure 7�1 shows typical architecture for Modbus RTU and Modbus TCP/IP. The Relays on Modbus RTU are shown to be connected in a daisy-chain con�guration in which a master is connected to multiple slave devices in a chain sequence.
In case of Modbus TCP/IP, the Relays are shown to be connected in a Star topology using Ethernet switches.
Pro�bus Architecture
Figure 7�2 shows typical architecture for Pro�bus. The Relays on pro�bus are shown to be connected with the master in a daisy-chain con�guration.
DescriptionAvailability in case of
Modbus Serial Modbus TCP/IP Profibus
63MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
COMMUNICATION
Figure 7-1: Typical Modbus Architecture
Modbus TCP/IP Modbus RTU
Modbus TCP/IPModbus TCP/IP
Loop No-01 Loop No-01Switchboard Area
Ethernet Switch Modbus RTU Modbus RTU Ethernet Switch
Modbus TCP/IP
DataConcentrator
Panel Area
EthernetSwitch
GPS Server for TimeSycronization
To DCS onModbus TCP/IP
EWS STATIONTo DCS on
Modbus TCP/IP(Redunbant)
Serial CableRS 232
TMDAP server
Laptop forParameterization
Figure 7-2: Typical Pro�bus Architecture
Laptop forParameterization
Serial CableRelay: RS 232
Pro�bus - DPNetwork
To DCS
Pro�bus - DPMaster
Pro�bus - DPNetwork
Switchboard Area
To DCS
Pro�bus - DPMaster
Pro�bus - DPNetwork
Switchboard Area
65MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Overview
This section primarily consists of description of different setting parameters available in the Relay and basic instructions to feed those settings into the Relay in a very user friendly method. With the help of these instructions, the user can view/edit the Relay settings to suit the application. Instructions are further supported with the help of �ow charts/graphics and step-by-step procedures. The Relay settings are saved in non-volatile memory.
The user can view/edit following settings as per the requirement:
� System Settings
� Protection Settings
� Communication Settings
� Digital IO Settings
� Parameter Map Settings
� COMPlogic Settings
Relay Setting Modes:
� Display
� MCOMP Suite
� Communication
Setting Parameters
System Setting Parameters
System setting determines the essential con�guration parameters pertaining to the general motor characteristics, method of starting the motor, different modes of starting of motor, etc.
Different settings available under this are as follows:
Full load Current (IFLC): It is the maximum RMS current/rated current a motor is designed to draw in normal running condition.
Motor Rated Voltage (VL-L): It is the Average RMS line to line Voltage at which the motor operates at peak ef�ciency. It is possible to directly terminate 480 VL-L voltages on the Relay. External PT is required for connecting voltages higher than 480 VL-L to the relay.
Auxiliary Supply (VAUX): It allows the selection of Power Supply connected to MCOMP Base Unit. It is necessary to set correct value of aux supply for calculation during power down mode.
Voltage Connect: If enabled, it provides voltage, power, energy metering and allows detection of all voltage based protections. Frequency is detected on the basis of R phase voltage only. When disabled, voltage, power and energy measurement are not available apart from voltage based protections.
Trip Class: A numeric rating that correlates to the amount of time it takes to trip the motor when an overload condition occurs according to IEC60255 curve. Refer table 6-1 for details.
Starting Time: It is the maximum time allowed by the relay to the
motor to come to running state from starting state.
The following Protection functions (both Alarm and Trip) are disabled during this starting time:
� Overload
� Locked rotor
� Under Current
� Under Voltage
� Over current
Frequency: It is the nominal frequency supplied as detected from R phase voltage input when �Voltage connect� setting is enabled. System frequency can be selected either 50 Hz or 60 Hz.
Running current: It is the normal running current of the motor as % value of full load current. Under current protection setting is dependent on this setting.
Input Voltage Selection: It allows selection of system voltage connection type as 3P-3W or 3P-4W. This setting is provided in System setting window of MCOMP suite or Display and can be selected as three phase-three wire (3P-3W) or three phase-four wire (3P-4W). Upon selection, the Nominal voltage of the system gets set in the relay accordingly.
In case of 3P-3W, V = V and N L-L
in case of 3P-4W, V = V / �3,N L-L
where V = Line to line voltage or Motor Rated Voltage selected L-L
in system setting of the relay.
All the voltage based protection is dependent on V and hence N
proper selection of input voltage is necessary for the required function.
Auto start and Stop detection: This setting is available for detecting the start and stop condition of the motor when relay is used only for protection purpose without having any control on starting and stopping of the motor.
� Auto Start Detection: In an application where the relay is used only for metering and protection purpose and not for control operation, it is required to sense the starting of the motor through this auto start detection method. If enabled, the Relay senses that the motor has started when the average current sensed rises from 10 % IFLC to 100 % IFLC within 100 ms.
� Current Auto Stop: During running condition of motor and if enabled, the Relay senses that the motor has stopped on current auto stop cause when all the 3-phase currents falls below 10 % of set full load current (IFLC).The cause of the motor stop can be seen through special commands in MCOMP suite or display.
� Voltage Auto Stop: During running condition of motor and if enabled, the Relay senses that the motor has stopped on voltage auto stop cause when all the 3-phase voltage falls below 10 % of nominal voltage (VN).The cause of the motor stop can be seen through special commands in MCOMP suite or display.
It is possible to start the motor through start command via digital
66MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
input or communication even if auto start detection is enabled.
Starter Settings: This setting determines the type of starter used to start the motor and their corresponding settings. Different types of starters can be con�gured as follows:
� DOL: Direct on line - This option is selected when motor is started by DOL starter only in one direction using digital input sources - START1 or START2. It can be started through communication as well if required.
� RDOL: Reversible Direct Online Starter - This option is selected when the motor is started by RDOL starter either in forward or reverse direction using digital input sources � START1, START2, START3 and START4. It can be started through communication as well if required. START1 & START3 is used to run the motor in Forward Direction and START2 & START4 for Reverse Direction.
� STAR DELTA: This option is selected when the motor is started by Star - Delta starter using digital input sources Start 1 and
START2. It can be started through communication as well if required.
When Star Delta is selected, two more settings to be set as given below:
Time in Star: It is the time in seconds for which the Star output is activated.
Change over Delay: It is the time interval between switching from Star to Delta output.
� TWO SPEED: This option is selected when the motor is started by two speed starter using digital input sources Start 1 and START2. It can be started through communication as well if required.
In case of Two-speed starter, the IFLC and External CT ratio setting is neglected and separate set of IFLC and external CT ratio is provided. High IFLC and Low IFLC settings and corresponding external CT ratio settings gets activated as required.
Table 8-2: Starter Settings
Parameter Setting Range Step Increase Factory Setting
0.6 � 80 A (up to 600 A incase of external CT)
380 � 800 V
5 - 40
1 � 200
20 � 100 % IFLC
0.1 A up to 20A1A afterwards
1 V
5
1
1%
1A
415 V
230
Enable
10
10
50 Hz
100 %
3Phase-4Wire
Disable
Disable
Disable
Full Load Current
Motor Rated Voltage
Auxiliary Supply
Voltage Connect
Trip Class
Starting Time
Frequency
Running Current
Input Voltage
Auto Start Detection
Current Auto Stop
Voltage Auto Stop
24, 110, 230
Enable/Disable
50 and 60Hz
3Phase-3Wire or 3Phase-4Wire
Enable/Disable
Enable/Disable
Enable/Disable
Table 8-1: System Settings
Parameter Setting Range Step Increase Factory Setting
0.1 � 200 sec 0.1 sec
Star Delta
Star Delta
Two Speed
Two Speed
Type
Time in star
Change over delay
High IFLC, Low IFLC
External CT ratio
Modes of Starting
DOL, RDOL, STAR DELTA, TWO SPEED
1 to (starting time -1) sec
0.6 � 80 A (up to 600 A with external CT)
For High IFLC, for low IFLC
All
All
All
All
Local
Remote
Communication
Local1, Local2, Local3, Remote
Local1, Local2, Local3, Remote
Start 1 & 3
Start 2 & 4
Local1, Local2, Local3, Remote
Local1, Local2, Local3, Remote
67MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Modes of Starting matrix: Different starting modes can be con�gured using con�guration matrix as shown in Table 8-3.
� START3 and START4 are used in RDOL, TWO SPEED starter.
� START1 and START3 are for forward, High Speed starts whereas START2 and START4 are for reverse, low speed start.
Selection of starting modes (L1, L2, L3 or R) depends on the status of mode selection bits available in communication (Output Command Byte 0 - bit 0.6 and bit 0.7) or status of digital inputs (con�gured as Local/Remote_1 and Local/Remote_2). At any given time, mode selection is possible either through communication or through digital inputs to the relay. Corresponding setting �Mode selection through communication� is provided in the relay which decides whether mode selection is through communication bits or through digital inputs statuses. Refer below table for mode selection.
Mode selection through communication: This setting is used to decide the mode selection place i.e. whether the control for mode selection is with communication bits or it is with digital inputs (Local/Remote switch on the panel).
When mode selection through communication is enabled then bits of Output Byte 0 i.e. 0.6 and 0.7 will be considered for deciding the mode. The combination will lead to four modes as mentioned above.
When this setting is enabled, then mode selection can only be possible through communication commands and any con�gured DI (Local/Remote_1 and Local/Remote_2 inputs) for mode selection will be ignored. The mode selection will act as per status of bit 0.6 and bit 0.7.
When this setting is disabled, there will be no action on the mode selection even if the communication bits 0.6 and 0.7 changes its state. Mode selection then solely depends on the con�gured DI (Local/Remote_1 and Local/Remote_2 inputs) and will act according to con�gured DI status.
Modes of starting Local 3 (L3) Remote (R)
Local (Display/MCOMP suite)
Remote (Digital Inputs)
START 1 (and START 2)
START 3 (and START 4)
Communication
Enable/Disable
Enable/
Disable
Enable/
Disable
Enable/
Disable
Enable/
Disable
Enable/
Disable
Enable/
Disable
Enable/
Disable
Enable/
Disable
Enable/
Disable
Local 2 (L2)
Enable/
Disable
Enable/
Disable
Enable/
Disable
Enable/
Disable
Enable/
Disable
Local 1 (L1)
Enable/
Disable
Enable/
Disable
Enable/
Disable
Enable/
Disable
Enable/
Disable
Table 8-3: Modes of starting matrix
Local/Remote_1 ORComm bit 0.6
0
0
1
1
Functional Description
0
1
0
1
Local/Remote_2 ORComm bit 0.7
L1
L2
L3
R
Mode
When in local1 mode, the relay accepts the start commands as per
the configuration in that particular column.
When in local2 mode, the relay accepts the start commands as per
the configuration in that particular column.
When in local3 mode, the relay accepts the start commands as per
the configuration in that particular column.
When in Remote mode, the relay accepts the start commands as per
the configuration in that particular column.
Table 8-3a: Mode selection
Parameter
Mode selectionthrough communication
Table 8-3: Mode selection through communication setting
Setting Range
Enable/Disable
Factory Setting
Disable
68MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Note: If there is no setting of local / Remote DIs & mode selection through communication then the Local 1 mode will be followed by default.When mode selection from communication is enabled & Communication gets failed, then mode switches to Local 1 mode.If only Local/Remote_1 is con�gured in one of the digital inputs and Local/Remote_2 is not con�gured then only L1 and R mode will be active.�Four mode operation(L1,L2,L3,R)� and �mode selection through communication setting� is applicable only when Relay communicates on Pro�bus protocol and does not hold good for Modbus and Modbus TCP/IP protocols. In case of Modbus and Modbus TCP/IP relays, normal two mode operation (local and remote) is supported.
External CT Ratio: For motor ratings having FLC higher than 80A (approx. 45KW), the relay requires external conventional protection class CT�s for sensing the three phase currents along with its own current module. The external CT ratio mode needs to be enabled for higher motor ratings and different parameters of the external CT needs to be specify in the setting �eld as shown in the Table 8-4 :
PT Ratio: For connecting voltages higher than 480 VL-L, the external PT ratio mode needs to be enabled and different parameters of the external PT needs to be specify in the setting �eld as shown in the below Table 8-5 :
Event Records: This setting determines whether the Pick Up, Alarm and Trip event need to record by the relay or not.
Table 8-4: External CT ratio setting
2 � 1000 A
1 or 5 A
1 A
NA
Enable/Disable
Parameter Setting Range Factory Setting
Primary Current
Secondary Current
Mode
Table 8-5: External PT ratio setting
1 � 800 V
110 - 230 V
1 V
1 V
Parameter Setting Range Factory Setting
Primary Voltage
Secondary Voltage
Mode Enable/Disable
Display Password: This setting allows changing the value of the display password and available through MCOMP suite only.
Mode Change: If enabled, when any of the con�gured input changes its state during motor running condition, the relay generates the trip command. The modes of reset can be con�gured for this trip function.
Phase Selection: This setting allows selection of the number of voltage inputs connected to the relay i.e. two phase (R and Y) or three phase (R, Y and B). In case of two phase input, the third phase voltage is calculated from connected two phase voltages. Refer chapter application notes for more details.
Latched Trip function: This setting allows selection of the trip output functionality in case of relay�s aux. supply failure. If enabled, the already energized trip output will remain active after power recycle of the relay.
Feeder Type: This setting allows selection of the feeder type as motor or heater feeder. Heater feeder selection is for non-motor load application i.e. MCCB/Heater feeder application. Refer chapter application notes for more details.
Motor Tag: In this �eld the actual process tag for the motor/feeder can be set.
Start command through communication: This setting allows selection of start command as momentary or maintained.
In case of momentary, the start bits (bits of Output Command byte 0 i.e. 0.0, 0.2) from communication will have below functionality.
Bit is 1 = issues start command depending upon the starter type if all other conditions are healthy
Bit is 0 = withdraw start command and does not stop the motor
In case of maintained, the start bit (bits of Output Command byte 0 i.e. 0.0, 0.2) from communication will have below functionality.
1 = issues start command depending upon the starter type if all other conditions are healthy
0 = withdraw start command and stops the motor.
Table 8-7: Display Password setting
1111 - 9999
Parameter Setting Range
Password
Base unit DI/DO input, Expansion unit DI/DO inputs
Base unit DI/DO input, Expansion unit DI/DO inputs
Enable/Disable
Local, Remote, Communication
Parameter Setting Range
Input 1
Input 2
Mode change
Reset Modes
Table 8-8: Mode Change setting
Table 8-6: Event Record setting
Enable/Disable
Enable/Disable
Enable/Disable
Parameter Setting Range
Pick Up
Trip
Alarm
69MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Protection Setting Parameters
Pl refer chapter 6 : Protection for details of protection setting parameters.
Digital Input Output Setting Parameters
This section provides a brief description about Digital Inputs/Outputs for performing con�gured operations. In addition, this section also provides information about DIO Expansion Module used to increase the number of DIOs.
Basic Digital Input/Output
The Relay is provided with six Digital Inputs and four Digital Outputs. DIOs are freely con�gurable by the user as per the scheme. DIOs are hard-wired connections which enable the user to remotely operate and control the motor. These DIOs have following characteristics:
Digital Input Features
� Digital Inputs accept 80-240 V AC/DC or 230 V AC/DC or 110V AC/DC or 24 VDC voltage input for sensing depending upon the ordering of the Relay.
� Validation period is a user con�gurable debounce period provided with each digital input in order to validate the authenticity of the signal.
Digital Output Features
� All four Digital Outputs are potential free, change-over contacts.
� Digital outputs can be con�gured as either pulse mode (unlatch) or level mode (latch). In case of pulse mode, the pulse width (hold time) is user con�gurable.
� Digital Outputs can be used to drive the main power contactor without using any auxiliary contactors.
DIO Expansion Module
DIO Expansion Module is used to increase the number of DIOs in the Relay. DIO Expansion Modules are available in two types:
� 4DI/2DO module
� 8DI module
� 5DI/2AI module
� 3DI/2AI/2DO module
User can connect maximum three expansion modules to the base unit. Table 8�10 gives the all the possible combinations of DIO expansion modules that can be used in addition with the base unit.
Two Phase, three phase
Enable/Disable
Motor/Heater
Alpha numeric characters can be entered
Momentary/Maintained
Parameter Setting Range
Phase Selection
Trip latch
Feeder Type
Motor/Feeder Tag
Start command throughcommunication
Table 8-9: System setting 2
Single unit Combination Expansion unit 1
1
2
3
4
Table 8-10 (1): Expansion Module Combination matrix
Expansion unit 1 Expansion unit 2 Expansion unit 3
4DI/2DO
8DI
5DI/2AI
3DI/2DO/2AI
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Two unit Combination Expansion unit 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Expansion unit 1 Expansion unit 2 Expansion unit 3
4DI/2DO
4DI/2DO
4DI/2DO
4DI/2DO
8DI
8DI
8DI
8DI
4DI/2DO
5DI/2AI
3DI/2DO/2AI
8DI
5DI/2AI
3DI/2DO/2AI
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
70MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Table 8-10 (2): Expansion Module Combination matrix
Three unit Combination Expansion unit 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Expansion unit 1 Expansion unit 2 Expansion unit 3
4DI/2DO
4DI/2DO
8DI
8DI
8DI
8DI
8DI
4DI/2DO
8DI
8DI
8DI
8DI
4DI/2DO
4DI/2DO
8DI
8DI
8DI
5DI/2AI
3DI/2DO/2AI
5DI/2AI
3DI/2DO/2AI
Digital Input Settings
The following settings are used to con�gure any Digital Input:
Type: This decides the functionality of input. Each input type is unique i.e. user cannot assign one Type to two Digital input. Incase input is not used, Type is selected as NONE.
User can select any of the digital input types as explained below:
� START1:
a. In case of DOL starter, if START1 input is applied, then con�gured RUN digital output is activated (provided drive status is healthy i.e. ready to start).
b. In case of RDOL Starter, if START1 input is applied, then con�gured FORWARD relay digital output is activated (provided drive status is healthy i.e. ready to start).
c. In case of Star/Delta Starter, if START1 input is applied, then con�gured Star/Delta digital output sequence will start (provided drive status is healthy i.e. ready to start).
d. In case of Two Speed Starter, if START1 input is applied, then con�gured High Speed digital output is activated (provided drive status is healthy i.e. ready to start).
� START2:
a. In case of DOL Starter, if L/R input is high and START2 input is applied, con�gured RUN digital output is activated (provided drive status is healthy i.e. ready to start). If L/R input is absent, RUN output will not be activated if START2 is applied.
b. In case of RDOL Starter, if input is present then con�gured REVERSE Relay digital output is activated (provided drive status is healthy i.e. ready to start).
c. In case of Star/Delta Starter, if L/R input is high and START2 input is applied, con�gured Star/Delta digital output sequence will start (provided drive status is healthy i.e. ready to start). If L/R input is absent, Star/Delta output sequence will not be activated if START2 is applied.
d. In case of Two Speed Starter, if input is applied, then con�gured Low Speed digital output is activated (provided drive status is healthy i.e. ready to start).
� START3 & START4:
These types of input are applicable only in case of RDOL starter.
a. If L/R input is high and START3 input is applied, then con�gured FORWARD RELAY digital output is activated indicating drive running in forward direction in remote mode. If L/R input is absent, FORWARD output will not be activated if START3 is applied.
b. If L/R input is high and START4 input is applied, con�gured REVERSE RELAY digital output is activated indicating drive running in forward direction in remote mode. If L/R input is absent, REVERSE output will not be activated if START4 is applied.
� STOP:
Stop is a reverse logic. For any type of starter, STOP input should always be present in order to start the drive. If input is removed, then the drive stops immediately and goes to inhibit condition until STOP input is released i.e. goes high. If the input is not high, relay inhibits the drive start.
� LOCAL/REMOTE:
L/R input is for deciding local and remote mode operation of the drive. If the input is low, the relay takes it as local mode and drive can be started through START1 input in case of DOL & Star/Delta starter or START1 & START2 input in case of RDOL starter. Drive cannot be started through START2 input in case of DOL & Star/Delta Starter or START3 & START4 input in case of RDOL starter.
If the input is high, relay takes it as remote mode and drive can be started through START2 input in case of DOL & Star/Delta starter or START3 & START4 input in case of RDOL starter. Drive cannot be started through START1 input in case of DOL & Star/Delta Starter or START1 & START2 input in case of RDOL starter.
71MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
� INTERLOCK 1 to 12:
Interlock indicates healthiness of the system. If any one of interlock becomes low, then relay acts as per the interlock con�guration done.
� ESTOP:
Emergency Stop is a Reverse Logic. If input is removed or becomes low, the relay will STOP the motor. If this input is low, drive is allowed to start if valid start command is present. Only on next high to low transition, relay will stop the drive through ESTOP.
� CONTACTOR FEEDBACK 1 and 2:
After drive starting, if contactor feedback is not available within set �contactor time�, relay will stop the drive. During running condition, if contactor feedback becomes low, then drive will be stopped immediately.
Contactor feedback 1 is for main contactor in case of DOL starter or FORWARD contactor in case of RDOL starter. Contactor feedback2 is for REVERSE contactor in case of RDOL starter.
� RESET:
This input is for resetting the trip condition of the motor when �modes of reset� in any protection is selected as �remote�. If motor is in trip condition and �reset� input becomes high, it will reset the trip. Under normal condition, if this input becomes high, it will be simply ignored. For taking trip resetting action Input should undergo Low to High Transition.
� TEST:
This input when high indicates relay is in test position. In test condition, all the inhibit conditions gets ignored and start/stop operation can be performed to check control wiring in the module.
� NONE:
When selected for an input, no action for that particular input.
Mode: This setting is available only for Digital inputs: START1, START2, START3 and START4. Mode de�nes whether a particular input is to be continuously monitored or momentarily.
Validation Period: Validation period is user con�gurable de-bounce period provided with each Digital Input in order to validate the authenticity of the signal.
Interlock Con�guration: This setting is visible only when corresponding Digital Input is con�gured as Interlock 1 to 12. The Interlock can be con�gured as:
Disable: No action will be taken on interlock.
Alarm: If the interlock is absent then the Alarm output will be activated.
Trip: If the interlock input is absent then a Trip output will be activated after the set trip delay.
Interlock 1 to 12: If the interlock input is absent, Indicator 1 output will be activated (if Indicator 1 is con�gured as Digital Output for Interlock).
Local Reset: If interlock input is not present, then it inhibits Local Reset.
Communication Reset: If interlock input is not present, then it inhibits Communication Reset.
Auto Reset: If interlock input is not present, then it inhibits Auto Reset.
Remote Reset: If interlock input is not present, then it inhibits Remote Reset.
Stop: If interlock input is not present then, it inhibits motor from starting. Also motor will be stopped if running.
Interlock is considered for Test: If Enabled, interlocks are taken into consideration when the Relay is put in TEST Mode.
Interlock Trip Delay: It is available if any of interlock is con�gured in TRIP Mode.
Reset Modes: It is available if any of interlock is con�gured in TRIP Mode. Reset modes are con�gurable.
Table 8-11: Digital Input Settings
Start1 to Start4, Stop, Reset, Local/Remote, Estop, Contactor Feedback1,
Contactor Feedback2, Test, Interlock 1 to 12, None
Momentary or Maintained
0.1 - 60 sec
Enabled or Disabled
Enabled or Disabled
0.1 � 10 sec
Local, Remote, Communication
Parameter Setting Range
Type
Mode
Validation Period
Interlock configuration
Interlock is considered for test
Interlock Trip delay
Reset Modes
Parameter
0.1 sec
0.1 sec
Local
72MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
sec) if following conditions are satis�ed:
a. Drive is in stop condition
b. No trip condition
c. Thermal capacity is below threshold value.
� PERMISSIVE_OUTPUT (1 to 3):
This output is activated when corresponding PERMISSIVE_ OUTPUT command is received on communication from PLC/SCADA/DCS.
� TRUTH TABLE OUTPUT (1 to 16):
This is logic status generated by truth tables which can be directly assigned to energize the digital output contact.
� SIGNAL CONDITIONER OUTPUT (1 & 2):
This is logic status generated by Signal conditioner which can be directly assigned to energize the output contact.
� TIMER OUTPUT (1 & 2):
This is logic status generated by Timer which can be directly assigned to energize the output contact.
� COUNTER OUTPUT (1 & 2):
This is logic status generated by Counter which can be directly assigned to energize the output contact.
� NONE:
When selected for an output, no action for that particular output.
Mode: There are two modes available for output,
Level: The corresponding output is activated till next command to drop the output.
Pulse: The corresponding output is activated for the hold time, which is user con�gurable.
Hold Time: This setting is visible only in pulse mode. It is the time for which the corresponding Digital Output is activated when the output is triggered.
Follow Delay: This setting is visible only in FOLLOW type. It is the time to activate the corresponding Digital Output after the source parameter is activated.
Heater Delay: This setting is visible only in HEATER type. It is the time to activate the HEATER output after ful�lling the below conditions:
a. Drive should be in stop position and healthy.
b. No trip condition.
c. Thermal capacity is below threshold value.
The Heater Output is used in winding heating application. Table 8�12 shows the Digital output settings.
Digital Output Settings
The following settings are used to con�gure any Digital Output:
Table 8�11 shows the Digital Input settings.
Type: This decides the functionality of output. Incase output is not used, Type is selected as NONE.
User can select any of the digital output types as explained below:
� ALARM:
Whenever there is an alarm/pickup condition, then Alarm output is activated.
� TRIP:
If there is any trip condition (due to protection or interlock), then Trip output will be activated and all start outputs (RUN or FORWARD RELAY or REVERSE RELAY or STAR or DELTA or MAIN or HIGH SPEED or LOW SPEED) will be dropped.
� FOLLOW:
When selected, it follows the status of con�gured parameter after follow delay.
� RUN:
If starter type is DOL and if there is a valid start command (either through MCOMP suite/Display or communication or DI), then RUN output will be activated (provided drive status is healthy).
� FORWARD AND REVERSE RELAY:
If starter type is RDOL and if there is a valid start command i.e. forward or reverse (either through MCOMP suite/Display or communication or DI) then FORWARD or REVERSE RELAY output will be activated respectively (provided drive status is healthy).
� MAIN, STAR and DELTA:
If Starter type is STAR/DELTA and if there is a valid start command (either through MCOMP suite/Display or communication or DI), then Star-Delta sequence follows as below.
a. First �Main� and "Star" output will be activated.
b. After 'Time in Star' delay Star output will be dropped, then after 'Changeover delay' �Delta� output will be activated.
� HIGH SPEED & LOW SPEED:
If Starter type is Two Speed and if there is a valid start command i.e. high speed start or low speed start (either through MCOMP suite/Display or communication or DI), then High Speed sequence or Low Speed sequence starts respectively.
� INDICATORS (1 to 12):
Indicator output will be activated when the corresponding DI interlock con�gured as INTERLOCK is low.
� DRIVE AVAILABLE:
This output is activated when relay is not in inhibit condition and drive is in stop condition. During running condition, this output goes low stating drive is not available.
� HEATER:
This output is activated after set heater delay (range is 1 to 3600
73MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Analog Output Settings
One 4 - 20 mA analog output is provided in the Relay which can be con�gured to any of the parameter given in Table 8�13.
If the value of selected parameter is less than or equal to minimum set value, Analog output gives 4 mA & if the parameter value is equal to or greater than maximum set value, it gives 20 mA.
Alarm, Indicator 1 to 12, Follow 1 to 2, Run, Main , Start, Delta, Forward Relay,
Reverse Relay, Trip, Drive Available, Heater, High Speed, Low Speed,
Permissive_Output_1 to 3, Truth Table outputs, Signal Conditioner Outputs, Timer &
Counter outputs, None
Level or Pulse
0.1 � 1000 sec
0.1 � 1000 sec
1 � 3600 sec
Parameter Setting Range
Type
Mode
Hold Time
Follow Delay
Heater Delay
Table 8-12: Digital Output Settings
Parameter
0.1 sec
0.1 sec
1 sec
A
A
A
A
V
V
V
V
V
Type Unit Step Size
0.1 (0-20), 1(21-3600)
0.1 (0-20), 1(21-3600)
0.1 (0-20), 1(21-3600)
0.1 (0-20), 1(21-3600)
1
1
1
1
1
R Phase Current
Y Phase Current
B Phase Current
Average Current
R Phase Voltage
Y Phase Voltage
B Phase Voltage
Average Voltage
R-Y Line Voltage
Min Max
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3600
3600
3600
3600
375
375
375
375
375
V
V
kVA
kW
kVAR
oC
Hz
1
1
0.1
0.1
0.1
1
1
Y-B Line Voltage
B-R Line Voltage
Apparent Power
Active Power
Reactive Power
Temperature
Frequency
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
375
375
28.3
28.3
28.3
200
75
Table 8-13: Analog Output Settings
74MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
� assign logical outputs as Digital outputs and also transmit them over communication soft link on Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP/IP, Pro�bus for HMI/DCS applications.
Figure 8�1 shows the general overview of COMPlogic:
COMPlogic Modules
COMPlogic comprises of 4 modules:
Truth Table
A truth table shows the output of a logical circuit for all combinations of inputs using logic gates. In COMPlogic user has an additional �exibility in customizing the logic according to the application.
There are 16 Truth Tables available in the Relay COMPlogic.
� 2 Input 1 output (Two tables)
� 3 Input 1 output (Four tables)
� 4 Input 1 Output (Ten Tables)
Signal Conditioner
There are two Signal Conditioners available in the Relay COMPlogic, each of which can be con�gured to one of the following four types:
1. Non inverting
2. Inverting
3. Positive Edge Latch
4. Negative Edge Latch
Output of signal conditioner is triggered by conditioning input either on,
� Level: by sensing level of input (high or low level).
� Edge: by sensing transition from low level to high level (+ve edge) or high level to low level (-ve edge).
If there is any error in factory set calibration of analog o/p then user can offset the error using Manual scale factor option (manual calibration). Analog Output can be manually calibrated using manual scale factor option; by setting 'Expected Output' and 'Actual Output' which is getting observed for selected parameter. Considering the linear behavior in current output, we can �nd out the expected analog output current for applied input value of a parameter. Table 8-14 gives Manual scale factor setting of Analog output.
Communication Setting Parameters
Refer chapter-7: Communication for details of communication setting parameters available in the relay.
COMPlogic Setting Parameters
COMPLogic is a part of the MCOMP suite parameterization software. COMPlogic provides �exibility to select any parameter as an input of the Boolean modules and perform gate operation to get desired output. The user can program the required logic using different modules such as truth tables, signal conditioners, timers, and counters. Different logic gates available in truth table are AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, and Custom mode. The user can de�ne its own logic gate using custom mode.
COMPlogic is an important feature used to build and execute logical schemes within the Relay. Using COMPlogic a user can:
� simplify existing physical complexities into simple logical blocks there by reducing additional hard writing
� create cascaded logical blocks where output of one logical block can be used as input of another logical block
4- 20 mA
1 � 24 mA
Parameter Setting Range
Expected Output
Actual Output
Table 8-14: Manual Scale factor settings
0.1
0.1
Step Increase
Figure 8-1: COMPlogic Overview
Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
DI 1DI 2
DI 3
Output Trip
RestartTimer
DI 4
Event/Trip
COMPlogic Module
Truth Table
Signal Conditioner
Timer
Counter
Table 8-14: Manual Scale factor settings
16
2
2
2
Number of Modules
75MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Figure 8-2: Signal Conditioners
NON-INVERTING
Input
Reset
Output
Input Down: A positive edge transition on this input decrements the count.
Count limit is between 0 - 65535, roll over is not permitted.
Reset: This input resets the counter output to low level and count to zero.
Limit: It is a maximum count limit at which counter output is triggered. The limit range is from 1 to 65535.
The counter output will be set high once the count is equal to limit. It stays latched until the reset is high. For example set counter limit to 4, Figure 8�3 illustrates the working of a Counter with the help of waveforms.
There are two Timers available in Relay COMPlogic which can be selected from any one of the following four types.
1. Level triggered ON Timer
2. Rising edge ON Timer
3. Falling edge OFF Timer
4. Rising edge OFF Timer
Figure 8�4 shows a basic block diagram of a Timer.
NEGATIVE EDGE LATCH
Input
Reset
Output
POSITIVE EDGE LATCH
Input
Reset
Output
INVERTING
Input
Reset
Output
Figure 8-4: Block Diagram of Timer
Input Output
Reset
Timer
Limit
Counters
There are two Counters available in Relay COMPlogic. The counter output is generated based on the following inputs:
Input Up: A positive edge transition on this input increments the count. Count limit is between 0 - 65535, roll over is not permitted.
Level triggered ON Timer
Figure 8�5 shows operation of Level triggered ON Timer.
Timer triggers on input high level. After timer countdown, output triggers provided input still remains at high level. If input drops before timer countdown, then the timer reloads as shown in section-1.
Section-2 shows that if reset is high during timer countdown then,
� Timer is reloaded.
Output
Reset
InputDown
Input Up
1 2 3 2 1 1 2 3 4
12 0
Figure 8-3: Counter
76MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
� Output is reset to low level.
Rising edge ON Timer
Figure 8�6 shows operation of Rising edge ON Timer.
Timer triggers on rising edge of input. After timer countdown, output triggers and remains latched even after input drops to low level. Output drops when reset is at high level as shown in section-1.
Before the timer countdown, if another rising edge of the input is sensed the timer reloads and restarts the countdown as shown in section-2.
Section-3 shows that if reset is high during timer countdown then,
� Timer is reloaded.
� Output is reset to low level.
Falling edge OFF Timer
Figure 8�7 shows operation of Falling edge OFF Timer.
Timer triggers on falling edge of input. Output is triggered on
rising edge of input and remains latched even if input drops. After timer countdown, output is set to low level as shown in section-1.
Before the timer countdown, if another rising edge of the input is sensed the timer reloads as shown in section-2.
Section-3 shows if reset is high before the timer countdown then the timer drops & reloads and hence the output drops. If output is already high and reset is sensed before timer countdown then output remains high.
If reset is high before the application of the input, output remains at low level till reset drops as shown in section-4.
Rising edge OFF Timer
Figure 8�8 shows operation of Rising edge OFF Timer.
Timer and outputs are triggered on rising edge of input. After the timer countdown, output is set to low level. If input drops before countdown, then timer drops, reloads and hence output drops as shown in section-1.
Section-2 shows if reset is at high level before the timer countdown, then timer drops and reloads.
Section-3 shows if reset is present before the application of input, then output remains at low level.
Figure 8-7: Falling Edge OFF Timer
Input
Reset
Time
Output
Section-1 Section-4Section-3Section-2
Figure 8-5: Level Triggered ON Timer
Section-1 Section-2
Input
Reset
Time
Output
Figure 8-6: Rising Edge ON Timer
Section-1 Section-3Section-2
Input
Reset
Time
Output
Figure 8-8: Rising Edge OFF Timer
Section-1 Section-2 Section-3
Input
Reset
Time
Output
77MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
List of logical Inputs
Source of Input
Communication
Start from Communication
Stop from Communication
Reset from Communication
Permissive_Output_1
Permissive_Output_2
Permissive_Output_3
FIXED 0
FIXED 1
DI 1 to DI 6
DI 1-1 to DI 1-8
DI 2-1 to DI 2-8
DI 3-1 to DI 3-8
DO 1 to DO 4
DO 1-1 & DO 1-2
DO 2-1 & DO 2-2
DO 3-1 & DO 3-2
TT 1 to TT 16
SIGNAL CONDITIONER1 O/P& SIGNAL CONDITIONER2 O/P
TIMER1 O/P & TIMER2 O/P
COUNTER1 O/P & COUNTER2 O/P
MOTOR DIRECTION
PICK UP STATUS
INHIBIT STATUS
ALARM STATUS
TRIP STATUS
MOTOR RUNNING STATUS
DRIVE AVAILABLE
Name of Input Description
Status bit will get Set on receiving START or STOP or RESET command overcommunication.
These statuses are general purpose Set/Reset commands given from masterdevice over communication.
Input fixed to 0
Input fixed to 1
Base unit digital input
Expansion unit 1 digital inputs
Expansion unit 2 digital inputs
Expansion unit 3 digital inputs
Base unit digital outputs
Expansion unit 1 digital outputs
Expansion unit 2 digital outputs
Expansion unit 3 digital outputs
Truth table outputs
Signal conditioner outputs
Timer outputs
Counter outputs
�0� for forward or Low speed & �1� for reverse or High speed
�0� on no pickup or pickup reset condition & �1� for active pickup
�0� for motor healthy conditions & �1� for Inhibit condition
�0� for no alarm or alarm reset condition & �1� for active alarm
�0� when no Trip or trip reset condition & �1� for active Trip
Fixed Levels
Digital Inputs
Digital Outputs
Logic ModuleOutputs
Motor Status Data
�0� for inhibit condition or running condition & �1� for ready to start i.e.no inhibit condition
�0� for motor not running in any of the starter mode & �1� for motorrunning in any of the starter mode
RUN
FWD RELAY
REV RELAY
MAIN
In RDOL starter; this status will be �1� for high forward running outputi.e. �FWD RELAY�
In DOL starter ; this status will be �1� for high �RUN� output
In Star Delta starter; this status will be �1� for high �MAIN� output
In RDOL starter; this status will be �1� for high reverse running outputi.e. �REV RELAY�
Motor Statusas per specificstarter Type
Table 8-15 (1): Logical Inputs
78MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Source of Input
Motor Statusas per specificstarter Type
STAR
DELTA
HIGH SPEED
LOW SPEED
Name of Input Description
In Star Delta starter; this status will be �1� for high �STAR� output
In Star Delta starter; this status will be �1� for high �DELTA� output
In TWO SPEED starter; this status will be �1� for high �HIGH SPEED� output
In TWO SPEED starter; this status will be �1� for high �LOW SPEED� output
Indicator status will become �1� if status of corresponding Interlock input,configured as Indicator is low i.e. "0�INDICATOR1 to INDICATOR12Interlocks
Individual protection & Interlock bits for showing TRIP status.
Individual protection & Interlock bits for showing ALARM status.
Individual protection & Interlock bits for showing PICKUP status.
PROTECTION TRIP
PROTECTION ALARM
PROTECTION PICKUP
Protection Bits
Relay Con�guration
Relay Con�guration through the Display
The Display is designed to be compatible with the Relay. The Display also serves as a medium between the Relay and MCOMP Suite using mini USB cable readily available as phone charging cable. Settings can be done by using the Display as described below and shown in the following �ow chart:
Procedure to con�gure the IFLC value using the Display:
1. Press ENT button to move from metering parameter view to menu window.
2. Use Left, Right navigation keys to go to settings menu.
3. Press ENT to inside settings menu.
4. Enter correct password using navigation keys to proceed further. Default password is 1111.
5. Press ENT to go into system settings.
6. Press ENT to go into IFLC setting.
7. Press ENT to edit the IFL value.
8. Change the value using Up, Down navigation keys.
9. Press ENT to con�rm the selected value.
10. Press Return to save the changed value with option as YES/NO.
11. Select YES and press ENT to con�rm the save.
12. Press Return for save message con�rmation. After successful saving, a pop up window will appear showing message as �SAVED�. At this stage, the �PWR/COMM� LED turns �On� in the following sequence: Green-Orange-Green.
13. Press Return key till Settings menu screen appears.
14. Use Up, Down keys to go to commands menu.
15. Press ENT to go inside the commands menu.
16. Enter correct password using navigation keys to proceed further.
17. Use Up, Down keys to go to the �MCOMP reset� option.
18. Press ENT to send the command for MCOMP reset. One can also do a power recycle of the MCOMP main unit instead of sending �MCOMP reset� command through display. This will put the new settings into effect.
Table 8-15 (2): Logical Inputs
79MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Figure 8-: Display operating procedure
Metering Settings:
:
:
:
Ir
Iy
Ib
Iavg
0.0A
0.0A
0.0A
0.0A
ENT < >
ENT
ENT
< >ENT
Settings
SystemProtectionDigital I/O
PASSWORD
X X X X
Settings
EditView
ENT
System
Full load CurrentMotor VoltageAuxiliary Supply
ENT ENTFull Load Current
I�c : 10.1A
Full Load Current
I�c : 10.1A
ENT
Full Load Current
I�c : 11.0A
Full Load Current
I�c : 11.0A
System
Full load CurrentMotor VoltageAuxiliary Supply
ENT
SAVE?
YESNO
Settings
EditView
Settings
SyPDigital I/O
SAVED
ENT < >
PASSWORD
X X X X
COMMANDS Settings
ENT< >
Commands
Motor Start 1Motor Start 2Motor Stop
Commands
Motor Start 2Motor StopMCOMP Reset
< > ENT
Commands
Motor Start 2Motor StopMCOMP Reset
CMD Sent
80MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Relay Con�guration through MCOMP suite
MCOMP Suite is a software developed for local parameterization and monitoring of the Relay. MCOMP Suite provides a user friendly environment for con�guration and parameterization of the Relay.
2. Press Read All to read all the settings before changing the settings.
Procedure to con�gure the I value using MCOMP Suite:FLC
1. Open MCOMP Suite window and switch to Con�guration mode.
81MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
3. After successful read, press System Settings to get the following screen.
4. Press Motor Settings, change IFLC value by choosing a required value from drop down button, next to the IFLC value bar and press Write All.
82MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
5. If user is in Admin Mode, online changes in settings are directly saved after writing the settings. If user is in Supervisor Mode user needs to reset MCOMP after using Write All option. Procedure to save the settings in Supervisor Mode is:
Relay Con�guration through Communication
The Relay consists of three communication protocols: Pro�bus, Modbus RTU and Modbus TCP/IP. Out of these three communication protocols, only Modbus TCP/IP can be used for remote parameterization over communication. Each parameter has its own holding register address (Function Code 03). Holding register address for each parameter is shown in Modbus TCP/IP Memory Map.
Procedure to con�gure the IFLC value through Communication:
1. Refer Modbus TCP/IP memory map for holding register address of the particular parameter.
2. Poll particular register (40151) of IFLC to see the current value of IFLC.
3. Write required value of IFLC by considering scaling factor.
4. Poll the IFLC register.
Examples of Relay Selection and Basic Settings using Motor data
Case 1:
In an appapplication, a Motor Protection Relay (MPR) is required for 30 kW motor with 5DI and 4DO. MPR shall work on 230 VAC supply, shall show all the metering values on the local panel and shall be communicable on Modbus TCP/IP. MPR shall accept
thermistor inputs for temperature sensing. MPR shall take CBCT inputs for sensitive earth fault detection of 2A. The motor details speci�ed by motor manufacturer are:
� Full load Current = 53 A, Voltage = 415 V, Frequency = 50 Hz
� Locked Rotor Current = 600 % FLC
� Starting time at 100% full load = 0.2 second
� Type of Starting = Direct On Line
Solution:
Selection of MCOMP Relay:
Referring to MCOMP Order Codes, following part numbers can be selected.
� Main unit: MCOMP_MAIN_UNIT_U_T_YI_P
� Current Module: MCOMP_CURRENT_MODULE_C5_1
� Display unit: MCOMP_DISPLAY_UNIT_D1_1
Above selected relay main unit have universal aux supply, Modbus TCP/IP communication, universal DI sensing voltage and thermistor (PTC) input port. Current module is type-5 which covers full load current of 53 A with 1meter CM cable. Display unit is selected of 240 aux supply with 1 meter display cable for local panel metering. Expansion module part number is not selected as DI/DO requirement is ful�lled by main unit itself.
Monitoring Window Special Commands Reset MCOMP Send
83MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
To navigate to the motor Settings, follow the path shown below:
Settings(Con�guration Mode)
SystemSettings
MotorSettings
ReferFigure 8-1
Settings(Con�guration Mode)
SystemSettings
StarterSettings
ReferFigure 8-1
Settings(Con�guration Mode)
ProtectionSettings
LockedRotor
ReferFigure 8-1
Settings(Con�guration Mode)
ProtectionSettings
EarthFault
ReferFigure 8-1
Case 2:
In an application, a Motor Protection Relay (MPR) is required for 90kW motor with 9DI and 5DO. MPR shall work on 230VAC supply, shall show all the metering values on the local panel and shall be communicable on Pro�bus. MPR shall accept RTD input for temperature sensing. The motor details speci�ed by motor manufacturer are:
� Full load Current = 162A, Voltage = 415V, Frequency = 50 Hz
� Locked Rotor Current = 600 % FLC
� Max Starting time = 1 sec
� Type of Starting = Reverse Direct On Line
Solution:
Selection of MCOMP Relay:
As the required motor FLC is more than 81A, we need to use external conventional CTs along with MCOMP CM. The external CTs should be chosen such that FLC of the motor falls in 50% to 100% of external CT primary. Since FLC is 162 A, a 200 :1 or 200:5 CT may be chosen. Let us choose 200:1 CT. The MCOMP CM selection will depend on conventional CT secondary. For 1A and 5A secondary, the required CM should be CM1 and CM2 respectively. So CM1 is required. The expansion unit of 4DI/2DO along with relay main unit will serve the 9DI/5DO requirement.
Referring to MCOMP Order Codes, following part numbers can be selected.
84MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
� Main unit: MCOMP_MAIN_UNIT_U_P_YI_R
� Current Module: MCOMP_CURRENT_MODULE_C1_1
� Display unit: MCOMP_DISPLAY_UNIT_D1_1
� Expansion Unit: MCOMP_EXPANSION_UNIT_A_YI_1
Basic settings to be done in the Relay as:
Settings(Con�guration Mode)
SystemSettings
MotorSettings
ReferFigure 8-2
Settings(Con�guration Mode)
SystemSettings
StarterSettings
ReferFigure 8-2
Settings(Con�guration Mode)
ProtectionSettings
LockedRotor
ReferFigure 8-2
Settings(Con�guration Mode)
ProtectionSettings
ExternalCT Ratio
ReferFigure 8-2
85MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Setting Sheet
System Settings
Motor Tag
Motor Tag (10 characters)
Motor Settings
Full Load Current (I )FLC
Motor Rated Voltage (V )L-L
Auxiliary Supply (V )AUX
Voltage Connect
Trip Class
Starting Time
Frequency
Running Current
Input Voltage
Auto Start detection
Current Auto Stop
Voltage Auto Stop
Starter Settings
Type
Time in Star (Visible if Type = STAR/DELTA)
Change Over Delay(Visible if Type = STAR/DELTA)
High Speed IFLC
(Visible if Type = TWO SPEED)
Low Speed IFLC
(Visible if Type = TWO SPEED)
Modes of Starting
Local_L
Local_R
Remote_Start1_L, Remote_Start2_R
Remote_Start1_L, Remote_Start2_R
Remote_Start1&2_L(Visible if Type = RDOL)
Remote_Start3&4_R(Visible if Type = RDOL)
0.6 � 600 A
380 � 800 V
24, 110, 230 V
Enable or Disable
Class 5 - 40
1 � 200 seconds
50 or 60 Hz
20 � 100 % IFLC
3 Phase - 3 Wire or
3 Phase � 4 Wire
Enable or Disable
Enable or Disable
Enable or Disable
DOL, RDOL, STAR/DELTA, TWO SPEED
1 to (starting time -1) seconds
0.1 � 200 seconds
0.6 � 600 A
0.6 � 600 A
Local and Remote
Enable or Disable
Enable or Disable
Enable or Disable
Enable or Disable
Enable or Disable
Enable or Disable
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Enable or Disable =____________________Communication_L
Table 8-16 (1): System settings
86MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Enable or Disable
Enable or Disable
Enable or Disable
1111 - 9999
1 � 1000 A
1A or 5A
Enable or Disable
1 � 800 V
110 � 230 V
Enable or Disable
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
Enable or Disable
Two Phase or Three Phase
Enable or Disable
Motor or Non Motor
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=________________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Event Records
Pick Up
Trip
Alarm
Display password
Admin
External CT Ratio
Primary Current
Secondary Current
Mode
PT Ratio
Primary Voltage
Secondary Voltage
PT Ratio Enable
Mode Change
Input 1
Input 2
Mode
Phase SelectionPhase Selection
Latched TripLatched Trip
Feeder TypeFeeder Type
Enable or Disable =____________________Communication_R
Table 8-16 (2): System settings
87MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Protection Settings
Table 8-17 (1): Protection settings
20 � 100 % IFLC
100 % ITM
80 � 100 % ITM
Enabled
5 � 30 % ITM
30 � 95 % ITM
Enable or Disable
1 � 1200 seconds
Local, Remote, Auto, Communication
Enable or Disable
50 � 1000 % IFLC
90% of pickup
0.1 � 10 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
Enable or Disable
30 � 85 % IR
110 % of pickup
0.1 � 120 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
Enable or Disable
5 � 100 % IFLC
85 � 100 % of pickup
1 � 30 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
Enable or Disable
VECTOR_SUM or CBCT
20 � 500 % IFLC
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=________________________
=____________________
Current Set (I )SET
Pickup Set
Alarm Set
Thermal Memory
Thermal Memory Reset Value
Thermal Inhibit Setting
Pause Setting
Pause Time Delay
Reset Modes
Alarm Mode
Over Current
Pickup Set
Alarm Set
Trip Delay
Rest Modes
Alarm Mode
Trip Mode
Under Current
Pickup Set
Alarm Set
Trip Delay
Rest Modes
Alarm Mode
Trip Mode
Current Unbalance
Pickup Set
Alarm Set
Trip Delay
Rest Modes
Alarm Mode
Trip Mode
Earth Fault
Earth Fault Type
Pickup Set (Ief)(Visible if Earth Fault Type = VECTOR_SUM)
Overload
88MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Pickup Set (Ief)(Visible if Earth Fault Type = CBCT)
Alarm Set(Visible if Earth Fault Type = VECTOR_SUM)
Alarm Set(Visible if Earth Fault Type = CBCT)
Trip Delay (Run)
Trip Delay (Start)(Visible if Earth Fault Type = CBCT)
Alarm Delay (Run)(Visible if Earth Fault Type = CBCT)
Alarm Delay (Start)(Visible if Earth Fault Type = CBCT)
Rest Modes
Alarm Mode
Trip Mode
Locked Rotor
Pickup Set
Alarm Set
Trip Delay
Reset Modes
Alarm Mode
Trip Mode
IDMT Overcurrent (Stage 1 and 2)
Pickup Set
Time Constant
Curve Type
Reset Modes
Alarm Mode
Trip Mode
Over Voltage
Pickup Set
Alarm Set
Trip Delay
Reset Modes
Alarm Mode
Trip Mode
Under Voltage
Pickup Set
0.1 � 20 A
90% of pickup
0.1 � Pickup set value A
0 � 60 seconds
0 � 25 seconds
0 � 60 seconds
0 � 60 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
Enable or Disable
150 � 1000 % IFLC
90% of Pickup
0.5 � 30 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
Enable or Disable
20 � 1000 % IFLC
0.5 � 600 seconds
Inverse, Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
Enable or Disable
101 � 130 % VN
95% of Pickup
0.2 � 25 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
Enable or Disable
20 � 85 % VN
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=________________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Table 8-17 (2): Protection settings
89MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
110 % of Pickup
0.2 � 25 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication, Auto
Enable or Disable
Enable or Disable
5 � 50 % VN
90 % of Pickup
0.2 � 20 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
Enable or Disable
RYB or RBY
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
0.1 � 30 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
101 � 105 % FS
99 % of Pickup
1 � 30 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
Enable or Disable
94 � 98 % FS
101 % of Pickup
1 � 30 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
Enable or Disable
20 � 90 % VN
65 � 95 % VN
0.2 � 60 seconds
4 � 1200 seconds
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=________________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Alarm Set
Trip Delay
Reset Modes
Alarm Mode
Trip Mode
Voltage Unbalance
Pickup Set
Alarm Set
Trip Delay
Reset Modes
Alarm Mode
Trip Mode
Phase Reversal
Phase Sequence
Reset modes
Mode
Phase Loss
Trip Delay
Rest Modes
Mode
Over Frequency
Pickup Set
Alarm Set
Trip Delay
Reset Modes
Alarm Mode
Trip Mode
Under Frequency
Pickup Set
Alarm Set
Trip Delay
Reset Modes
Alarm Mode
Trip Mode
Re-acceleration
Voltage Dip
Voltage Restoration
Restart Time
Restart Delay
Table 8-17 (3): Protection settings
90MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Same or separate
Enable or Disable
2 � 10 seconds
1 � 30 seconds
Local, Remote, Auto
Enable or Disable
Enable or Disable
Enable or Disable
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
15 � 60 minutes
1 � 30 starts
1 � 120 minutes
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
RTD (PT-100) or Thermistor(PTC)
o25 � 180 C
oPickup Set Value � 5 C
oPickup Reset Value � 5 C
oAlarm Set Value � 5 C
5 � 250 seconds
2700 � 4000 ohm
1600 � 2300 ohm
0.1 � 60 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
Enable or Disable
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=________________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Aux and Motor Supply
Mode
Communication Failure
Time Delay
Trip Delay
Reset Modes
Trip only in Remote
Alarm Mode
Trip Mode
Excessive Start Time
Rest Modes
Mode
Maximum Number of Starts
Reference Period
Permissive Starts
Inhibit Period
Reset Modes
Mode
Temperature
Sensor Type
Pickup Set(Visible if Sensor Type = RTD(PT-100))
Pickup Reset(Visible if Sensor Type = RTD(PT-100))
Alarm Set(Visible if Sensor Type = RTD(PT-100))
Alarm Reset(Visible if Sensor Type = RTD(PT-100))
Trip Delay(Visible if Sensor Type = RTD(PT-100))
Response Resistance(Visible if Sensor Type = Thermistor(PTC))
Reset Resistance(Visible if Sensor Type = Thermistor(PTC))
Trip Delay(Visible if Sensor Type = Thermistor(PTC))
Reset Modes
Alarm Mode
Trip Mode
Table 8-17 (4): Protection settings
91MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Communication Settings
DIO Settings (Digital Input/Output)
Type
Mode(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,Contactor Feedback2, Test, LogicalInputs, None
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
=____________________
IO Settings
Input 1
Modbus, Profibus, Modbus TCP/IP
RTU
1 � 247
9600 or 19200
None, Even, Odd
One, Two
1 � 126
Enable or Disable
0.0.0.0 � 255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0 � 255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0 � 255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0 � 255.255.255.255
+/-, 0 - 13 hours, 0 � 59 minutes
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Protocol Selection
Modbus (Visible if Protocol Selection = Modbus)
Mode
Node Address
Baud Rate
Parity
Stop Bits
Profibus (Visible if Protocol Selection = Profibus)
Node Address
Modbus TCP/IP (Visible if Protocol Selection = Modbus TCP/IP)
DHCP Mode
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
SNTP Server Address
Time Zone (GMT)
3 � 15 %
3 � 15 %
1 � 15 %
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Hysteresis Band
Current
Voltage
Frequency
Table 8-17 (5): Protection settings
Table 8-18: Communication settings
Table 8-19 (1): DIO settings
92MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
0.1 � 60 seconds
0.1 � 60 seconds
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
0.1 � 10 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Type
Mode(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,Contactor Feedback2, Test, LogicalInputs, None
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
=____________________
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
0.1 � 60 seconds
0.1 � 60 seconds
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
0.1 � 10 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Input 2
Table 8-19 (2): DIO settings
93MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Type
Mode(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,Contactor Feedback2, Test, LogicalInputs, None
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
=____________________
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
0.1 � 60 seconds
0.1 � 60 seconds
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
0.1 � 10 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Type
Mode(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 orStart3 or Start4)
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,Contactor Feedback2, Test, LogicalInputs, None
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
=____________________
Validation Period(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 orContactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
0.1 � 60 seconds
0.1 � 60 seconds
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 toInterlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Input 4
Input 3
Table 8-19 (3): DIO settings
94MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Interlock Trip Delay(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
0.1 � 10 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Type
Mode(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,Contactor Feedback2, Test, LogicalInputs, None
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
=____________________
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 orContactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
0.1 � 60 seconds
0.1 � 60 seconds
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 toInterlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
0.1 � 10 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Type
Mode(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 orStart3 or Start4)
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,Contactor Feedback2, Test, LogicalInputs, None
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
=____________________
Validation Period(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1or Contactor Feedback2)
0.1 � 60 seconds =____________________
Input 5
Input 6
Table 8-19 (4): DIO settings
95MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Contactor Time(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 orContactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
0.1 � 60 seconds
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 toInterlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
0.1 � 10 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Type
Mode(Hidden if Type = None)
Run, Forward Relay, Reverse Relay,Follow1, Follow2, Alarm, Trip, Main,Star, Delta, Indicator1 to 12, DriveAvailable, Heater, Truth Table o/p 1to Truth Table o/p 16, Timer 1 o/p,Timer 2 o/p, Counter 1 o/p, Counter 2o/p, Signal Conditioner 1 o/p, SignalConditioner 2 o/p, Permissive o/p 1 toPermissive o/p 3, High Speed, LowSpeed, None
=____________________
=____________________Level or Pulse
Hold Time(Visible if Mode = Pulse)
=____________________0.1 � 1000 seconds
Follow Delay(Visible if Type = Follow 1 or Follow 2)
=____________________0.1 � 1000 seconds
Heater Delay(Visible if Type = Heater)
=____________________1 � 3600 seconds
Type
Mode(Hidden if Type = None)
Run, Forward Relay, Reverse Relay,Follow1, Follow2, Alarm, Trip, Main,Star, Delta, Indicator1 to 12, DriveAvailable, Heater, Truth Table o/p 1to Truth Table o/p 16, Timer 1 o/p,Timer 2 o/p, Counter 1 o/p, Counter 2o/p, Signal Conditioner 1 o/p, SignalConditioner 2 o/p, Permissive o/p 1 toPermissive o/p 3, High Speed, LowSpeed, None
=____________________
=____________________Level or Pulse
Output 1
Output 2
Table 8-19 (5): DIO settings
96MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Hold Time(Visible if Mode = Pulse)
=____________________0.1 � 1000 seconds
Follow Delay(Visible if Type = Follow 1 or Follow 2)
=____________________0.1 � 1000 seconds
Heater Delay(Visible if Type = Heater)
=____________________1 � 3600 seconds
Type
Mode(Hidden if Type = None)
Run, Forward Relay, Reverse Relay,Follow1, Follow2, Alarm, Trip, Main,Star, Delta, Indicator1 to 12, DriveAvailable, Heater, Truth Table o/p 1to Truth Table o/p 16, Timer 1 o/p,Timer 2 o/p, Counter 1 o/p, Counter 2o/p, Signal Conditioner 1 o/p, SignalConditioner 2 o/p, Permissive o/p 1 toPermissive o/p 3, High Speed, LowSpeed, None
=____________________
=____________________Level or Pulse
Hold Time(Visible if Mode = Pulse)
=____________________0.1 � 1000 seconds
Follow Delay(Visible if Type = Follow 1 or Follow 2)
=____________________0.1 � 1000 seconds
Heater Delay(Visible if Type = Heater)
=____________________1 � 3600 seconds
Type
Mode(Hidden if Type = None)
Run, Forward Relay, Reverse Relay,Follow1, Follow2, Alarm, Trip, Main,Star, Delta, Indicator1 to 12, DriveAvailable, Heater, Truth Table o/p 1to Truth Table o/p 16, Timer 1 o/p,Timer 2 o/p, Counter 1 o/p, Counter 2o/p, Signal Conditioner 1 o/p, SignalConditioner 2 o/p, Permissive o/p 1 toPermissive o/p 3, High Speed, LowSpeed, None
=____________________
=____________________Level or Pulse
Hold Time(Visible if Mode = Pulse)
=____________________0.1 � 1000 seconds
Follow Delay(Visible if Type = Follow 1 or Follow 2)
=____________________0.1 � 1000 seconds
Heater Delay(Visible if Type = Heater)
=____________________1 � 3600 seconds
Output 3
Output 4
Table 8-19 (6): DIO settings
97MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Expansion IO Module 1
Module Type =____________________8DI or 4DI+2DO or None
Module ID =____________________8DI Module1 or 4DI+2DO Module1or None
Type
Mode(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,Contactor Feedback2, Test, LogicalInputs, None
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
=____________________
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 orContactor Feedback2)
Interlock Trip Delay(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
0.1 � 60 seconds
0.1 � 60 seconds
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 toInterlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
0.1 � 10 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
=____________________
=____________________
Interlock Config(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Type
Mode(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 orStart3 or Start4)
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,Contactor Feedback2, Test, LogicalInputs, None
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
=____________________
Validation Period(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)0.1 � 60 seconds =____________________
Input 1-1(Hidden if Module Type = None)
Input 1-2(Hidden if Module Type = None)
Table 8-19 (7): DIO settings
98MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
0.1 � 60 seconds
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
0.1 � 10 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,Contactor Feedback2, Test, LogicalInputs, None
Maintained or Momentary
0.1 � 60 seconds
0.1 � 60 seconds
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
0.1 � 10 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Contactor Time(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Type
Mode(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Input 1-3(Hidden if Module Type = None)
Table 8-19 (8): DIO settings
99MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Type
Mode(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,Contactor Feedback2, Test, LogicalInputs, None
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
=____________________
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
0.1 � 60 seconds
0.1 � 60 seconds
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
0.1 � 10 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Type
Mode(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,Contactor Feedback2, Test, LogicalInputs, None
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
=____________________
Validation Period(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 orContactor Feedback2)
0.1 � 60 seconds
0.1 � 60 seconds
=____________________
=____________________
Input 1-4(Hidden if Module Type = None)
Input 1-5(Visible if Module Type = 8DI)
Table 8-19 (9): DIO settings
100MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Interlock Config(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 toInterlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
0.1 � 10 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Type
Mode(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,Contactor Feedback2, Test, LogicalInputs, None
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
=____________________
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
0.1 � 60 seconds
0.1 � 60 seconds
=____________________
=____________________
Interlock Config(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
0.1 � 10 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Type =____________________
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,Contactor Feedback2, Test, LogicalInputs, None
Input 1-6(Visible if Module Type = 8DI)
Input 1-7(Visible if Module Type = 8DI)
Table 8-19 (10): DIO settings
101MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Mode(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Maintained or Momentary =____________________
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
0.1 � 60 seconds
0.1 � 60 seconds
=____________________
=____________________
Interlock Config(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
0.1 � 10 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Type =____________________
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,Contactor Feedback2, Test, LogicalInputs, None
Mode(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 orStart3 or Start4)
Maintained or Momentary =____________________
Validation Period(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 orContactor Feedback2)
0.1 � 60 seconds
0.1 � 60 seconds
=____________________
=____________________
Interlock Config(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 toInterlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
0.1 � 10 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Input 1-8(Visible if Module Type = 8DI)
Table 8-19 (11): DIO settings
102MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Interlock Considered for Test(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Enable or Disable =____________________
Type
Mode(Hidden if Type = None)
Run, Forward Relay, Reverse Relay,Follow1, Follow2, Alarm, Trip, Main,Star, Delta, Indicator1 to 12, DriveAvailable, Heater, Truth Table o/p 1to Truth Table o/p 16, Timer 1 o/p,Timer 2 o/p, Counter 1 o/p, Counter 2o/p, Signal Conditioner 1 o/p, SignalConditioner 2 o/p, Permissive o/p 1 toPermissive o/p 3, High Speed, LowSpeed, None
=____________________
=____________________Level or Pulse
Hold Time(Visible if Mode = Pulse)
=____________________0.1 � 1000 seconds
Follow Delay(Visible if Type = Follow 1 or Follow 2)
=____________________0.1 � 1000 seconds
Heater Delay(Visible if Type = Heater)
=____________________1 � 3600 seconds
Type
Mode(Hidden if Type = None)
Run, Forward Relay, Reverse Relay,Follow1, Follow2, Alarm, Trip, Main,Star, Delta, Indicator1 to 12, DriveAvailable, Heater, Truth Table o/p 1to Truth Table o/p 16, Timer 1 o/p,Timer 2 o/p, Counter 1 o/p, Counter 2o/p, Signal Conditioner 1 o/p, SignalConditioner 2 o/p, Permissive o/p 1 toPermissive o/p 3, High Speed, LowSpeed, None
=____________________
=____________________Level or Pulse
Hold Time(Visible if Mode = Pulse)
=____________________0.1 � 1000 seconds
Follow Delay(Visible if Type = Follow 1 or Follow 2)
=____________________0.1 � 1000 seconds
Heater Delay(Visible if Type = Heater)
=____________________1 � 3600 seconds
Output 1-1
(Visible if Module Type = 4DI+2DO)
Output 1-2
(Visible if Module Type = 4DI+2DO)
Table 8-19 (12): DIO settings
103MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Type
Mode(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,Contactor Feedback2, Test, LogicalInputs, None
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
=____________________
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
0.1 � 60 seconds
0.1 � 60 seconds
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
0.1 � 10 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Input 2-1(Hidden if Module Type = None)
Contactor Time(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 orContactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
0.1 � 60 seconds
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 toInterlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
0.1 � 10 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Expansion IO Module 2
Module Type
Module ID
8DI or 4DI+2DO or None
8DI Module1 or 4DI+2DO Module1or None
=____________________
=____________________
Table 8-19 (13): DIO settings
104MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Type
Mode(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,Contactor Feedback2, Test, LogicalInputs, None
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
=____________________
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
0.1 � 60 seconds
0.1 � 60 seconds
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
0.1 � 10 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Type
Mode(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,Contactor Feedback2, Test, LogicalInputs, None
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
=____________________
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
0.1 � 60 seconds
0.1 � 60 seconds
=____________________
=____________________
Input 2-2(Hidden if Module Type = None)
Input 2-3(Hidden if Module Type = None)
Table 8-19 (14): DIO settings
105MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Interlock Config(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 toInterlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
0.1 � 10 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Type
Mode(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 orStart3 or Start4)
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,Contactor Feedback2, Test, LogicalInputs, None
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
=____________________
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
0.1 � 60 seconds
0.1 � 60 seconds
=____________________
=____________________
Interlock Config(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
0.1 � 10 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Type =____________________
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,Contactor Feedback2, Test, LogicalInputs, None
Input 2-4(Hidden if Module Type = None)
Input 2-5(Visible if Module Type = 8DI)
Table 8-19 (15): DIO settings
106MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Mode(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Maintained or Momentary =____________________
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
0.1 � 60 seconds
0.1 � 60 seconds
=____________________
=____________________
Interlock Config(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
0.1 � 10 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Type =____________________
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,Contactor Feedback2, Test, LogicalInputs, None
Mode(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 orStart3 or Start4)
Maintained or Momentary =____________________
Validation Period(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 orContactor Feedback2)
0.1 � 60 seconds
0.1 � 60 seconds
=____________________
=____________________
Interlock Config(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 toInterlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
0.1 � 10 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Input 2-6(Visible if Module Type = 8DI)
Table 8-19 (16): DIO settings
107MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Interlock Considered for Test(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Enable or Disable =____________________
Type =____________________
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,Contactor Feedback2, Test, LogicalInputs, None
Mode(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Maintained or Momentary =____________________
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
0.1 � 60 seconds
0.1 � 60 seconds
=____________________
=____________________
Interlock Config(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
0.1 � 10 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Interlock Considered for Test(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Enable or Disable =____________________
Type =____________________
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,Contactor Feedback2, Test, LogicalInputs, None
Mode(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Maintained or Momentary =____________________
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
0.1 � 60 seconds =____________________
Input 2-8(Visible if Module Type = 8DI)
Input 2-7(Visible if Module Type = 8DI)
Table 8-19 (17): DIO settings
108MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Contactor Time(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 orContactor Feedback2)
0.1 � 60 seconds =____________________
Interlock Config(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 toInterlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
0.1 � 10 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Interlock Considered for Test(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Enable or Disable =____________________
Type
Mode(Hidden if Type = None)
Run, Forward Relay, Reverse Relay,Follow1, Follow2, Alarm, Trip, Main,Star, Delta, Indicator1 to 12, DriveAvailable, Heater, Truth Table o/p 1to Truth Table o/p 16, Timer 1 o/p,Timer 2 o/p, Counter 1 o/p, Counter 2o/p, Signal Conditioner 1 o/p, SignalConditioner 2 o/p, Permissive o/p 1 toPermissive o/p 3, High Speed, LowSpeed, None
=____________________
=____________________Level or Pulse
Hold Time(Visible if Mode = Pulse)
=____________________0.1 � 1000 seconds
Follow Delay(Visible if Type = Follow 1 or Follow 2)
=____________________0.1 � 1000 seconds
Heater Delay(Visible if Type = Heater)
=____________________1 � 3600 seconds
Type
Run, Forward Relay, Reverse Relay,Follow1, Follow2, Alarm, Trip, Main,Star, Delta, Indicator1 to 12, DriveAvailable, Heater, Truth Table o/p 1to Truth Table o/p 16, Timer 1 o/p,Timer 2 o/p, Counter 1 o/p, Counter 2o/p, Signal Conditioner 1 o/p, SignalConditioner 2 o/p, Permissive o/p 1 toPermissive o/p 3, High Speed, LowSpeed, None
=____________________
Output 2-2
(Visible if Module Type = 4DI+2DO)
Output 2-1
(Visible if Module Type = 4DI+2DO)
Table 8-19 (18): DIO settings
109MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Table 8-19 (19): DIO settings
Level or Pulse
0.1 � 1000 seconds
0.1 � 1000 seconds
1 � 3600 seconds
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,Contactor Feedback2, Test, LogicalInputs, None
Maintained or Momentary
0.1 � 60 seconds
0.1 � 60 seconds
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
0.1 � 10 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
8DI or 4DI+2DO or None
8DI Module1 or 4DI+2DO Module1or None
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Mode(Hidden if Type = None)
Hold Time(Visible if Mode = Pulse)
Follow Delay(Visible if Type = Follow 1 or Follow 2)
Heater Delay(Visible if Type = Heater)
Type
Mode(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Module Type
Module ID
Input 3-1(Hidden if Module Type = None)
Expansion IO Module 3
110MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Type
Mode(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 orStart3 or Start4)
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,Contactor Feedback2, Test, LogicalInputs, None
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
=____________________
Validation Period(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 orContactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
0.1 � 60 seconds
0.1 � 60 seconds
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
0.1 � 10 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Type
Mode(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,Contactor Feedback2, Test, LogicalInputs, None
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
=____________________
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
0.1 � 60 seconds
0.1 � 60 seconds
=____________________
=____________________
Input 3-3(Hidden if Module Type = None)
Input 3-2(Hidden if Module Type = None)
Table 8-19 (20): DIO settings
111MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Interlock Config(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
0.1 � 10 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Type
Mode(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 orStart3 or Start4)
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,Contactor Feedback2, Test, LogicalInputs, None
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
=____________________
Validation Period(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test
0.1 � 60 seconds
0.1 � 60 seconds
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 toInterlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
0.1 � 10 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Type =____________________
(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Input 3-5(Visible if Module Type = 8DI)
Input 3-4(Hidden if Module Type = None)
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,Contactor Feedback2, Test, LogicalInputs, None
Table 8-19 (21): DIO settings
112MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Mode(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
=____________________
Validation Period(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Interlock Considered for Test(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
0.1 � 60 seconds
0.1 � 60 seconds
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
0.1 � 10 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
Enable or Disable
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Type
Mode(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,Contactor Feedback2, Test, LogicalInputs, None
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
=____________________
Validation Period(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 orContactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
0.1 � 60 seconds
0.1 � 60 seconds
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
0.1 � 10 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Input 3-6(Visible if Module Type = 8DI)
Maintained or Momentary
Table 8-19 (22): DIO settings
113MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Interlock Considered for Test(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Enable or Disable =____________________
Type
Mode(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,Contactor Feedback2, Test, LogicalInputs, None
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
=____________________
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
0.1 � 60 seconds
0.1 � 60 seconds
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
0.1 � 10 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Interlock Considered for Test(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Enable or Disable =____________________
Type
Mode(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or
Start3 or Start4)
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1,Contactor Feedback2, Test, LogicalInputs, None
Maintained or Momentary
=____________________
=____________________
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1
or Contactor Feedback2)
0.1 � 60 seconds =____________________
Input 3-8(Visible if Module Type = 8DI)
Input 3-7(Visible if Module Type = 8DI)
Table 8-19 (23): DIO settings
114MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Contactor Time(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or
Contactor Feedback2)
Interlock Config(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)
Interlock Trip Delay(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
Reset Modes(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)
0.1 � 60 seconds
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
0.1 � 10 seconds
Local, Remote, Communication
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Interlock Considered for Test(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Enable or Disable =____________________
Type
Mode(Hidden if Type = None)
Run, Forward Relay, Reverse Relay,Follow1, Follow2, Alarm, Trip, Main,Star, Delta, Indicator1 to 12, DriveAvailable, Heater, Truth Table o/p 1to Truth Table o/p 16, Timer 1 o/p,Timer 2 o/p, Counter 1 o/p, Counter 2o/p, Signal Conditioner 1 o/p, SignalConditioner 2 o/p, Permissive o/p 1 toPermissive o/p 3, High Speed, LowSpeed, None
=____________________
=____________________Level or Pulse
Hold Time(Visible if Mode = Pulse)
=____________________0.1 � 1000 seconds
Follow Delay(Visible if Type = Follow 1 or Follow 2)
=____________________0.1 � 1000 seconds
Heater Delay(Visible if Type = Heater)
=____________________1 � 3600 seconds
Type
Run, Forward Relay, Reverse Relay,Follow1, Follow2, Alarm, Trip, Main,Star, Delta, Indicator1 to 12, DriveAvailable, Heater, Truth Table o/p 1to Truth Table o/p 16, Timer 1 o/p,Timer 2 o/p, Counter 1 o/p, Counter 2o/p, Signal Conditioner 1 o/p, SignalConditioner 2 o/p, Permissive o/p 1 toPermissive o/p 3, High Speed, LowSpeed, None
=____________________
Output 3-2
(Visible if Module Type = 4DI+2DO)
Output 3-1
(Visible if Module Type = 4DI+2DO)
Table 8-19 (24): DIO settings
115MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Mode(Hidden if Type = None)
=____________________Level or Pulse
Hold Time(Visible if Mode = Pulse)
=____________________0.1 � 1000 seconds
Follow Delay(Visible if Type = Follow 1 or Follow 2)
=____________________0.1 � 1000 seconds
Heater Delay(Visible if Type = Heater)
=____________________1 � 3600 seconds
Parameter Mapping Settings
User configurable as per requirement
(Hidden if Protocol Selection = Profibus in communication settings)
16 words (in case of Modbus serial)32 words (in case of Modbus TCP/IP)
=____________________
COMPlogic Settings
Truth Tables
2I/1O Truth Table 1
Input 1
Input 2
Gate Operation
2I/1O Truth Table 2
Input 1
Input 2
Gate Operation
3I/1O Truth Table 3
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Gate Operation
3I/1O Truth Table 4
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Gate Operation
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, CUSTOM
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, CUSTOM
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, CUSTOM
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, CUSTOM
Parameter mapping
Table 8-19 (25): DIO settings
Table 8-20: Parameter mapping settings
Table 8-21 (1): COMPlogic settings
116MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
3I/1O Truth Table 5
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Gate Operation
3I/1O Truth Table 6
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Gate Operation
3I/1O Truth Table 7
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Gate Operation
3I/1O Truth Table 8
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Gate Operation
3I/1O Truth Table 9
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Gate Operation
3I/1O Truth Table 10
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Gate Operation
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, CUSTOM
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, CUSTOM
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, CUSTOM
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, CUSTOM
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, CUSTOM
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, CUSTOM
Table 8-21 (2): COMPlogic settings
117MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
3I/1O Truth Table 11
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Gate Operation
3I/1O Truth Table 12
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Gate Operation
3I/1O Truth Table 13
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Gate Operation
3I/1O Truth Table 14
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Gate Operation
3I/1O Truth Table 15
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Gate Operation
3I/1O Truth Table 16
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Gate Operation
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, CUSTOM
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, CUSTOM
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, CUSTOM
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, CUSTOM
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, CUSTOM
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, CUSTOM
Table 8-21 (3): COMPlogic settings
118MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
SETTINGS
Signal Conditioners
Signal Conditioner 1
Type
Input
Reset
Signal Conditioner 2
Type
Input
Reset
Counters
Counter 1
Limit
Input Up
Input Down
Reset
Counter 2
Limit
Input Up
Input Down
Reset
Timers
Timer 1
Limit
Type
Input
Reset
Timer 2
Limit
Type
Input
Reset
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
=____________________
Inverting, Non Inverting, Positive EdgeLatch, Negative Edge Latch
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
Inverting, Non Inverting, Positive EdgeLatch, Negative Edge Latch
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
1 � 65535 count
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
1 � 65535 count
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
0 � 65535 seconds
Level Triggered ON timer, Rising Edge
ON timer, Falling Edge OFF timer,
Rising Edge OFF timer
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
0 � 65535 seconds
Level Triggered ON timer, Rising Edge
ON timer, Falling Edge OFF timer,
Rising Edge OFF timer
Freely Programmable
Freely Programmable
Table 8-21 (4): COMPlogic settings
120MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
USER INTERAFCE
Overview
This section provides a detailed description of local interfacing methods available with the Relay. There are two local modes available for a user to interface with the Relay.
� MCOMP Suite Interface.
� Display Interface.
MCOMP Suite Interface
MCOMP Suite is software available with the Relay through which a user can monitor, control or con�gure the Relay, also serves as a strong diagnostic tool for troubleshooting purpose. A PC is required to host this software through which it can communicate with the Relay. The MCOMP Suite can be used only after the installation of .NET Framework 3.5 Service Pack 1 or higher.
With MCOMP Suite, it is possible to:
� monitor and meter the data: Various metering parameters such as 3-Phase Voltage, 3-Phase Current, Frequency, Phase Sequence and parameters related to Power and Energy can be monitored. The status of Digital inputs and outputs can also be monitored.
� program and modify the settings: The software allows a user to set the values as per requirement.
� read actual values: A user can get the actual motor running values.
� read motor status: A user can check the status of motor - run, stop or trip condition.
� read pre-trip & trip cause data and number of event records: A user can get the recent 5 trip records and causes for the trips.
The MCOMP Suite can run in MCOMP of�ine mode as well. In this case, settings may be saved for future use. If the Relay is connected to a computer and communications are enabled, the Relay can be programmed from the setting screens.
Software Pre-requisites:
� Operating System supported is Microsoft Windows XP, Vista and Windows 7.
� Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 or higher
� MCOMP Suite: (in �MCOMP Suite� folder).
Hardware Pre-requisites:
� Minimum memory space required on root drive of hard disk is 1GB.
� Pentium 4 computer with 2GHz speed and 512MB RAM.
� RS485 Converter.
Installation Guide
.NET Framework 3.5 Service Pack installation
After ensuring the minimum requirements indicated earlier, use the following procedure to install the .NET Framework 3.5 Service Pack 1 (If it is not installed, install the framework from the folder 'Framework3.5SP1').
1. Double click on FrmWrk3.5sp1, to get the setup �le Dotnetfx35sp1.exe.Double click on Dotnetfx35sp1.exe to install .NET Framework 3.5 Service Pack 1.
Screenshot - 1
121MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
USER INTERAFCE
2. Read and accept the terms of the license agreement and click on Install button.
3. After accepting the license agreement, Windows will start installing the setup. Status bar shows the progress.
4. When the installation is completed, Windows gives a message .NET Framework 3.5 Sp1 has been installed successfully.
Screenshot - 2
Screenshot - 3
Screenshot - 4
122MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
USER INTERAFCE
Multi-version MCOMP Suite Installation
MCOMP Suite installation can be carried out by using Multi-version MCOMP Suite.
1. Double click on the setup.exe of Multi-version MCOMP Suite.
2. Multi-version MCOMP Suite setup wizard guides the user through the steps required to install Multi-version MCOMP Suite on computer. Press Next button to continue.
3. Select the installation path by pressing Browse button. Press Next button to continue with the setup. (Multi-version MCOMP Suite can install for all users who uses this computer or for self depending on access).
Screenshot - 1
Screenshot - 2 Screenshot - 3
123MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
USER INTERAFCE
4. Con�rm installation: The installer is ready to install the Multi-version MCOMP Suite on your computer. Click on Next to start the installation.
5. After successful installation press Close button to �nish the setup.
MCOMP Suite Installation
Using Multi-version MCOMP Suite user can install MCOMP Suite.
1. Double click on Multi-version MCOMP Suite icon
2. Double click on the above icon to install MCOMP Suite from MCOMP Suite multiversion setup in two ways Manual Selection and Auto Selection:
In case of Manual Selection: Select the MCOMP Firmware Version and click on Install MCOMP Suite option.
In case of Auto Selection user can select the MCOMP version directly by reading MCOMP �rmware version from the Relay and Click on Install MCOMP Suite option.
Screenshot - 4 Screenshot - 5
124MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
USER INTERAFCE
3. Click on Next to start installation.
4. After the installation gets completed, an icon as shown below will be created as a shortcut on the desktop of the computer.
Operation Guide
MCOMP Suite Con�guration
Con�gure the MCOMP Suite to work with the Relay using following steps:
� Double click on the MCOMP Suite short cut icon, the next window will prompt for user ID and password. A three level of access is provided to a particular user depending on the read-write permission. Enter the user id and password.
Table 9 � 1: MCOMP Suite Access shows the available access to login MCOMP Suite.
Admin
Supervisor
User
Sr. No. Login Type
1
2
3
Table 9-1: MCOMP Suite Access
FunctionRead Write
√
√
√
√
√
√
Provided with additional privileges and system data access
No administrative privileges on system data access. User can only change/modify the Relay settings.
Read only mode. User can not change/modify the Relay settings.
Access
125MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
USER INTERAFCE
� After entering the user ID and password, the main (Monitoring) window will appear.
Monitoring Mode
Options
Click on the Options tab to con�gure the communication settings required for the MCOMP Suite. User can select the appropriate COM port, to which the Relay is connected. Other parameters such as Device ID, Baud Rate, Parity and Stop Bits will remain same.
� To connect the MCOMP Suite through the Display, select the check box Connect through Display. The user can also select a theme from the drop down box as per the requirement.
126MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
USER INTERAFCE
Change Password
Click on Change Password tab to change the existing password. In this case user has to enter old password and then set a new password. The MCOMP Suite will validate the old password and stores the new password.
Switch To Con�guration Mode
Click on Switch To Con�guration Mode tab to view the following window.
127MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
USER INTERAFCE
About
Click on About tab to view the version of the MCOMP Suite.
Zoom In
Click on Zoom In tab to zoom in.
Short cuts: [CTRL + +] or use [CTRL + Scroll Mouse Up].
Zoom Out
Click on Zoom Out tab to zoom out the size.
Short cuts: [CTRL + -] or use [CTRL + Scroll Mouse Down].
Zoom to Fit
Click on Zoom to Fit to zoom to normal size.
Short cuts: [CTRL + *] or use [CTRL + Scroll Mouse Button].
Con�g Report
Click on Con�g Report tab to generate a report. A printable report will be saved in an XML format as shown below:
128MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
USER INTERAFCE
The path for the generated report is as shown below:
New User
Click on New User tab to create a new login account.
User
Click on User tab to view list of users. This option allows Administrator/Supervisor to block or unblock a user.
Supervisor
Click on Supervisor tab to view list of supervisors. This option allow administrator to block or unblock a supervisor.
Start Monitoring
Click on Start Monitoring tab to monitor various measurable parameters. If the Relay is connected to PC and the communication is working without any error, then MCOMP Suite will display a system message: MCOMP Online!!!
C:\Program Files\M COMP Suite\M COMP Suit v4.4.1\SETTINGS_20102522_172420.xml
129MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
USER INTERAFCE
Record Viewer
Record Viewer is used to view the trip/event records and starting curve of the motor. The Relay can store last �ve trip and event records.
� The Trip indicator in the MCOMP Suite glows red when the Relay senses trip condition. Click on Trip tab to view trip records. The trip record window shows the details of the last �ve trips along with causes in FIFO (First In First Out) sequence:
- The window shows the trip cause, date and time of occurrence and pre-trip values.
- Click Refresh to retrieve the last stored trip records.
- Click Report to generate a report of trip records with date and time.
- It also maintains the trip counter that counts the number of trips occurred.
Trip Records
Note: On occurrence of an error, the MCOMP Suite will display an error message Error in reading the data from MCOMP. Retry again. Check the connection between MCOMP Suite and the Relay for resolving an error.
130MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
USER INTERAFCE
� The Alarm/Pick-up indicator in the MCOMP Suite glows red when the Relay senses alarm/pick-up condition. Click on Alarm/Pick-Up tab to view event records. The event record window gives the details of last �ve events along with event source in FIFO (First In First Out) sequence.
- This window shows the alarm/pickup source, date and time of occurrence.
- Click Refresh to retrieve the last stored event records.
- Click Report to generate a report of event records with date and time.
Event Records
� Click on Start Curve tab to view the last starting curve stored by the Relay. Press Plot Graph to plot the graph of starting current Vs time. The curve stored can also be compared with the present curve using the Compare Graph option.
- This window shows the alarm/pickup source, date and time of occurrence.
- Click Refresh to retrieve the last stored event records.
- Click Report to generate a report of event records with date and time.
131MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
USER INTERAFCE
Control
Motor Start 1: to start the motor in forward direction.
Motor Start 2: to start the motor in reverse direction.
Trip Reset: to reset the trip condition of the Relay.
Special Commands
The user can send individual commands to the Relay using Special Command option. Special Command is used to check the Relay status and also can used for diagnostic and troubleshooting purpose.
Click on Special Command tab to enter the command terminal. The status bar shows the status of the sent command and action taken.
Note: Control option can be used only when the MCOMP Suite is online.
Memory Dump
Memory Dump option is an administrative command used to create for different system �les of the Relay. Click on Start Dump option to dump the default settings into the Relay and the status bar will show the progress. After completion of memory dump, the MCOMP Suite will give a message as Memory Dump completed. Then close the pop-up window using Close option.
Caution: Memory Dump command is not recommended during normal operation; should be strictly used only under guidance of the manufacturer.
Note: On occurrence of any error if the MCOMP is not connected, then MCOMP Suite will show an error message Error in writing�. Check the connection between MCOMP Suite and the Relay for resolving an error.
132MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
USER INTERAFCE
Con�guration Mode
Click on Switch to Con�guration Mode tab to enter into con�guration mode, the following window appears:
Note: The user can shift to con�guration mode if the Relay is of�ine. In con�guration mode the user can set the
following parameters:
� System settings
� Protection settings
� Communication settings
� IO settings
� Parameter settings
133MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
USER INTERAFCE
Different �le operations can be carried out using following:
Read Selected
This option is used to read selected con�guration �les from the Relay.
1. Click on Read Selected tab to read only the selected con�guration parameters. The MCOMP Suite will prompt the user to save the con�guration or not. Select Yes to save the con�guration else select No.
2. Enter a name to save the con�guration �le in the below window.
3. After saving the con�guration, the MCOMP Suite prompts the user to read the �le. Select Yes option in the pop-up window to read the �le.
4. After completion, the MCOMP will give a message as, All Files read Successfully!!!.
5. If MCOMP Suite is unable to read the �le from MCOMP, it will give an error message as Read failed�
Write Selected
This option is used to write selected con�guration �les into the Relay.
1. Click on Write Selected tab, MCOMP Suite will prompt a warning message as �Online con�guration of MCOMP Relay (when motor is running) is not recommended�. Select OK to proceed or cancel to abort the write operation.
2. MCOMP Suite will prompt to con�rm if the con�guration needs to be saved. Select YES to save the con�guration in case user wants to save the �le.
134MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
USER INTERAFCE
3. Enter a name to save the con�guration �le and click Save.
4. After saving the con�guration, MCOMP Suite will prompt for con�rmation to write the �le. Select Yes to write the con�guration else select NO.
5. After completion, the MCOMP will give a message as, File Write Successful!!
6. If MCOMP Suite is unable to write the �le to MCOMP, it will give an error message as Failed to write �le�.
Read All
This option can be used to read all the con�guration �les from the Relay. Operation philosophy is the same as of Read Selected �le menu. After read completion, the MCOMP will give a message as, All Files read Successfully!!!.
Write All
This option can be used to write all the con�guration �les into the Relay. Operation philosophy is the same as of Write Selected �le menu. After write completion, the MCOMP will give a message as, All Setting Files written Successful!!!.
Note: It is strictly recommended to perform �read all� operation before writing any
settings into the MCOMP relay.
New File
New File is used to save all the parameters into a new con�guration �le.
Save File
Save File is used to save the �le into the current con�guration �le (if the �le exists).
Open File
Open File is used to open and load the �le from existing con�guration �le into M COMP Suite.
135MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
USER INTERAFCE
Con�guring System Settings
System settings determine the starting method and general motor characteristics. The following settings are available under system settings:
Click on System Settings tab to view the available setting using MCOMP Suite:
To navigate to the motor Settings, follow the path shown below:
SystemSettings
MotorSettings
Set value for particularparameter
Write All/ WriteSelected
The motor setting window displays all the available parameter settings. Some of them are shown below:
136MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
USER INTERAFCE
To navigate to the Starter Settings, follow the path shown below:
SystemSettings
StarterSettings
Set Type, mode ofparameter
Write All/ WriteSelected
The starter setting window displays all the available parameter settings:
Con�guring Protection Settings
Protection Settings allow the user to set different alarm/pick-up values and con�guration time delays for each protection provided in the Relay.
Click on Protection Setting tab to view the following window:
Note: Follow the same procedure for other system settings.
137MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
USER INTERAFCE
To navigate to the Earth Fault Settings, follow the path shown below:
ProtectionSettings
EarthFault
Set pick-up, alarm/trip,delay as required
Write All / WriteSelected
The earth fault window displays all the available parameter settings.
Con�guring Communication Settings
Communication Settings allow the user to set the parameters for Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP/IP and Pro�bus Communication protocol. The communication settings available in the Relay will
be displayed according to its hardware.
Click on Communication Settings tab to view the following window:
Note: Follow the same procedure for other system settings.
Modbus Settings:
To navigate to the Modbus Settings, follow the path shown below:
CommunicationSettings
Modbus/Pro�bus/Ethernet selection
Set requiredvalues
Write All / WriteSelected
Note: Protocol selection is possible only in Admin mode.
138MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
USER INTERAFCE
The Modbus setting window displays all the available settings.
Pro�bus DP Settings:
To navigate to the Pro�bus Settings, follow the path shown below:
The pro�bus setting window displays all the available settings.
Modbus TCP/IP Settings:
To navigate to the Pro�bus Settings, follow the path shown below:
The Modbus TCP/IP setting window displays all the available settings.
CommunicationSettings
Modbus/Pro�bus/Ethernet selection
Set requirednode address
Write All / WriteSelected
CommunicationSettings
Modbus/Pro�bus/Ethernet selection
Set requiredvalues Selected Write All / Write
Note: In case of Time synchronization using SNTP, enter correct SNTP address and time zone.
139MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
USER INTERAFCE
Con�guring IO Settings
IO settings allow the user to con�gure the basic, expansion digital Inputs/ digital outputs and analog outputs as applicable.
Click on IO Settings tab to view following window:
Click on IO Settings option to view all available DIOs and Analog output available in the basic Relay.
140MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
USER INTERAFCE
To navigate to the Digital Input Settings, follow the path shown below:
IOSettings
Select DigitalInput as required
Set requiredparameters
Write All / WriteSelected
The Digital Input window displays all the available settings.
If selected input is interlock, select interlock con�guration as shown in the following screen.
To navigate to the Digital Output Settings, follow the path shown below:
IOSettings
Select DigitalOutput as required
Set requiredparameters
Write All / WriteSelected
Note : Follow the same procedure for other Digital Inputs.User can not assign one Type to two digital inputs.
The Digital Output window displays all the available settings.
141MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
USER INTERAFCE
To navigate to the Analog Output Settings, follow the path shown below:
The Analog Output window displays all the available settings
To navigate to the External IO Settings, follow the path shown below:
Click on External DIO Module number and ID option and select Module Type. Below screen shows all available settings.
IOSettings
Select AnalogOutput
Set requiredparameters
Write All / WriteSelected
IOSettings
Select requiredexternal IO module
Set requiredparameters
Write All / WriteSelected
Note: Follow the same procedure for other expansion IO modules.
Note: Follow the same procedure for other Digital Outputs.If the output is selected as HEATER, select the heater delay time in seconds.
142MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
USER INTERAFCE
Con�guring Parameter Mapping
Parameter Mapping allows the user to select parameters and store them in a contiguous Fast scan Register. In case of Modbus RTU, the fast scan register stores up to 16 words and for Modbus TCP/IP up to 32 words.
To navigate to the Parameter Mapping Settings, follow the path shown below:
ParameterMapping
Selectparameter
Add/removeparameter
Write All / WriteSelected
Click on Parameter Mapping tab to view all available parameter mapping option.
Note: Memory Map Option is used only when communication protocol select is as Modbus RTU or Modbus TCP/IP.
143MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
USER INTERAFCE
Con�guring COMPlogic
Click on COMPlogic tab to view all available COMPlogic modules.
To navigate to the 3I/1O Truth Table, follow the path shown below:
COMPlogicSettings
3I/1Otruth table
Select I/Pparameter
SelectGates
Write All / WriteSelected
Click on 3I/1O Truth Table tab to view all available setting options.
Note: Follow the same procedure for all COMPlogic modules.
144MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
USER INTERAFCE
Display Interface
The Display is used an operator interface to view/edit the Relay settings and can also be used for metering, monitoring and control of the Relay. The Display acts as a mediator between the Relay and the MCOMP Suite on PC with the help of USB cable. Figure 9-1 : Display shows the Display and Table 9�2 shows the Display element description. For Display overview and connection details refer Installation chapter.
Figure 9-1: Display
Table 9-2: Display Element Description
Label
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Function
Green when the Display is powered ON and red when it is fetching/processing datafrom/to the Relay.
Same as Drive Status LED of the Relay.
Same as Alarm/Pickup LED of the Relay.
Same as Trip LED of the Relay.
Resets the Trip status of the Relay.
Move into the previous level within a menu or a function.
Move into the next level within a menu or a function.
Connect to a PC for configuring the Relay through the MCOMP Suite.
Move the menu, Setting value increase/decrease.
OLED Display for monitoring the readings, viewing settings and records.
Element
Communication/ Power LED
Drive Status LED
Alarm/Pickup LED
Trip LED
Reset Key
Return Key
Enter Key
USB front port
Navigation Keys
OLED Display
Operation Guide
Power on the Display as discussed in Installation chapter.
After Power On, the following screen appears with PWR/COMM LED showing green color.
When the Display is not connected to the Relay then it will continue to show the above screen. When communication is
Ver X.XX
healthy between the Display and the Relay then following screen will appear. It is the default screen of the Display.
Ir : 0.0A
Iy : 0.0A
Ib : 0.0A
Iavg : 0.0A
Note: The values of measurement shown in the above screen are for representational purpose only. The Display will show the actual values measured by the Relay.
145MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
USER INTERAFCE
Press ENT key to get Menu screen shown below. It has six icons. User can navigate to the desired icon by using UP/DOWN keys.
Metering: View all meteringparameters.
Settings: View / Edit all settingparameters.
View Record: View details of tripand event records.
Commands: Issue commands tothe Relay.
Display: Change Display relatedsettings like contrast, language etc,.
Connect To PC: The Display entersin the PC connection mode whereuser can configure the Relay withthe MCOMP Suite through theDisplay.
Icon Description
Metering
To view metering parameters, select METERING icon from the icon screen using the navigation arrow keys.
Press ENT key to view Metering parameters. Press UP/DOWN navigation key for viewing various metering parameters.
Metering
Ir
Iy
Ib
: 0.0A
: 0.0A
: 0.0A
Parameter
Line current values
Earth fault current
Percentage Current-Unbalance
Average current value
Line, Phase voltage values
Average voltage value
Frequency
All types of total power consumption
Active Energy
Power Factor
CM Type
Thermal Capacity Level
PTC Resistance
Phase sequence
Motor starting time
Temperature
No of stops
Motor run hrs
Total Motor Run hrs
Starting Peak Current
Digital Input/Output Status
Ir, Iy, Ib
Io% IUB
Iavg
Vry, Vyb, Vbr, Vr, Vy, Vb
Vavg
Freq
kW, KVAr, KVA
KWh
PF
CM Type
TherC
PTC Res
PhSeq
Tstart
Temp
No Stps
Hr Run
T Hr Run
StrPkI
Digital I/O
Notation on the Display
Table 9�4 lists all parameters notation displayed in metering screen:
Table 9-4 : Display metering Notations
Table 9-3: Display icon description
Metering
Metering
146MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
USER INTERAFCE
Settings
To view/edit settings of the Relay, select Settings icon in the menu screen.
The Display settings can be viewed in edit able mode or non-edit able mode. If the user presses ENT key on menu screen after selecting Settings icon, the Display will prompt to select the mode. The Display shows two options as follows:
In Edit mode, user can edit or change the setting parameters and apply the same in the Relay. In View mode, user can only view the setting parameters currently stored in the Relay.
On the selection of Edit mode, the Display will prompt for a four digit password for authenticity. Valid password range is from 0000 to 9999.
To enter password, use UP/DOWN arrow to select the digit. Press ENT key to save the current digit and to move to the next digit. Repeat the same procedure for other digits.
Once the correct password is entered, Settings screen will be displayed as shown below:
The Settings screen consists of four con�guration �les, which can be viewed and/or edited.
1. System
2. Protection
3. Digital I/O
4. Communication
Settings
Edit
View
PASSWORD
X X X X
Settings
System
Protection
Digital I/O
System Settings
Select System from the Settings menu and press ENT key to enter in to system settings.
To set the each system setting parameter, follow the procedure given in Relay Con�guration through the Display.
Protection Settings
Select Protection from the Settings menu and press ENT key.
The list of Protections will be displayed. Use UP/DOWN arrow keys to navigate to all other Protections.
Select the required parameter by pressing UP/DOWN key and press ENT key to change the settings.
Press ENT key to enter the Overload Settings.
To set the each protection parameter, follow the procedure given in Relay Con�guration through the Display.
Settings
Full load Current
Motor Voltage
Auxiliary Supply
Settings
System
Protection
Digital I/O
Protection
Overload
Locked Rotor
Phase Reversal
Overload
Iset
Al Set
ThMem
: 100.0% I�c
: 95.0% Tm
: Enable
Settings
147MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
USER INTERAFCE
To set communication parameters, follow the procedure given in Relay Con�guration through the Display.
View Records
To view trip/event records of the Relay, select View Records icon by navigating in the main menu screen using up/down arrows.
Press ENT key to enter into records screen. User can view two types of records:
Trip records
At any given time, maximum �ve Trip records can be stored in First In First Out (FIFO) sequence. Press ENT key to view trip records.
Following parameters are available in Trip records:
� Trip cause
� Date
� Time
� Currents (Ir, Iy, IB, Ie)
� Voltages (Vr, Vy, Vb)
� Frequency
� Temperature
� PTC resistance
Use UP/DOWN arrow keys to navigate to the Trip Record 1. Press ENT key to see trip records. Press UP/DOWN key to see all trip record parameters.
VIEW RECORDS
Digital I/O Settings
Select Digital I/O from the settings menu and press ENT key.
Press ENT key to con�gure respective Digital I/O and analog output.
Select the required input by pressing UP/DOWN key and press ENT key to con�gure the settings.
To set any digital input/output and analog output, follow the procedure given in Relay Con�guration through the Display.
Communication Settings
Select Communication from the settings menu and press ENT key.
Press ENT key to con�gure respective communication protocol depending on the Relay hardware con�guration.
Modbus communication settings:
Note: Type �eld is not editable through the Display and it is �xed as per hardware con�guration.
Settings
System
Protection
Digital I/O
Digital I/O
Digital I/P1
Digital I/P2
Digital I/P3
Digital I/P 1
Type
T Valid
: None
: 0.10 Sec
Settings
Protection
Digital I/O
Communication
Communication
Type
Mode
Node
: Modbus
: RTU
: 1
View Records
Trip
Event
Trip
Trip Counter
Trip Record 1
Trip Record 2
148MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
USER INTERAFCE
Event Records
At any given time, maximum �ve Event records can be stored in First In First Out (FIFO) sequence. Press ENT key to view event records.
Following parameters are available in Event records:
� Event source (alarm or pickup)
� Date
� Time
� Event cause
Use UP/DOWN arrow keys to navigate to the Event Record 1. Press ENT key to see trip records. Press UP/DOWN key to see all event record parameters.
Commands
Commands can be sent to the Relay from the Commands menu
of the Display. Select COMMANDS icon to from main Menu screen and press ENT key to enter in to command menu.
After pressing ENT key, the Display will prompt for password. Enter the valid password to access various commands. For procedure to enter password refer Relay Con�guration through the Display in Settings chapter.
Press ENT key to view Commands. Press UP/DOWN keys for other commands.
Select the command to be given to the Relay and press ENT key to send command to the Relay. A message saying CMD SENT will be displayed on successful operation.
Display Settings
Select the Display icon on the main menu screen to change the Display settings and press ENT key to enter into Display menu.
Press ENT key to edit the Display parameters.
COMMANDS
Note: Follow the same procedure for other Trip records.
Note that Trip records will only be displayed if Trip counter is not zero. If Trip record value is say one, then only one record will be displayed on screen and maximum of �ve records can be viewed from the Display even Trip counter value greater than �ve.
Follow the same procedure for other Event records.
Note that Trip records will only be displayed if event counter is not zero. If event record value is say one, then only one record will be displayed on screen and maximum of �ve records can be viewed from the Display even event counter value greater than �ve.
Trip Record 1
11/11/2010
11:55:10:600
Ir : 10.0A
Event
Event Counter
Event Counter 1
Event Counter 2
Event Record 1
Fault : PickUp
11/11/2010
11:55:10:600
Display
Language
Logo Display
Contrast Value
Commands
Motor Start 2
Motor Stop
MCOMP Reset
CMD Sent
Commands
Motor Start 2
Motor Stop
MCOMP Reset
DISPLAY
149MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
USER INTERAFCE
The Display setting consists of �ve parameters, which can be viewed and/or edited:
� Language
� Logo display
� Contrast value
� Power save
� Rolling display
Connect to PC
In this mode, the Relay can be connected to the MCOMP Suite through USB port of the Display.
To enter in this mode, connect USB cable from front port available on the Display to computer's USB port.
Select the CONNECT TO PC icon on the main menu screen and press ENT key to enter in to Connect to PC menu.
Press ENT key, the Display will prompt for con�rmation as shown below.
Press ENT key to select YES and to enter into PC mode. The following screen will appear once the Display is connected to computer.
Press return key to end this mode, the Display will prompt for con�rmation as follows:
Select YES to end the PC mode.
CONNECT TO PC ?
YES
NO
Con�g Mode
Disconnect ?
YES
NO
CONNECT TO PC
151MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
TESTING & TROUBLESHOOTING
Overview
This section allows the user to acknowledge and troubleshoot any problems encountered during testing and commissioning of the Relay.
A complete functional check and calibration has been performed for each unit before it is shipped to ensure that the relay is fully functional. For testing and troubleshooting the relay at site, the reference data provided herein helps the user to check if the relay is functioning as per the desired speci�cation and is properly connected in the motor feeder for the control inputs and outputs.
Testing
The procedure described in this section helps the user to enter settings into the relay, verify the relay connection and tests the functional behavior of the relay. It is not necessary to test every function of the relay to verify the relay�s behavior. Brief functional tests ensure that the relay is operational as per the settings done in the relay.
Connection Setup Requirement
Apart from the relay main unit, CM unit and connecting cables, the 3 phase power source like Omicron, Freza, Doble is required to test the relay.
Metering testing
Phase current and voltage:
Connect the MCOMP CM unit with the base unit with the pre-fabricated CM cable provided with the current module unit. Pass R-Y-B phase current cables of current source i.e. testing kit through the R-Y-B pass through holes of MCOMP current module opening and short them with neutral of the test kit. Wire 3 phase voltages with neutral to the voltage terminal present on the MCOMP base unit (assuming it is 3P-4W system).
For balanced system, set the equal magnitude of all the 3 phases (current and voltage) with balanced angles in the test kit & apply to the relay making balanced system. The applied values should be greater than 10% of the set IFLC and VN values. Observe the current and voltage magnitude & compare with the expected metering by taking CT/PT ratio into consideration (if enabled). Earth fault current, Current Unbalance in metering should be zero.
For unbalance system, set the different magnitude & angles for the all the 3 phases (current and voltage) in the test kit & apply to the relay making the system unbalanced. Observe the current and voltage magnitude of all phases and compare with the expected metering by taking CT/PT ratio into consideration (if enabled).
Power, Energy & Power factor:
a. Connect both current as well as voltage source to the relay.
b. Set the magnitude of the voltage and current as per the requirement of the system.
c. Observe the Active, Reactive and Apparent Power/Energy metering values with the expected values by taking CT & PT ratio into consideration.
d. Observe Power factor & compare with the expected result.
Protection Testing
The protection testing of the relay can be performed on the same setup used for metering testing. The basic protection elements needs to be enabled and set as per the requirement and after injecting the proper values, the protection tripping can be checked. The drive status should be as running status for the relay to give the protection trip command after detecting the fault. Below example shows the protection testing in case of thermal overload.
Table 10-1: Thermal Overload Protection testing
Settings Expected ResultApplied Input
IFLC = 1A ( set as per CM type)
ISET = 100% IFLC
Trip class = 10
Trip in 10.4 secInject the current
IR, IY, IB = 6 A
IFLC = 1A ( set as per CM type)
ISET = 100% IFLC
Trip class = 10
Trip in 42.6 secInject the current
IR, IY, IB = 3 A
Observed Result
152MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
TESTING & TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 10-1: Thermal Overload Protection testing
Table 10-2 (1): Troubleshooting conditions
Problem
Motor notstarting due toInhibit condition.
DiagnosisPossible Causes
If any DI configured as STOPis low.
If any DI configured as INTERLOCK STOP is low.
Thermal Capacity is beyondthe set threshold limit.
Unhealthy 3-phase voltage(if Voltage Connection is enabled).
Motor is in trip condition.
Maximum number of startsexceeds the set permissive limitwithin the set reference period.
Check Inhibit Status through Special commands in MCOMPSuite or Commands in the Display menu.
Make the system healthy by removing the Inhibit condition(s).The relay will not allow to start the motor if inhibit conditionis present. If the motor has been started externally, the relaywill not protect the motor as it is in inhibit condition.
Motor is inhealthy condition(No Inhibit) butnot starting.
The Start Matrix is configuredimproperly in Starter Settings.
Improper DO configuration.
Check Modes of Starting Matrix in Starter Settings using theMCOMP Suite or the Display.
Check DO configuration in IO Settings as per Starter Settings.For DOL - ensure RUN output selection.For RDOL - ensure FORWARD RELAY and REVERSE RELAY selection.For STAR-DELTA - ensure STAR, DELTA and MAIN selection.
Motor is stopping.
If any DI configured asSTOP is low.
If any DI configured asCONTACTOR FEEDBACK is low.
If any DI configured asMAINTAINED START is low.
If any DI configured asINTERLOCK STOP is low.
If Current Auto Stop is enabledand all 3-phase currents are lessthan 10%.
Check the cause for the motor stop through special commandsin the MCOMP Suite or commands in the Display menu.
Check physical wiring.
Ensure that the contactor is picking up.
Set sufficient validation time for the DI in IO settings.
The Relay doesnot measure/display accuratevalues of voltagesand currents.
Full load current setting is notas per the range of the RelayCM type.
3-phase system selection isimproper.
Wiring error.
Incompatibility between the Relayand Display firmware.
Ensure if proper CM type is connected and verify if the CMtype is displayed in Monitoring mode of the MCOMP Suite orMetering menu in the Display. Set proper Full load current (IFLC)and rated voltage in system settings as per the motor rating.
Check for 3-phase 3-wire or 3- phase 4-wire system selection insystem settings.
Check wiring and connection as per the drawing schematics.
Consult the Relay manufacturer.
153MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
TESTING & TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem DiagnosisPossible Causes
The Relay is notresponding to afault.
Improper test source settings.(in case of manual testing ofthe Relay)
Improper wiring.
Ensure the alarm and trip selection is done in the ProtectionSettings for the required fault.
Ensure proper settings in the test source. Also, verify if currentinjection is as per the CM range.
Check the wiring and connections.
The Relay is notbehaving as pernew settings.
New settings are not saved.
Ensure if new settings are saved.
If settings are done through the Display or through theMCOMP Suite (in supervisor or user mode), ensure that theRelay is power recycled after saving the settings.
Special Commands
Table 10�3 shows a list of Special Commands.
Table 10-3: Special Commands
Sr No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Description
Shows whether the Relay is connected to the MCOMP Suite or not.
Shows the status for running motor, trip, inhibit, etc,.
Shows the status of EEPROM for read operation.
Shows the status of EEPROM for write operation.
Shows the status of setting files and internal file systems.
Used to store the last starting curve, so as to compare the plots in the future.
Shows all possible active causes of inhibit status.
Shows all possible active causes for motor stop.
Shows the time setting present in the Relay
Sets the PC date and time in to the Relay
Clears the thermal content stored in the Relay
Clears all the Energy values stored in the Relay
Clears number of starts stored in the Relay
Clears number of stops stored in the Relay
Clears number of trips stored in the Relay
Clears number of events stored in the Relay
Clears the motor run hours value stored in the Relay
Clears the Total motor run hours value stored in the Relay
Commands
Plug in check
MCOMP Status
Status of EEPROM read
Status of EEPROM Write
Status of the MCOMP file system
Capture starting curve
Inhibit Status
Motor stop cause
Read time from MCOMP
Write PC time to MCOMP
Clear Thermal memory
Clear Energy values
Reset Number Start Command
Reset Number Stops Command
Reset Trip Counter Command
Reset Event Record Counter Command
Reset Motor Run Hours Command
Reset Total Motor Run Hours Command
Table 10-2 (2): Troubleshooting conditions
154MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
TESTING & TROUBLESHOOTING
Inhibit Status
Table 10�4 shows a list of all possible inhibit causes shown by the Relay.
Table 10-4: Inhibit Status
Sr No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Description
The Relay senses voltage in all 3-phases < 10%.
The Relay senses an under-voltage pick-up condition.
The Relay is in trip mode.
Thermal capacity > Set threshold limit.
No. of starts > Set permissible limit in the set reference period.
DI configured as STOP is low.
DI configured as INTERLOCK STOP is low.
Stop from communication is high
Commands
No Voltage
Under Voltage
Trip
Thermal Capacity
Max. No. of starts
No Stop Input
Interlock 1
Interlock 2
Interlock 3
Interlock 4
Interlock 5
Interlock 6
Interlock 7
Interlock 8
Interlock 9
Interlock 10
Interlock 11
Interlock 12
Communication Stop
Motor Stop Cause
Table 10�5 shows a list of all possible Motor stop causes shownby the Relay.
Table 10-5 (1): Motor Stop Cause
Sr No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Commands
Motor stopped through trip.
Motor stopped through the HMI/Display stop command.
Motor stopped through the digital input: Stop.
Motor stopped through the Digital Input: EStop.
Motor stopped through the communication stop command.
Motor stopped through the Interlock 1 configured as Stop.
Motor stopped through the Interlock 2 configured as Stop.
Motor stopped through the Interlock 3 configured as Stop.
Motor stopped through the Interlock 4 configured as Stop.
Motor stopped through the Interlock 5 configured as Stop.
Motor stopped through the Interlock 6 configured as Stop.
Motor stopped through the Interlock 7 configured as Stop.
Motor stopped through the Interlock 8 configured as Stop.
155MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
TESTING & TROUBLESHOOTING
Sr No.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Commands
Motor stopped through the Interlock 9 configured as Stop.
Motor stopped through the Interlock 10 configured as Stop.
Motor stopped through the Interlock 11 configured as Stop.
Motor stopped through the Interlock 12 configured as Stop.
Motor stopped through the Contactor Feedback 1 input.
Motor stopped through Contactor Feedback 2 input.
Motor stopped through the Auto Stop by no voltage.
Motor stopped through the Auto Stop by no current.
Motor stopped as Start1 DI not maintained.
Motor stopped as Start2 DI not maintained.
Motor stopped as Start3 DI not maintained.
Motor stopped as Start4 DI not maintained.
Table 10-5 (2): Motor Stop Cause
157MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
ANNEXURE A - MEMORY MAPS
Overview
The Relay supports three communication protocols as Modbus serial, Pro�bus DP and Modbus over TCP/IP. The memory map for all these communication protocols is described below.
A] Modbus RTU Memory Map
Modbus RTU memory map enlists all the metering parameters,
trip & event record parameters, DI/DO status and coil status. Function codes for different registers are also mentioned in the memory map. The Modbus RTU memory map shows the addresses for slow scan parameters. The addresses for fast scan parameters will range from 30001 to 30016 and cannot be changed. Different parameters can be con�gured as fast scan parameters at these addresses through MCOMP Suite.
Table A-1 (1): Modbus Memory Map
Settings
R Phase Current
Y Phase Current
B Phase Current
ModbusAddress
31001
31002
31003
Range of data
Min Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)
0
0
0
60000
60000
60000
0.1
0.1
0.1
Unit
A
A
A
Sizein
Bytes
2
2
2
Notes
SF=0.001 for IFLC < 4ASF=0.01 for IFLC < 20ASF=0.1 for IFLC > 20A
Input Register (Function code : 0x04)
Metering Data
Instantaneous RMS Current
Type: Vector Sum==============
SF = 1 for IFLC ��4 ASF = 10 for IFLC ��20 A
SF = 100 for IFLC ��80 ASF = 1000 for IFLC > 80 A
Type: CBCT==============
SF = 1
Earth Current 31004 0 60000 0.1 A 2
R Phase Current
Y Phase Current
B Phase Current
31005
31006
31007
0
0
0
60000
60000
60000
0.1
0.1
0.1
A
A
A
2
2
2
SF=0.001 for IFLC < 4ASF=0.01 for IFLC < 20ASF=0.1 for IFLC > 20A
One Second RMS Average Current
Type: Vector Sum==============
SF = 1 for IFLC ��4 ASF = 10 for IFLC ��20 A
SF = 100 for IFLC ��80 ASF = 1000 for IFLC > 80 A
Type: CBCT==============
SF = 1
Earth Current 31008 0 60000 1 mA 2
SF = 0.001 for IFLC ��4 ASF = 0.01 for IFLC ��20 ASF = 0.1 for IFLC > 20 A
Average RMSPhase Current
31009 0 60000 1 mA 2
R Phase Current
Y Phase Current
31010
31011
0
0
3500
3500
0.1
0.1
V
V
2
2
Instantaneous RMS Phase Voltage
-
-
158MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Settings ModbusAddress
Range of data
Min Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Sizein
BytesNotes
B Phase Current 31012 0 3500 0.1 V 2 -
R-Y Line Voltage
Y-B Line Voltage
B-R Line Voltage
31013
31014
31015
0
0
0
6500
6500
6500
0.1
0.1
0.1
V
V
V
2
2
2
Line Voltage
-
-
-
R Phase Voltage
Y Phase Voltage
B Phase Voltage
Average RMSPhase Voltage
31016
31017
31018
31019
0
0
0
0
3500
3500
3500
3500
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
V
V
V
V
2
2
2
2
One Second RMS Average Voltage
-
-
-
-
R PhaseActive Power
31020
Phase wise Active Power
0 W 41210000000MSW = 31021LSW = 31020
Y PhaseActive Power
31022 0 W 41210000000MSW = 31023LSW = 31022
B PhaseActive Power
31024 0 W 41210000000MSW = 31025LSW = 31024
R PhaseReactive Power
31026
Phase wise Reactive Power
0 41210000000MSW = 31027LSW = 31026
Y PhaseReactive Power
31028 0 41210000000MSW = 31029LSW = 31028
B PhaseReactive Power
31030 0 VAR 41210000000MSW = 31031LSW = 31030
R PhaseApparent Power
31032
Phase wise Apparent Power
0 VA 41210000000MSW = 31033LSW = 31032
Y PhaseApparent Power
31034 0 VA 41210000000MSW = 31035LSW = 31034
B PhaseApparent Power
31036 0 VA 41210000000MSW = 31037LSW = 31036
VAR
VAR
Table A-1 (2): Modbus Memory Map
Total ActivePower
31038
Total Power
0 W 41210000000MSW = 31039LSW = 31038
Total ReactivePower
31040 0 VAR 41210000000MSW = 31041LSW = 31040
Total ApparentPower
31042 0 VA 41210000000MSW = 31043LSW = 31042
159MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Settings ModbusAddress
Range of data
Min Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Sizein
BytesNotes
Total ActiveEnergy
31044
Energy
0 Wh 81/36001.65564E+17MSW = 31039LSW = 31038
Total ReactiveEnergy
31048 0 VARh 81/36001.65564E+17MSW = 31041LSW = 31040
Total ApparentEnergy
31052 0 VAh 81/36001.65564E+17MSW = 31043LSW = 31042
Phase Sequence 31056
Other Data
0 - 2-1
Value = 0 for 1-2-3(R-Y-B)
Value = 1 for 1-3-2(R-B-Y)
Temperature 31057 0 0C 20.12000 -
Frequency 31059 0 Hz 20.11000 -
Starting Time 31059 0 Sec 20.110000 -
31060 0 A 20.160000 -Starting PeakCurrent
31061 0 % 40.110000MSW = 31062LSW = 31061
ThermalCapacity
0 = CM TYPE 11 = CM TYPE 22 = CM TYPE 33 = CM TYPE 44 = CM TYPE 5
5 = INTERNAL CM
031063 5CM Detect
Number1 - 2
Reserved 31064 0 20.0011000 --
Motor Operation
31068 0 - 414294967296MSW = 31069LSW = 31068
Number OfStarts
31070 0 Minutes 21/6065535 -Number OfHours Motor Run
31071 0 Minutes 41/604294967296MSW = 31072LSW = 31071
Total Number OfHours Motor Run
31073 0 A 20.160000 -Last Start Amps
31074 0 - 414294967296MSW = 31075LSW = 31074
Number Of Stops
Table A-1 (3): Modbus Memory Map
31076.0 0 - --1Value = 0 for low inputValue = 1 for high input
Digital Input 1Status
DI Status 31076 2
31076.1 0 1Value = 0 for low inputValue = 1 for high input
Digital Input 2Status
- --
31076.2 0 1Value = 0 for low inputValue = 1 for high input
Digital Input 3Status
- --
160MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
31076.3 0 1Value = 0 for low inputValue = 1 for high input
Digital Input 4Status
31076.4 0 1Value = 0 for low inputValue = 1 for high input
Digital Input 5Status
31076.5 0 1Value = 0 for low inputValue = 1 for high input
Digital Input 6Status
Settings ModbusAddress
Range of data
Min Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Sizein
BytesNotes
- --
- --
- --
31076.6To
31076.15Reserved - --- Reserved-
31077.0 0 - --1Value = 0 for low OutputValue = 1 for high Output
Digital Output 1Status
DO Status 31077 2
31077.1 0 1Value = 0 for low OutputValue = 1 for high Output
Digital Output 2Status
31077.2 0 1Value = 0 for low OutputValue = 1 for high Output
Digital Output 3Status
31077.3 0 1Value = 0 for low OutputValue = 1 for high Output
Digital Output 4Status
- --
- --
- --
31077.4To
31077.15Reserved - --- Reserved-
31078.0,31078.1
0 - --3
0 = RTD Protection Enabled1 = PTC Protection Enabled
2 = Both RTD & PTCProtections disabled
Temp. SensorType
Flags 31078 2
0 10 = 3Ph-4W System1 = 3Ph-3W System
System selection 31078.2
0 10 = Voltage Connect Disabled1 = Voltage Connect Enabled
Voltage Connect Flag 31078.3
0 10 -
- --
- --
% 20.131079% Current Unbalance
Table A-1 (4): Modbus Memory Map
31080.0 0 - --11 = Start command from
Contactor A0 = Motor Off (Not running)
Contactor A
Logic Status 31080 2
31080.2 0 11 = Remote0 = Local
Local/Remote - --
31080.3 0 11 = DCS Start Available
0 = DCS Start NOT AvailableDCS StartAvailable
- --
31080.4 0 11 = Drive Available
0 = Drive NOT AvailableDrive StartAvailable
- --
31080.1 0 - --11 = Start command from
Contactor B0 = Motor Off (Not running)
Contactor B
161MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Settings ModbusAddress
Range of data
Min Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Sizein
BytesNotes
31080.5 0 11 = Drive Running
0 = Drive NOT RunningDrive Running - --
31080.6Alarm - --11 = Alarm
0 = No Alarm0
31080.7 0 11 = Fault (Trip)
0 = No Fault (Trip)Fault - --
31080.8to
31080.15
0 1 -RESERVED - --
31081 - - -Watchdog Register - --
32000Trip Records
Trip Record � 1
32001 0 - 4-1048575MSW = 32002LSW = 32001
Refer Trip Record TableTrip Cause
32003 0 65535 Refer Trip Record TableDate Format - 2-
32004 0 - 4-134217727MSW = 32005LSW = 32004
Refer Trip Record TableTime Format
32006 0 60000R Phase Current A 20.1
32007 0 60000 A 2
32008 0 60000 A 2
Y Phase Current
B Phase Current
0.1
0.1
SF = 0.001 for IFLC <�4 ASF = 0.01 for IFLC <�20 ASF = 0.1 for IFLC > 20 A
Type: Vector Sum==============SF = 1 for IFLC <�4 A
SF = 10 for IFLC <�20 ASF = 100 for IFLC <�80 ASF = 1000 for IFLC > 80 A
Type: CBCT==============
SF = 1
EF Current 32009 0 60000 1 mA 2
Table A-1 (5): Modbus Memory Map
32010 0 3500R Phase Voltage V 20.1
32011 0 3500 V 2
32012 0 3500 V 2
Y Phase Voltage
B Phase Voltage
0.1
0.1
-
-
-
32013 0 1000 Hz 2Frequency 0.1 -
32014
0 2000 0C
2
RTD Temperature 0.1
If RTD temperature is enabled,Temperature parameter holds
temperature in Degree Celsius.
If PTC temperature protectionis enabled, Temperatureparameter hold PTC Trip
Resistance in ohms
PTC Resistance 0 2000 1 Ω
162MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Settings ModbusAddress
Range of data
Min Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Sizein
BytesNotes
32015 0 1000 - 2Power Factor 0.001 -
32016 10 1000 - 2Current Scale Factor 1SF = 0.001 for IFLC <�4 ASF = 0.01 for IFLC <�20 ASF = 0.1 for IFLC > 20 A
Type: Vector Sum==============SF = 1 for IFLC <�4 A
SF = 10 for IFLC <�20 ASF = 100 for IFLC <�80 ASF = 1000 for IFLC > 80 A
Type: CBCT==============
SF = 1
Earth CurrentScale Factor
32017 1 1000 1 - 2
0 = RTD TemperatureProtection
1 = PTC TemperatureProtection
2 = RTD & PTCTemperature Protection
Disabled
Temp. SensorType
32018.0
32018.10 2 - -
32018.2 0 10 = 3Ph-4W System0 = 3Ph-3W System
SystemSelection flag
-
2
-
32018.3 0 1 -Voltage Connect
Flag -0 = Voltage Connect
Disabled1 = Voltage Connect
Enabled
Table A-1 (6): Modbus Memory Map
Trip Record � 2
32019 0 - 4-1048575MSW = 32020LSW = 32019
Refer Trip Record TableTrip Cause
32021 0 65535 Refer Trip Record TableDate Format - 2-
32022 0 - 4-134217727MSW = 32023LSW = 32022
Refer Trip Record TableTime Format
32024 0 60000R Phase Current A 20.1
32025 0 60000 A 2
32026 0 60000 A 2
Y Phase Current
B Phase Current
0.1
0.1
SF = 0.001 for IFLC <�4 ASF = 0.01 for IFLC <�20 ASF = 0.1 for IFLC > 20 A
Type: Vector Sum==============SF = 1 for IFLC <�4 A
SF = 10 for IFLC <�20 ASF = 100 for IFLC <�80 ASF = 1000 for IFLC > 80 A
Type: CBCT==============
SF = 1
EF Current 32027 0 60000 1 mA 2
163MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Settings ModbusAddress
Range of data
Min Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Sizein
BytesNotes
32028 0 3500R Phase Voltage V 20.1
32029 0 3500 V 2
32030 0 3500 V 2
Y Phase Voltage
B Phase Voltage
0.1
0.1
-
-
-
32031 0 1000 Hz 2Frequency 0.1 -
32032
0 2000 0C
2
RTD Temperature 0.1If RTD temperature is enabled,Temperature parameter holds
temperature in Degree Celsius.If PTC temperature protection
is enabled, Temperatureparameter hold PTC Trip
Resistance in ohmsPTC Resistance 0 2000 1 Ω
32033 0 1000 - 2Power Factor 0.001 -
32034 10 1000 - 2Current Scale Factor 1SF = 0.001 for IFLC <�4 ASF = 0.01 for IFLC <�20 ASF = 0.1 for IFLC > 20 A
Type: Vector Sum==============SF = 1 for IFLC <�4 A
SF = 10 for IFLC <�20 ASF = 100 for IFLC <�80 ASF = 1000 for IFLC > 80 A
Type: CBCT==============
SF = 1
Earth CurrentScale Factor
32035 1 1000 1 - 2
Table A-1 (7): Modbus Memory Map
0 = RTD TemperatureProtection
1 = PTC TemperatureProtection
2 = RTD & PTCTemperature Protection
Disabled
Temp. SensorType
32036.0
32036.10 2 - -
32036.2 0 10 = 3Ph-4W System0 = 3Ph-3W System
SystemSelection flag
-2
-
32036.3 0 1 -Voltage Connect
Flag -0 = Voltage Connect
Disabled1 = Voltage Connect
Enabled
Trip Record � 3
32037 0 - 4-1048575MSW = 32038LSW = 32037
Refer Trip Record TableTrip Cause
32039 0 65535 Refer Trip Record TableDate Format - 2-
32040 0 - 4-134217727MSW = 32041LSW = 32040
Refer Trip Record TableTime Format
164MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Settings ModbusAddress
Range of data
Min Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Sizein
BytesNotes
32042 0 60000R Phase Current A 20.1
32043 0 60000 A 2
32044 0 60000 A 2
Y Phase Current
B Phase Current
0.1
0.1
SF = 0.001 for IFLC <�4 ASF = 0.01 for IFLC <�20 ASF = 0.1 for IFLC > 20 A
Type: Vector Sum==============SF = 1 for IFLC <�4 A
SF = 10 for IFLC <�20 ASF = 100 for IFLC <�80 ASF = 1000 for IFLC > 80 A
Type: CBCT==============
SF = 1
EF Current 32045 0 60000 1 mA 2
32046 0 3500R Phase Voltage V 20.1
32047 0 3500 V 2
32048 0 3500 V 2
Y Phase Voltage
B Phase Voltage
0.1
0.1
-
-
-
32049 0 1000 Hz 2Frequency 0.1 -
32050
0 2000 0C
2
RTD Temperature 0.1
If RTD temperature is enabled,Temperature parameter holds
temperature in Degree Celsius.
If PTC temperature protectionis enabled, Temperatureparameter hold PTC Trip
Resistance in ohms
PTC Resistance 0 1000 1 Ω
Table A-1 (8): Modbus Memory Map
32051 0 1000 - 2Power Factor 0.001 -
32052 10 1000 - 2Current Scale Factor 1SF = 0.001 for IFLC <�4 ASF = 0.01 for IFLC <�20 ASF = 0.1 for IFLC > 20 A
Type: Vector Sum==============SF = 1 for IFLC <�4 A
SF = 10 for IFLC <�20 ASF = 100 for IFLC <�80 ASF = 1000 for IFLC > 80 A
Type: CBCT==============
SF = 1
Earth CurrentScale Factor
32053 1 1000 1 - 2
0 = RTD TemperatureProtection
1 = PTC TemperatureProtection
2 = RTD & PTCTemperature Protection
Disabled
Temp. SensorType
32054.0
32054.10 2 - -
32054.2 0 10 = 3Ph-4W System0 = 3Ph-3W System
SystemSelection flag
-
2
-
165MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Settings ModbusAddress
Range of data
Min Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Sizein
BytesNotes
232054.3 0 1 -
Voltage ConnectFlag -
0 = Voltage ConnectDisabled
1 = Voltage ConnectEnabled
Trip Record � 4
32055 0 - 4-1048575MSW = 32056LSW = 32055
Refer Trip Record TableTrip Cause
32057 0 65535 Refer Trip Record TableDate Format - 2-
32058 0 - 4-134217727MSW = 32059LSW = 32058
Refer Trip Record TableTime Format
32060 0 60000R Phase Current A 20.1
32061 0 60000 A 2
32062 0 60000 A 2
Y Phase Current
B Phase Current
0.1
0.1
SF = 0.001 for IFLC <�4 ASF = 0.01 for IFLC <�20 ASF = 0.1 for IFLC > 20 A
Type: Vector Sum==============SF = 1 for IFLC <�4 A
SF = 10 for IFLC <�20 ASF = 100 for IFLC <�80 ASF = 1000 for IFLC > 80 A
Type: CBCT==============
SF = 1
EF Current 32063 0 60000 1 mA 2
Table A-1 (9): Modbus Memory Map
32064 0 3500R Phase Voltage V 20.1
32065 0 3500 V 2
32066 0 3500 V 2
Y Phase Voltage
B Phase Voltage
0.1
0.1
-
-
-
32067 0 1000 Hz 2Frequency 0.1 -
32068
0 2000 0C
2
RTD Temperature 0.1
If RTD temperature is enabled,Temperature parameter holds
temperature in Degree Celsius.
If PTC temperature protectionis enabled, Temperatureparameter hold PTC Trip
Resistance in ohms
PTC Resistance 0 1000 1 Ω
32069 0 1000 - 2Power Factor 0.001 -
32070 10 1000 - 2Current Scale Factor 1SF = 0.001 for IFLC <�4 ASF = 0.01 for IFLC <�20 ASF = 0.1 for IFLC > 20 A
166MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Settings ModbusAddress
Range of data
Min Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Sizein
BytesNotes
Type: Vector Sum==============SF = 1 for IFLC <�4 A
SF = 10 for IFLC <�20 ASF = 100 for IFLC <�80 ASF = 1000 for IFLC > 80 A
Type: CBCT==============
SF = 1
Earth CurrentScale Factor
32071 1 1000 1 - 2
0 = RTD TemperatureProtection
1 = PTC TemperatureProtection
2 = RTD & PTCTemperature Protection
Disabled
Temp. SensorType
32072.0
32072.10 2 - -
32072.2 0 10 = 3Ph-4W System0 = 3Ph-3W System
SystemSelection flag
- 2-
32072.3 0 1 -Voltage Connect
Flag -0 = Voltage Connect
Disabled1 = Voltage Connect
Enabled
Trip Record � 5
32073 0 - 4-1048575MSW = 32074LSW = 32073
Refer Trip Record TableTrip Cause
32075 0 65535 Refer Trip Record TableDate Format - 2-
32076 0 - 4-134217727MSW = 32077LSW = 32076
Refer Trip Record TableTime Format
Table A-1 (10): Modbus Memory Map
32078 0 60000R Phase Current A 20.1
32079 0 60000 A 2
32080 0 60000 A 2
Y Phase Current
B Phase Current
0.1
0.1
SF = 0.001 for IFLC <�4 ASF = 0.01 for IFLC <�20 ASF = 0.1 for IFLC > 20 A
32085 0 1000 Hz 2Frequency 0.1 -
32082 0 3500R Phase Voltage V 20.1
32083 0 3500 V 2
32084 0 3500 V 2
Y Phase Voltage
B Phase Voltage
0.1
0.1
-
-
-
Type: Vector Sum==============SF = 1 for IFLC <�4 A
SF = 10 for IFLC <�20 ASF = 100 for IFLC <�80 ASF = 1000 for IFLC > 80 A
Type: CBCT==============
SF = 1
EF Current 32081 0 60000 1 mA 2
167MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Settings ModbusAddress
Range of data
Min Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Sizein
BytesNotes
32086
0 2000 0C
2
RTD Temperature 0.1
If RTD temperature is enabled,Temperature parameter holds
temperature in Degree Celsius.
If PTC temperature protectionis enabled, Temperatureparameter hold PTC Trip
Resistance in ohms
PTC Resistance 0 1000 1 Ω
32087 0 1000 - 2Power Factor 0.001 -
32088 10 1000 - 2Current Scale Factor 1SF = 0.001 for IFLC <�4 ASF = 0.01 for IFLC <�20 ASF = 0.1 for IFLC > 20 A
Type: Vector Sum==============SF = 1 for IFLC <�4 A
SF = 10 for IFLC <�20 ASF = 100 for IFLC <�80 ASF = 1000 for IFLC > 80 A
Type: CBCT==============
SF = 1
Earth CurrentScale Factor
32089 1 1000 1 -
2
0 = RTD TemperatureProtection
1 = PTC TemperatureProtection
2 = RTD & PTCTemperature Protection
Disabled
Temp. SensorType
32090.0
32090.10 2 - -
Table A-1 (11): Modbus Memory Map
32090.2 0 10 = 3Ph-4W System0 = 3Ph-3W System
SystemSelection flag
-
2
-
32090.3 0 1 -Voltage Connect
Flag -0 = Voltage Connect
Disabled1 = Voltage Connect
Enabled
32091 0 4294967296MSW = 32092LSW = 32091
Trip counter -- 4
Event Records 33001
EVENT Record � 1
0 1048575 --
MSW = 33002LSW = 33001
Refer Event RecordTable
433001Event Source
Event Cause 33003 0 3 -- 2 Refer Event Record Table
Date Format 33004 0 65535 -- 2 Refer Event Record Table
0 134217727 --MSW = 32006LSW = 32005
Refer Event Record Table433005Time Format
168MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Settings ModbusAddress
Range of data
Min Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Sizein
BytesNotes
EVENT Record � 2
0 1048575 --
MSW = 33008LSW = 33007
Refer Event RecordTable
433007Event Source
Event Cause 33009 0 3 -- 2 Refer Event Record Table
Date Format 33010 0 65535 -- 2 Refer Event Record Table
0 134217727 --MSW = 32012LSW = 32011
Refer Event Record Table433011Time Format
EVENT Record � 3
0 1048575 --
MSW = 33014LSW = 33013
Refer Event RecordTable
433013Event Source
Event Cause 33015 0 3 -- 2 Refer Event Record Table
Date Format 33016 0 65535 -- 2 Refer Event Record Table
0 134217727 --MSW = 32018LSW = 32017
Refer Event Record Table433017Time Format
Table A-1 (12): Modbus Memory Map
EVENT Record � 4
0 1048575 --
MSW = 33020LSW = 33019
Refer Event RecordTable
433019Event Source
Event Cause 33021 0 3 -- 2 Refer Event Record Table
Date Format 33022 0 65535 -- 2 Refer Event Record Table
0 134217727 --MSW = 32024LSW = 32023
Refer Event Record Table433023Time Format
EVENT Record � 5
0 1048575 --
MSW = 33026LSW = 33025
Refer Event RecordTable
433025Event Source
Event Cause 33027 0 3 -- 2 Refer Event Record Table
Date Format 33028 0 65535 -- 2 Refer Event Record Table
0 134217727 --MSW = 32030LSW = 32029
Refer Event Record Table433029Time Format
0 4294967296 -- MSW = 33032LSW = 33031
433031Event Counter
169MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Table A-2 (1): Trip Record Cause Table
Event Source
The Relay stores last �ve trip records in its non-volatile memory. The memory addressing format for date, time and trip cause is shown in Table A�1. Bits in register are assigned unique fault cause. When the motor trips, the corresponding fault bit(s) will be
set high and rest all other fault bits remain low. In healthy condition all bits will be in reset condition. The date and time of fault will be stored in its corresponding address.
Example forFast Scan; if
addressconfigured as
TripRecord 1
TripRecord 2
TripRecord 3
TripRecord 4
TripRecord 5
Trip Records
Trip Cause
MSW=32012
LSW=32011
32011.0
32011.1
32011.2
32011.3
32011.4
........MSW=32074
LSW=32073
32073.0
32073.1
32073.2
32073.3
32073.4
MSW=32056
LSW=32055
32055.0
32055.1
32055.2
32055.3
32055.4
MSW=32038
LSW=32037
32037.0
32037.1
32037.2
32037.3
32037.4
MSW=32020
LSW=32019
32019.0
32019.1
32019.2
32019.3
32019.4
MSW=32002
LSW=32001
32001.0
32001.1
32001.2
32001.3
32001.4
Overload
Locked Rotor
Earth Fault
Under current
CurrentUnbalance
Over Voltage
Under Voltage
RTD Temperature
OverFrequency
Under Frequency
Phase Loss
Phase Reversal
Successive Start
Interlock-1
VoltageUnbalance
ExcessiveStart Time
32011.5
32011.6
32011.7
32073.5
32073.6
32073.7
32055.5
32055.6
32055.7
32037.5
32037.6
32037.7
32019.5
32019.6
32019.7
32001.5
32001.6
32001.7
32011.8
32011.9
32073.8
32073.9
32055.8
32055.9
32037.8
32037.9
32019.8
32019.9
32001.8
32001.9
32011.1032073.1032055.1032037.1032019.10
32019.11
32001.10
32001.11 32011.11
32011.12
32073.11
32073.12
32055.11
32055.12
32037.11
32037.1232019.12
32019.13
32001.12
32001.13 32011.1332073.1332055.1332037.13
32019.1432001.14 32011.14
32011.15
32073.14
32073.15
32055.14
32055.15
32037.14
32037.1532019.1532001.15
MSW=32012
LSW=32011
32012.0
32012.1
32012.2
32012.3
........MSW=32074
LSW=32073
32074.0
32074.1
32074.2
32074.3
MSW=32056
LSW=32055
32056.0
32056.1
32056.2
32056.3
MSW=32038
LSW=32037
32038.0
32038.1
32038.2
32038.3
MSW=32020
LSW=32019
32020.0
32020.1
32020.2
32020.3
MSW=32002
LSW=32001
32002.0
32002.1
32002.2
32002.3
Interlock-2
Interlock-3
Fail to Stop
Over Current
PTC ResponseResistance
32020.432002.4 32012.432074.432056.432038.4
170MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Example forFast Scan; if
addressconfigured as
TripRecord 1
TripRecord 2
TripRecord 3
TripRecord 4
TripRecord 5
Trip Records
Trip Cause
PTC ShortCircuit
32020.532002.5 32012.532074.532056.532038.5
PTC OpenCircuit
32020.632002.6 32012.632074.632056.632038.6
Interlock 4
Interlock 5
Interlock 6
Interlock 7
Interlock 8
Interlock 9
Interlock 10
Interlock 11
Interlock 12
32002.7
32002.8
32002.9
32002.10
32002.11
32002.12
32002.13
32002.14
32002.15
32020.7
32020.8
32020.9
32020.10
32020.11
32020.12
32020.13
32020.14
32020.15
32038.7
32038.8
32038.9
32038.10
32038.11
32038.12
32038.13
32038.14
32038.15
32056.7
32056.8
32056.9
32056.10
32056.11
32056.12
32056.13
32056.14
32056.15
32074.7
32074.8
32074.9
32074.10
32074.11
32074.12
32074.13
32074.14
32074.15
32012.7
32012.8
32012.9
32012.10
32012.11
32012.12
32012.13
32012.14
32012.15
Table A-2 (2): Trip Record Cause Table
TripRecord 1
TripRecord 2
TripRecord 3
TripRecord 4
TripRecord 5
Trip Records
Day
Date FormatAddress
32003
32003.0
32003.1
32003.2
32003.3
32003.4
32003.5
32003.6
32003.7
32003.8
32003.9
32003.10
32003.11
32003.12
32003.13
32003.14
32003.15
32021
32021.0
32021.1
32021.2
32021.3
32021.4
32021.5
32021.6
32021.7
32021.8
32021.9
32021.10
32021.11
32021.12
32021.13
32021.14
32021.15
32039
32039.0
32039.1
32039.2
32039.3
32039.4
32039.5
32039.6
32039.7
32039.8
32039.9
32039.10
32039.11
32039.12
32039.13
32039.14
32039.15
32075
32075.0
32075.1
32075.2
32075.3
32075.4
32075.5
32075.6
32075.7
32075.8
32075.9
32075.10
32075.11
32075.12
32075.13
32075.14
32075.15
32057
32057.0
32057.1
32057.2
32057.3
32057.4
32057.5
32057.6
32057.7
32057.8
32057.9
32057.10
32057.11
32057.12
32057.13
32057.14
32057.15
Month
Year
Table A-2 (3): Trip Record Cause Table
171MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Table A-2 (4): Trip Record Cause Table
TripRecord 1
TripRecord 2
TripRecord 3
TripRecord 4
TripRecord 5
Trip Records
Hours
32004.0
32004.1
32004.2
32004.3
32004.4
32022.0
32022.1
32022.2
32022.3
32022.4
32040.0
32040.1
32040.2
32040.3
32040.4
32076.0
32076.1
32076.2
32076.3
32076.4
32058.0
32058.1
32058.2
32058.3
32058.4
Time Format
Minutes
32004.5
32004.6
32004.7
32004.8
32004.9
32004.10
32022.5
32022.6
32022.7
32022.8
32022.9
32022.10
32040.5
32040.6
32040.7
32040.8
32040.9
32040.10
32076.5
32076.6
32076.7
32076.8
32076.9
32076.10
32058.5
32058.6
32058.7
32058.8
32058.9
32058.10
Reserved
32004.11
32004.12
32004.13
32004.14
32004.15
32005.0
32005.1
32005.2
32005.3
32005.4
32005.5
32005.6
32005.7
32005.8
32005.9
32005.10
32005.11
32005.12
32005.13
32005.14
32005.15
32022.11
32022.12
32022.13
32022.14
32022.15
32023.0
32023.1
32023.2
32023.3
32023.4
32023.5
32023.6
32023.7
32023.8
32023.9
32023.10
32023.11
32023.12
32023.13
32023.14
32023.15
32040.11
32040.12
32040.13
32040.14
32040.15
32041.0
32041.1
32041.2
32041.3
32041.4
32041.5
32041.6
32041.7
32041.8
32041.9
32041.10
32041.11
32041.12
32041.13
32041.14
32041.15
32076.11
32076.12
32076.13
32076.14
32076.15
32077.0
32077.1
32077.2
32077.3
32077.4
32077.5
32077.6
32077.7
32077.8
32077.9
32076.10
32077.11
32077.12
32077.13
32077.14
32077.15
32058.11
32058.12
32058.13
32058.14
32058.15
32059.0
32059.1
32059.2
32059.3
32059.4
32059.5
32059.6
32059.7
32059.8
32059.9
32059.10
32059.11
32059.12
32059.13
32059.14
32059.15
Seconds
Milliseconds
MSWLSW
3200532004
3202332022
3204132040
3205932058
3207732076
172MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Event Record Table
The Relay stores last �ve event records in its non-volatile memory. The memory addressing format for date, time and event cause is shown in Table A�3 Bits in register are assigned unique event cause. In the occurrence of any pickup or alarm state, the
corresponding event bit(s) will be set high and rest all other event bits will remain low. In healthy condition all bits will be in reset condition. The date and time of event will be stored in its corresponding address.
Table A-3 (1): Event Record Cause Table
EventRecord 1
EventRecord 2
EventRecord 3
EventRecord 4
EventRecord 5
33002
33001
33008
33007
33014
33013
33020
33019
33026
33025
Event Records
33001.0
33001.1
33001.2
33001.3
33001.4
33001.5
33001.6
33001.7
33001.8
33001.9
33001.10
33001.11
33001.12
33001.13
33001.14
33001.15
33007.0
33007.1
33007.2
33007.3
33007.4
33007.5
33007.6
33007.7
33007.8
33007.9
33007.10
33007.11
33007.12
33007.13
33007.14
33007.15
33013.0
33013.1
33013.2
33013.3
33013.4
33013.5
33013.6
33013.7
33013.8
33013.9
33013.10
33013.11
33013.12
33013.13
33013.14
33013.15
33025.0
33025.1
33025.2
33025.3
33025.4
33025.5
33025.6
33025.7
33025.8
33025.9
33025.10
33025.11
33025.12
33025.13
33025.14
33025.15
33019.0
33019.1
33019.2
33019.3
33019.4
33019.5
33019.6
33019.7
33019.8
33019.9
33019.10
33019.11
33019.12
33019.13
33019.14
33019.15
Overload
Locked Rotor
Earth Fault
Under current
Current Unbalance
Over Voltage
Under Voltage
Voltage Unbalance
RTD Temperature
Over Frequency
Under Frequency
Phase Loss
Phase Reversal
Excessive Start Time
Successive Start
Interlock-1
33002.0
33002.1
33002.2
33002.3
33002.4
33002.5
33002.6
33002.7
33002.8
33008.0
33008.1
33008.2
33008.3
33008.4
33008.5
33008.6
33008.7
33008.8
33014.0
33014.1
33014.2
33014.3
33014.4
33014.5
33014.6
33014.7
33014.8
33026.0
33026.1
33026.2
33026.3
33026.4
33026.5
33026.6
33026.7
33026.8
33020.0
33020.1
33020.2
33020.3
33020.4
33020.5
33020.6
33020.7
33020.8
Interlock-2
Interlock-3
Fail to Stop
Over Current
PTC ResponseResistance
PTC Short Circuit
PTC Open Circuit
Reserved
33002.9 33008.9 33014.9 33026.933020.9
MSW
LSW
Event Source
173MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
EventRecord 1
EventRecord 2
EventRecord 3
EventRecord 4
EventRecord 5
33002.10
33002.11
33002.12
33002.13
33002.14
33002.15
33008.10
33008.11
33008.12
33008.13
33008.14
33008.15
33014.10
33014.11
33014.12
33014.13
33014.14
33014.15
33026.10
33026.11
33026.12
33026.13
33026.14
33026.15
33020.10
33020.11
33020.12
33020.13
33020.14
33020.15
33002
33001
33008
33007
33014
33013
33020
33019
33026
33025
MSW
LSW
Event Source
Event Records
Reserved
33003
33003.0
33003.1
33009
33009.0
33009.1
33015
33015.0
33015.1
33021
33021.0
33021.1
33027
33027.0
33027.1
Address
Event Cause
Alarm
Pick up
33003
33003.2
33003.3
33003.4
33003.5
33003.6
33003.7
33003.8
33003.9
33003.10
33003.11
33003.12
33003.13
33003.14
33003.15
33009
33009.2
33009.3
33009.4
33009.5
33009.6
33009.7
33009.8
33009.9
33009.10
33009.11
33009.12
33009.13
33009.14
33009.15
33015
33015.2
33015.3
33015.4
33015.5
33015.6
33015.7
33015.8
33015.9
33015.10
33015.11
33015.12
33015.13
33015.14
33015.15
33021
33021.2
33021.3
33021.4
33021.5
33021.6
33021.7
33021.8
33021.9
33021.10
33021.11
33021.12
33021.13
33021.14
33021.15
33027
33027.2
33027.3
33027.4
33027.5
33027.6
33027.7
33027.8
33027.9
33027.10
33027.11
33027.12
33027.13
33027.14
33027.15
Event Records
Address
Event Cause
Reserved
EventRecord 1
EventRecord 2
EventRecord 3
EventRecord 4
EventRecord 5
Table A-3 (2): Event Record Cause Table
174MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
EventRecord 1
EventRecord 2
EventRecord 3
EventRecord 4
EventRecord 5
AddressDate Format
DAY
33004
33004.0
33004.1
33004.2
33004.3
33004.4
33004.5
33004.6
33004.7
33004.8
33004.9
33004.10
33004.11
33004.12
33004.13
33004.14
33004.15
33010
33010.0
33010.1
33010.2
33010.3
33010.4
33010.5
33010.6
33010.7
33010.8
33010.9
33010.10
33010.11
33010.12
33010.13
33010.14
33010.15
33016
33016.0
33016.1
33016.2
33016.3
33016.4
33016.5
33016.6
33016.7
33016.8
33016.9
33016.10
33016.11
33016.12
33016.13
33016.14
33016.15
33022
33022.0
33022.1
33022.2
33022.3
33022.4
33022.5
33022.6
33022.7
33022.8
33022.9
33022.10
33022.11
33022.12
33022.13
33022.14
33022.15
33028
33028.0
33028.1
33028.2
33028.3
33028.4
33028.5
33028.6
33028.7
33028.8
33028.9
33028.10
33028.11
33028.12
33028.13
33028.14
33028.15
MONTH
YEAR
33006
33005
33005.0
33005.1
33005.2
33005.3
33005.4
33005.5
33005.6
33005.7
33005.8
33005.9
33005.10
33012
33011
33011.0
33011.1
33011.2
33011.3
33011.4
33011.5
33011.6
33011.7
33011.8
33011.9
33011.10
33018
33017
33018.0
33018.1
33018.2
33018.3
33018.4
33018.5
33018.6
33018.7
33018.8
33018.9
33018.10
33024
33023
33023.0
33023.1
33023.2
33023.3
33023.4
33023.5
33023.6
33023.7
33023.8
33023.9
33023.10
33030
33029
33029.0
33029.1
33029.2
33029.3
33029.4
33029.5
33029.6
33029.7
33029.8
33029.9
33029.10
MSW
LSW
TIME FORMAT
HOURS
MINUTES
Event Records
Table A-3 (3): Event Record Cause Table
175MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
EventRecord 1
EventRecord 2
EventRecord 3
EventRecord 4
EventRecord 5
Event Records
MSW
LSW
RESERVED
SECONDS
33006
33005
33005.11
33005.12
33005.13
33005.14
33005.15
33006.0
33006.1
33006.2
33006.3
33006.4
33006.5
33006.6
33006.7
33006.8
33006.9
33006.10
33006.11
33006.12
33006.13
33006.14
33006.15
33012
33011
33011.11
33011.12
33011.13
33011.14
33011.15
33012.0
33012.1
33012.2
33012.3
33012.4
33012.5
33012.6
33012.7
33012.8
33012.6
33012.10
33012.11
33012.12
33012.13
33012.14
33012.15
33018
33017
33018.11
33018.12
33018.13
33018.14
33018.15
33017.0
33017.1
33017.2
33017.3
33017.4
33017.5
33017.6
33017.7
33017.8
33017.9
33017.10
33017.11
33017.12
33017.13
33017.14
33017.15
33024
33023
33023.11
33023.12
33023.13
33023.14
33023.15
33024.0
33024.1
33024.2
33024.3
33024.4
33024.5
33024.6
33024.7
33024.8
33024.9
33024.10
33024.11
33024.12
33024.13
33024.14
33024.15
33030
33029
33029.11
33029.12
33029.13
33029.14
33029.15
33030.0
33030.1
33030.2
33030.3
33030.4
33030.5
33030.6
33030.7
33030.8
33030.9
33030.10
33030.11
33030.12
33030.13
33030.14
33030.15
MILLISECONDS
Note: The memory map provided in this manual is for basic version of the Relay. Memory map may change depending on the add-on/optional functions present in the Relay. In such cases, the user is recommended to consult the manufacturer for the appropriate memory map by providing the Relay �rmware version.
176MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
B] Pro�bus memory map
Data which needs to be transmitted to Pro�bus master on communication needs to be selected in �parameter mapping setting� using MCOMP suite software. List of available data for con�guration in parameter mapping is discussed in cyclic data section. If number of data selected is 14 bytes then accordingly 16I/2O modules needs to be selected from all the modules available in GSD. GSD modules are discussed in Modules available in GSD �le.
Cyclic Data
Table A-4 shows all cyclic read data available through relay on Pro�bus communication to the Pro�bus master. Different parameters for respective data are also shown in the table.
Table A-4 (1): Memory Map � Pro�bus
R PhaseRMS Current
Size(Bytes)
EventRecord 5
All Cyclic read Data available to master (138 Input Byte)
Parameter
DF = 1000 (IFLC <�4 A)
DF = 100 (IFLC <�20 A)
DF = 10 (IFLC > 20 A)
UnitScaleFactor
(SF)
Range of Data
Min Max
A0.16000002
Y PhaseRMS Current
DF = 1000 (IFLC <�4 A)
DF = 100 (IFLC <�20 A)
DF = 10 (IFLC > 20 A)
A0.16000002
B PhaseRMS Current
DF = 1000 (IFLC <�4 A)
DF = 100 (IFLC <�20 A)
DF = 10 (IFLC > 20 A)
A0.16000002
Type: Vector Sum
==============
MF = 1 for IFLC <�4 A
MF = 10 for IFLC <�20 A
MF = 100 for IFLC <�80 A
MF = 1000 for IFLC > 80 A
Type: CBCT
==============
MF = 1
Earth RMS Current mA16000002
Average RMSCurrent
A0.16000002
DF = 1000 (IFLC <�4 A)
DF = 100 (IFLC <�20 A)
DF = 10 (IFLC > 20 A)
R Phase RMSVoltage V0.16000002 DF = 10
Y Phase RMSVoltage V0.16000002 DF = 10
B Phase RMSVoltage V0.16000002 DF = 10
177MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Size(Bytes)
EventRecord 5
All Cyclic read Data available to master (138 Input Byte)
Parameter UnitScaleFactor
(SF)
Range of Data
Min Max
Average RMSVoltage
V0.16000002 DF = 10
Frequency Hz0.1100002 DF = 10
PhaseSequence
-0.16000002Value = 0 for 1-2-3 (R-Y-B)Value = 1 for 1-3-2 (R-B-Y)
Power Factor -0.001100002 DF = 1000
Total ActivePower
W121000000004 MF = 1
Total ReactivePower
VAR121000000004 MF = 1
Total ApparentPower
VA121000000004 MF = 1
Total ActiveEnergy
Wh11.65564E+1708 MF = 1
Total ReactiveEnergy
VARh11.65564E+1708 MF = 1
Number of Start -1429496729604 MF = 1
Starting Time Sec1/501000002 DF = 50
Starting PeakCurrent
A0.16000002 DF = 10
Hours RunMinutes
51/606553502 DF = 60
Total Hours Run 1/60429496729604 DF = 60
Trip Counter -1429496729604 MF = 1
Minutes5
Trip Cause --104857504 Refer Trip Cause Table
Digital InputStatus
-02Refer Digital Input Status
Table--
Digital OutputStatus
-02Refer Digital Output Status
Table--
Truth TableOutputs
-02Refer Truth Table Output
Status Table--
Signal ConditionersOutputs
-02Refer Signal Conditioner
Output Status Table--
Counter Outputs -02Refer Counter Output Status
Table--
Timer Outputs -02Refer Timer Output Status
Table--
Table A-4 (2): Memory Map � Pro�bus
178MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Size(Bytes)
EventRecord 5
All Cyclic read Data available to master (138 Input Byte)
Parameter UnitScaleFactor
(SF)
Range of Data
Min Max
Expansion ModuleTypes
-02Refer Expansion Module
Types Status Table--
Expansion Module1 status
-02
Refer Expansion DigitalI/O Status
Table
--
Expansion Module2 status
-02 --
Expansion Module3 status
-02 --
R-Y Line Voltage
Y-B Line Voltage
B-R Line Voltage
-02 V1
-02 V1
-02 V1
DF = 1
DF = 1
DF = 1
Total ApparentEnergy
5.1246E+1208
%
1 DF = 1
2000/1000002 °C/Ω0.1/1Temperature DF = 10/1
10004 1Thermal Capacity DF = 1
Number Of StopOperations
429496729604 1 DF = 1
% CurrentUnbalance
10002 1 DF = 1
-
%
Trip cause Ext 104857504 -
Motor Stop cause -04 -
-
-
Motor Inhibit cause -04 -
Status Word -02 -
-
-
Refer Trip Cause ExtTable
Refer Motor Stop CauseTable
Refer Motor Inhibit CauseTable
Refer Status wordTable
DI-DO/ Timer/Counter- Signal
Conditioner-02 - - Refer Combined word
Table
Motor Status -02Refer Motor Status
Table--
Table A-4 (3): Memory Map � Pro�bus
179MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
BitParameter Name
Output Byte 0Forward start/Start1/ Low speedstart
0.0
Function
Output Byte 0 Stop0.11 = does not stop the motor/stop is healthy/release the stop0 =stops the motor (true for both maintained and momentary mode)
In case of momentary start mode:1 = issues start command depending upon the starter type if allother conditions are healthy0 = withdraw start command and does not stop the motor
In case of maintained start mode:1 = issues start command depending upon the starter type if allother conditions are healthy0 = withdraw start command and stops the motor
Output Byte 0Reverse start/High speed start0.2
Output Byte 0Permissivecommand 1
0.31 =set permissive output 1
0 =reset permissive output 1
Output Byte 0 0.41 =set permissive output 2
0 =reset permissive output 2
Permissivecommand 2
Output Byte 0 0.51 =set permissive output 3
0 =reset permissive output 3
Permissivecommand 3
Output Byte 0 Local/remoteMode selection 1
0.6
When mode selection through communication is high then
Combination of bits 0.6 and 0.7 decides the mode selection(local 1, local 2, local 3, remote)
When mode selection through communication is low then relaywill ignore the bit status and shall not act depending on status ofthese bits for mode selection.
Output Byte 0Local/remoteMode selection 2
0.7
When bit 0.6 = 0 and bit 0.7 = 0 then mode = local 1
When bit 0.6 = 0 and bit 0.7 = 1 then mode = local 2
When bit 0.6 = 1 and bit 0.7 = 0 then mode = local 3
When bit 0.6 = 1 and bit 0.7 = 1 then mode = remote
Output Byte 1 1.01 = reset the fault/trip condition
0 = withdraws the trip reset command/no actionTrip reset
Output Byte 1 1.11 = clears thermal memory
0 = withdraw clear thermal memory command/no actionClear thermalMemory
In case of momentary start mode:1 = issues start command depending upon the starter type if allother conditions are healthy0 = withdraw start command and does not stop the motor
In case of maintained start mode:1 = issues start command depending upon the starter type if allother conditions are healthy0 = withdraw start command and stops the motor
All cyclic write data available to master (2 bytes)
Table A-5 (1): Cyclic write data
180MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
BitParameter Name Function
Output Byte 1 1.21 = clears number of start count
0 = withdraw command/no action
Output Byte 1 1.31 = clears number of stop count
0 = withdraw command/no action
Clear number ofstop count
Clear number ofstart count
Output Byte 1 1.41 = clears hour run
0 = withdraw command/no action
Output Byte 1 1.51 = clears total hour run
0 = withdraw command/no action
Clear totalhour run
Clear hour run
Output Byte 1 1.61 = clears energy
0 = withdraw command/no action
Output Byte 1 1.7 For future UseReserved
Clear hour run
Data Representation
Table A-6: Digital Input Status
Digital Input Status
RemarksProfibus Data Index Bit Position Digital Input Channel #
0 to 7
6,7
5
4
3
2
1
0
x
x+1
Not applicable
Not applicable
DI Channel 6
DI Channel 5
DI Channel 4
DI Channel 3
DI Channel 2
DI Channel 1
0 = Input Low
1 = Input High
Table A-5 (2): Cyclic write data
181MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Table A-7: Digital Output Status
Digital Output Status
RemarksProfibus Data Index Bit Position Digital Output #
0 to 7
4 to 7
3
2
1
0
x
x+1
Not applicable
Not applicable
DO Channel 4
DO Channel 3
DO Channel 2
DO Channel 1
0 = Output Low
1 = Output High
Table A-8: Expansion Module Type Status
Expansion Module Type Status
RemarksProfibus Data Index Bit Position Description
3 to 7
2
1
0
6,7
5
4
3
2
1
0
x
x+1
Reserved
Module 3 Status
Module 2 Status
Module 1 Status
Reserved
0 = Output Low
1 = Output High
Reserved
Reserved
01 - 8 DI Module10 - 4DI 2DO Module
Module 3 Type
Module 2 Type
Module 1 Type
01 - 8 DI Module10 - 4DI 2DO Module
01 - 8 DI Module10 - 4DI 2DO Module
182MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Table A-9: Expansion Digital I/O Status
Expansion Digital I/O Status
RemarksProfibus Data Index Bit Position Expansion Digital I/O Channel #
2 to 7
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
x
x+1
Reserved
DO Channel 2
DO Channel 1
DI Channel 8
DI Channel 7
DI Channel 6
DI Channel 5
DI Channel 4
DI Channel 3
DI Channel 2
DI Channel 1
Only if 4DI-2DO Module0 = Output Low1 = Output High
0 = Output Low1 = Output High
(first four DI for 4DI/2DO module)
Table A-10: Truth Table Output Status
Truth Table Output Status
RemarksProfibus Data Index Bit Position Truth Table Output #
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
x
x+1
Truth Table 16
Truth Table 15
Truth Table 14
Truth Table 13
Truth Table 12
Truth Table 11
Truth Table 10
Truth Table 9
Truth Table 8
Truth Table 7
Truth Table 6
Truth Table 5
Truth Table 4
Truth Table 3
Truth Table 2
Truth Table 1
0 = Output Low1 = Output High
183MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Table A-11: Signal Conditioner Output Status
Signal Conditioner Output
RemarksProfibus Data Index Bit Position Signal Conditioner Output #
0 to 7
2 to 7
1
0
x
x+1
Not applicable
Not applicable
Signal Conditioner 2
Signal Conditioner 1
0 = Output Low1 = Output High
Table A-12: Timer Output Status
Timer Output Status
RemarksProfibus Data Index Bit Position Timer Output #
0 to 7
2 to 7
1
0
x
x+1
Not applicable
Not applicable
Timer 2
Timer 1
0 = Output Low1 = Output High
Table A-13: Output Status
Counter Output Status
RemarksProfibus Data Index Bit Position Counter Output #
0 to 7
2 to 7
1
0
x
x+1
Not applicable
Not applicable
Counter 2
Counter 1
0 = Output Low1 = Output High
Combined word Status
RemarksProfibus Data Index Bit Position Channel #
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
x
Digital Output 2
Digital Output 1
Digital Input 6
Digital Input 5
Digital Input 4
Digital Input 3
Digital Input 2
Digital Input 1
0 = Low1 = High
Table A-14 (1): Combined Word
184MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Combined word Status
RemarksProfibus Data Index Bit Position Channel #
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
x+1
Signal Conditioner 2 output
Signal Conditioner 1 output
Counter 2 output
Counter 1 output
Timer 2 output
Timer 1 output
Digital Output 4
Digital Output 3
0 = Low1 = High
Table A-15: Motor Status
Motor Status
RemarksProfibus Data Index Bit Position Motor Status Bit #
0 to 7
7
x Reversed
1 = motor running +Iavg > 10% IFLC
0 = motor stopped ormotor running +Iavg < 10% IFLC
Reversed
Motor running_1
Two Speed status 0 = high speed1 = low speed
6
Motor Direction Status 1 = reverse direction0 = forward direction
5
Pickup Status 1 = Pickup is present0 = No pickup
4
Inhibit Status 1 = Inhibit is present0 = No Inhibit
3
Alarm Status 1 = Alarm is present0 = No alarm
2
Trip Status 1 = Motor is tripped0 = Motor is not tripped
1
Motor Status 1 = Motor is running0 = Motor is stopped
0
x+1
Table A-14 (2): Combined Word
185MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Trip Cause
ProfibusData Index
Trip Cause (If Particular bit in data=1)
X
Interlock - 12
Interlock � 11
Interlock � 10
Interlock � 9
Interlock � 8
Interlock � 7
Interlock � 6
Interlock � 5
Table A-16: Trip Cause
Bit Position
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Size(In Bytes)
0
Min Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Max Value
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
X+1
Interlock � 4
PTC Open Circuit
PTC Short Circuit
PTC Response Resistance
Over current
Fail to Stop
Interlock � 3
Interlock � 2
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
X+2
Interlock � 1
Successive Start
Excessive Start Time
Phase Reversal
Phase Loss
Under Frequency
Over Frequency
Temperature
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
X+3
Voltage Unbalance
Under Voltage
Over Voltage
Current Unbalance
Under Current
Earth Fault
Locked Rotor
Overload
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
186MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Table A-17: Trip Cause Ext
Trip Cause Ext
Trip Cause(If Particular bit in data=1)
ProfibusData Index
x
x+1
x+2
x+1
Bit Position
0 to 7
0 to 7
0 to 7
2 to 7
1
0
Size(In Bytes)
1
1
1
1
Min Value
NA
NA
NA
NA
0
0
Max Value
NA
NA
NA
NA
1
1
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Mode Change
Communication Failure
Inhibit Status
ProfibusData Index
x
x+1
Bit Position
0 to 7
4 to 7
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Inhibiting parameter
Reserved
Reserved
Expansion unit failure
Stop from Communication
Interlock 12
Interlock 11
Interlock 10
Interlock 09
Interlock 08
Interlock 07
Interlock 06
Interlock 05
Interlock 04
Interlock 03
Interlock 02
Interlock 01
Digital input Stop
Maximum number of start
Thermal capacity
Trip
Under Voltage
No Voltage
Remarks
0 = No Inhibit
1 = Inhibit due to respective cause
x+20 = No Inhibit
1 = Inhibit due to respective cause
x+30 = No Inhibit
1 = Inhibit due to respective cause
Table A-18: Inhibit Status
187MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Table A-19 (1): Stop Cause
Stop Cause
ProfibusData Index
x
x+1
Bit Position
4 to 7
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Stopping parameter
Reserved
Expansion unit failure stop
Profibus start 2 maintained stop
Profibus start 1 maintained stop
Interlock 12
Interlock 11
Interlock 10
Interlock 09
Interlock 08
Interlock 07
Interlock 06
Interlock 05
Interlock 04
Reserved
Start 4 Maintained stop
Start 3 Maintained stop
Start 2 Maintained stop
Start 1 Maintained stop
Current Auto Stop
Voltage Auto Stop
Contactor Feedback
Interlock 3
Interlock 2
Interlock 1
Stop from communication
Digital Input Emergency Stop
Digital Input Stop
MCOMP suite Stop(HMI)
Trip
Remarks
0 = No Stop
1 = Stopped due to respective cause
x+2
x+3
0 = No Stop
1 = Stopped due to respective cause
0 = No Stop
1 = Stopped due to respective cause
0 = No Stop
1 = Stopped due to respective cause
7
6
5
4
User Configurable
User Configurable
User Configurable
User Configurable
x
Defined by MCOMP suite HMI
(Refer Chapter 7 Communication for
parameters that can be defined in
this status word.)
188MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Status word
ProfibusData Index
x
x+1
Bit Position
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Description
User Configurable
User Configurable
User Configurable
User Configurable
User Configurable
User Configurable
User Configurable
User Configurable
User Configurable
User Configurable
User Configurable
User Configurable
Remarks
Defined by MCOMP suite HMI
(Refer Chapter 7 Communication for
parameters that can be defined in
this status word.)
Table A-19 (2): Stop Cause
189MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
If there is mismatch between Number of Parameters con�gured/de�ned by MCOMP suite HMI which de�nes length of transmitted data from Relay to Pro�bus-Master and number of bytes requested by Pro�bus-Master then there are two possible cases as explained below:
a) Length of data requested by Pro�bus-Master > Con�gured Parameter�s length:
In this case Relay will append unde�ned (garbage) data after con�gured/de�ned parameter�s data. Data of con�gured parameters will not be affected.
b) Length of data requested by Pro�bus-Master < Con�gured Parameter�s length:
In this case Relay will only send data requested by Pro�bus-Master. Data frame will be clipped beyond length de�ned by master which mean no data will come after requested number of byte by Pro�bus-Master are transmitted by Relay.
Data Modules in GSD
Sr. No. DescriptionData Module Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2I/2O Module
4I/2O Module
8I/2O Module
10I/2O Module
16I/2O Module
22I/2O Module
32I/2O Module
64I/2O Module
128I/2O Module
138I/2O(All Data) Module
2 Input bytes and 2 output bytes data exchange.
4 Input bytes and 2 output bytes data exchange.
8 Input bytes and 2 output bytes data exchange.
10 Input bytes and 2 output bytes data exchange.
16 Input bytes and 2 output bytes data exchange.
22 Input bytes and 2 output bytes data exchange.
32 Input bytes and 2 output bytes data exchange.
64 Input bytes and 2 output bytes data exchange.
128 Input bytes and 2 output bytes data exchange.
138 Input bytes and 2 output bytes data exchange.
Note:Refer table A-2 for parameters that can be de�ned in any of the data module through MCOMP suite HMI.Refer Chapter 7: Communication, �Pro�bus Parameter mapping� section for de�ning the parameters which will be transmitted to Pro�bus master on communication network.
Data Modules available in GSD �le
There are various modules available in MCOMP Pro�bus GSD �le which can be freely selected during con�guration as per the requirement. The different modules have been de�ned with �x size and �exibility has been provided to user to con�gure the data in a sequence required as per application. By default 10 modules are available in MOCMP GSD with pre-de�ned bytes size asshown in Table A-20 and parameters for each of the modules needs to be con�gured through MCOMP suite software. Customized module size can also be made available in the GSD �le upon request without changing any MCOMP hardware/�rmware provided respective MCOMP supports that functionality.
Table A-20 : Data modules in GSD
190MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Acyclic Data
Table A-20 shows acyclic read data available through Relay to the Pro�bus master on Pro�bus communication network. �Index�
Table A-21 (1): Acyclic data (in case of DPV1)
Acyclic Data
Slot Parameter name Data LengthIndex
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
R Phase RMS Current
Y Phase RMS Current
B Phase RMS Current
Earth RMS Current
Average RMS Current
R Phase RMS Voltage
Y Phase RMS Voltage
B Phase RMS Voltage
Average RMS Voltage
Frequency
Power Factor
Phase Sequence
Total Active Power
Total Reactive Power
Total Apparent Power
Total Active Energy
Total Reactive Energy
Number of Start
Starting Time
Starting Peak Current
Hours Run
Total Hours Run
Trip Counter
Trip Cause
Digital Input Status
Digital Output Status
Truth Tables Output
Signal Conditioners Output
Counter O/P
Timer O/P
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
8
8
4
2
2
2
4
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
column shown in table is de�ned through MCOMP suite HMI and is the sequence number of the de�ned/con�gured parameter.
191MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Acyclic Data
Slot Parameter name Data LengthIndex
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59�254
255
Motor Status
External Module Type
External Module 1 Status
External Module 2 Status
External Module 3 Status
R-Y Line Voltage
Y-B Line Voltage
B-R Line Voltage
Total Apparent Energy
Temperature
Thermal Capacity
Number Of Stop Operations
% Current Unbalance
Trip Cause Ext
Stop Cause
Inhibit Cause
Status Word
DI/DI/Timer/SignalCond/Counter
Trip Record 1
Trip Record 2
Trip Record 3
Trip Record 4
Trip Record 5
Event Record 1
Event Record 2
Event Record 3
Event Record 4
Event Record 5
Reserved
Identification & Maintenance
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
8
2
4
4
2
4
2
2
2
2
40
40
40
40
40
16
16
16
16
16
-
68
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Note: The memory map provided in this manual is for basic version of the Relay. Memory map may change depending on the add-on/optional functions present in the Relay. In such cases, the user is recommended to consult the manufacturer for the appropriate memory map by providing the Relay �rmware version.
Table A-21 (2): Acyclic data (in case of DPV1)
192MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
C] Modbus TCP/IP Memory Map
Table A�21 shows Modbus TCP/IP memory map.
Table A-22 (1): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
Range of dataParameter Notes
Min
LSW= Least Significant Word
MSW= Most Significant Word
1 = Trigger Start Motor CMD
1 = Trigger Stop Motor CMD
1 = Trigger Trip Reset CMD
1 = Trigger Start 2 Motor CMD
1 = Trigger Reset Thermal Memory CMD
1 = Trigger Store Factory Setting CMD
1 = Trigger Restore Factory Setting CMD
1 = Trigger Capture Starting Curve CMD
1 = Trigger MCOMP Reset CMD
1 = Trigger Clear Energy Value CMD
1 = Trigger Reset Number of Starts CMD
1 = Trigger Reset Number of Stop CMD
1 = Trigger Reset Motor Run Hrs CMD
1 = Trigger Reset Total Motor Run Hours CMD
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
ModbusAddress
Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Size inBytes
Force Single Coil (Function code - 05)
Command Address(00001 � 00010)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008
00009
00010
00011
00012
00013
00014
Start Motor
Stop Motor
Trip Reset
Start 2 Motor
Reset Thermal Memory
Store Factory Setting
Restore Factory Setting
Capture Starting Curve
MCOMP Reset
Clear Energy Value
Reset Number of Starts
Reset Number of Stop
Reset Motor Run Hrs
Reset Total Motor Run Hours
Force Single Coil (Function code - 05)
Command Address (00001 � 00010)
1 = Motor Running0 = Motor StoppedMotor Status
Trip Status
Alarm Status
Inhibit Status
Pickup Status
10001
10002
10003
10004
10005
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
1 = MPR Tripped0 = MPR Not Tripped
1 = Alarm present0 = No Alarm
1 = Inhibit present0 = No Inhibit
1 = Pickup present0 = No Pickup
1 = Store Factory Settings CMD Executed0 = Store Factory Settings CMD Not ExecutedStore Factory Settings 10006 0 1 - - -
Restore Factory Settings 10007 0 1 - - -1 = Restore Factory Settings CMD Executed
0 = Restore Factory Settings CMD Not Executed
193MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Range of dataParameter Notes
Min
ModbusAddress
Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Size inBytes
Capture Starting Curve
Thermal Memory
RTC Write
10008
10009
10010
0
0
0
1
1
1
- - -
- - -
- - -
1 = Capture Starting Curve CMD Executed0 = Capture Starting Curve CMD Not Executed
1 = Thermal Memory CMD Executed0 = Thermal Memory CMD not Executed
1 = RTC Write CMD Executed0 = RTC Write CMD Not Executed
Calibration
EEPROM File System
10011
10012
0
0
1
1
- - -
- - -
1 = MPR is Calibrated0 = MPR is not Calibrated
1 = EEPROM File System is working0 = EEPROM File System is not working
I2C RTC Fail 10013 0 1 - - -1 = I2C RTC Fail
0 = I2C RTC Working
I2C EEPROM FAIL
RDOL Direction Status
10014
10015
0
0
1
1
- - -
- - -
1 = I2C EEPROM Fail0 = I2C EEPROM Working
1 = Reverse0 = Forward
Reserved 10016 0 1 - - - -
RDOL Direction Status 10017 0 1 - - -1 = No Voltage Inhibit Occurred (Voltage ConnectEnable but Applied Voltage is less than 10 % Vn)
0 = No voltage inhibit not occurred
Under-voltage AlarmInhibit Status
10018 0 1 - - -
1 = Under-voltage alarm inhibit occurred (VoltageConnect Enable but Applied Voltage is less than
Under voltage Alarm Set Value & Above 10 % Vn)0 = Under-voltage alarm inhibit not occurred
Trip Inhibit Status 10019 0 1 - - -1 = Motor is in Trip condition &
not Reset; 0 otherwise
Thermal MemoryInhibit Status
10020 0 1 - - -1 = Thermal memory Inhibit status occurred
(Thermal Memory > 30%)0 = Thermal memory Inhibit status not Occurred
Max Number StartInhibit Status
10021 0 1 - - -
1 = Max no. of start inhibit occurred (MaxNumber of Starts exceeds Permissive Starts &
Inhibit Period is not finish)0 = Max no. of start inhibit not occurred
Digital I/P StopInhibit Status
10022 0 1 - - -
1 = Digital I/P Stop Inhibit Status occurred (Oneof DI configure as STOP input & Valid STOP
input is not applied)0 = Digital I/P Stop Inhibit Status not occurred
Interlock 1 InhibitStatus
10023 0 1 - - -1 = Interlock 1 Inhibit occurred (Interlock 1
configured as STOP input is absent)0 = Interlock 1 Inhibit not occurred
1 = Interlock 2 Inhibit occurred (Interlock 1configured as STOP input is absent)0 = Interlock 2 Inhibit not occurred
Interlock 2 InhibitStatus
10024 0 1 - - -
Table A-22 (2): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
194MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Range of dataParameter Notes
Min
ModbusAddress
Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Size inBytes
Read Input Registers (Function Code - 04)
The metering data, trip & event record data addresses are same as mentioned in Modbus RTU map.
Ethernet Module Software Version (33151 - 33152)
ETHERNET SW VERSION
-Minor 33151 0 65535 - - 2
-Major 33152 0 65535 - - 2
Read/Write Register (Function Code - 03)
Protection Settings Address (40041 - 40137)
Overload Protection
-Overload pick up 40041 200 1000 10 % 2
-Overload pick up 40042
Pickup SetValue -(PickupSet Value*CurrentBand/1000)
10 % 2
-Alarm pick up 40043 800 1000 10 % 2
-Alarm reset 40044
Pickup SetValue -(PickupSet Value*CurrentBand/1000)
10 % 2
Thermal MemoryReset Value
10045 5 30 1 2 -%
-Thermal Inhibit Set 40046 30 95 - % 2
Pause Time DelaySetting
10047 50 60000 50 2 -Sec
1 = Interlock 3 Inhibit occurred (Interlock 1configured as STOP input is absent)0 = Interlock 3 Inhibit not occurred
Interlock 3 InhibitStatus
10025 0 1 - - -
Table A-22 (3): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 2: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 8: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 9: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 10: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 11: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Thermal memory (TM)ON/OFF:1 (Bit 0)Alarm (AL) ON/OFF:1(Bit 1)Pause Settings (PS)ON OFF:1 (Bit 2)Reserved: (bit 3 to bit 7)Modes of Reset (MRL):Local/Manual:1 (Bit 8)Modes of Reset (MRR):Remote: 1(Bit 9)
40048
TM = 0AL = 0PS = 0
MRL = 0MRR = 0MRC = 0MRA = 0
- - 2
TM = 1AL = 1PS = 1
MRL = 1MRR = 1MRC = 1MRA = 1
195MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Range of dataParameter Notes
Min
ModbusAddress
Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Size inBytes
Modes of Reset (MRC):Communication/Serial:1(Bit 10)Modes of Reset (MRA):Auto:1(Bit 11)
Locked Rotor Protection
-Locked Rotor pick up 40049 1500 10000 10 % 2
-Locked Rotor pick
up reset 40050
Pickup Set Value -(Pickup Set Value*Current HysteresisBand/1000)
10 % 2
-Locked Rotor Alarm Set 40051 900 900 10 % 2
-Locked Rotor Alarm
Reset 40052
Pickup Set Value -(Pickup Set Value*Current HysteresisBand/1000)
10 % 2
-Locked Rotor Trip Delay 40053 25 1500 50 Sec 2
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 8: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 9: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 10: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 11: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Mode: Alarm (AL): 1(Bit 0)Mode: Trip (TR):1(Bit 1)Reserved:(Bit 2 to Bit 7)Modes of Reset:Local (MRL): 1 (Bit 8)Modes of Reset:Remote (MRR): 1 (Bit 9)Modes of Reset:Communication/Serial(MRC): 1 (Bit 10)Modes of Reset: Auto(MRA): 1(Bit 11)
40054
AL = 0TR = 0
MRL = 0MRR = 0MRC = 0MRA = 0
- - 2
AL = 1TR = 1
MRL = 1MRR = 1MRC = 1MRA = 1
Under Voltage Protection
-Under Voltage pick up 40055 20 850 10 % 2
-Under Voltage pick
up reset 40056
Pickup Set Value -(Pickup Set Value*Current HysteresisBand/1000)
10 % 2
-Under Voltage Alarm Set 40057 1100 1100 10 % 2
Table A-22 (4): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
196MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
-Under Voltage Alarm
Reset 40058
Pickup Set Value -(Pickup Set Value *Current HysteresisBand/1000)
10 % 2
-Under Voltage Trip Delay 40059 10 1250 50 Sec 2
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 8: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 9: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 10: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 11: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Mode: Alarm (AL): 1
(Bit 0)
Mode: Trip (TR):1
(Bit 1)
Reserved:(Bit 2 to Bit 7)
Modes of Reset:
Local (MRL): 1 (Bit 8)
Modes of Reset:
Remote (MRR): 1 (Bit 9)
Modes of Reset:
Communication/Serial
(MRC): 1 (Bit 10)
Modes of Reset: Auto
(MRA): 1
(Bit 11)
40060
AL = 0
TR = 0
MRL = 0
MRR = 0
MRC = 0
MRA = 0
- - 2
AL = 1
TR = 1
MRL = 1
MRR = 1
MRC = 1
MRA = 1
Current Unbalance Protection
-Current Unbalance pick up 40061 50 1000 10 % 2
-Under Voltage pick
up reset 40062
Pickup Set Value -(Pickup Set Value*Current HysteresisBand/1000)
10 % 2
-Under Voltage Alarm Set 40063 850 1000 10 % 2
-Under Voltage Alarm
Reset 40064
Pickup Set Value -(Pickup Set Value *Current HysteresisBand/1000)
10 % 2
-Under Voltage Trip Delay 40065 50 1500 50 Sec 2
Range of dataParameter Notes
Min
ModbusAddress
Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Size inBytes
Table A-22 (5): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 8: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 9: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Mode: Alarm (AL): 1(Bit 0)Mode: Trip (TR):1(Bit 1)Reserved:(Bit 2 to Bit 7)Modes of Reset:Local (MRL): 1 (Bit 8)
40066
AL = 0TR = 0
MRL = 0MRR = 0MRC = 0MRA = 0
- - 2
AL = 1TR = 1
MRL = 1MRR = 1MRC = 1MRA = 1
197MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Bit 10: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 11: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Modes of Reset:Remote (MRR): 1 (Bit 9)Modes of Reset:Communication/Serial(MRC): 1 (Bit 10)Modes of Reset: Auto(MRA): 1(Bit 11)
Range of dataParameter Notes
Min
ModbusAddress
Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Size inBytes
Temperature Protection
-
RTD Temperature pick up40067
250 1800 10 ºC2
PTC Response resistance 2700 4000 1 Ω
RTD Pickup Set value
-
RTD Temperature Pickup Reset 40068
RTD Pickup set � 5 10 ºC2
PTC Reset Resistance 1600 2500 1 Ω
-
RTD TemperatureAlarm Set
40069 RTD Pickup set � 20 10 ºC 2 -
RTD TemperatureAlarm Reset
40070 RTD Pickup set � 25 10 ºC 2 -
-
RTD TemperatureTrip Delay 40071 50 Sec 2
PTC Trip delay 5 3000
-250 12500
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 2: 0 = RTD;1 = PTC
Bit 8: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 9: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 10: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 11: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
40072
MRL = 0MRR = 0MRC = 0MRA = 0
- - 2
MRL = 1MRR = 1MRC = 1MRA = 1
Table A-22 (6): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
Under current Protection
-Under current pick up 40073 300 850 10 % 2
-Under current pick
up reset 40074
Pickup Set Value -(Pickup Set Value*Current Band/1000)
10 % 2
Mode: Alarm (AL):1(Bit 0)Mode: Trip (TR):1(Bit 1)Temperature SensorType (SEN): (Bit 2)Reserved: (Bit 3 to Bit 7)Modes of Reset:Local (MRL): 1 (Bit 8)Modes of Reset:Remote (MRR): 1 (Bit 9)Modes of Reset:Communication/Serial(MRC): 1 (Bit 10)Modes of Reset:Auto (MRA): 1 (Bit 11)
198MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
-Under current Alarm Set 40075 1100 1100 10 % 2
-Under current Alarm
Reset 40076
Pickup Set Value -(Pickup Set Value *Current Band/1000)
10 % 2
-Under current Trip Delay 40077 50 6000 50 Sec 2
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 8: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 9: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 10: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 11: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Mode: Alarm (AL): 1(Bit 0)Mode: Trip (TR):1(Bit 1)Reserved:(Bit 2 to Bit 7)Modes of Reset:Local (MRL): 1 (Bit 8)Modes of Reset:Remote (MRR): 1 (Bit 9)Modes of Reset:Communication/Serial(MRC): 1 (Bit 10)Modes of Reset: Auto(MRA): 1(Bit 11)
40078
AL = 0TR = 0
MRL = 0MRR = 0MRC = 0MRA = 0
- - 2
AL = 1TR = 1
MRL = 1MRR = 1MRC = 1MRA = 1
Range of dataParameter Notes
Min
ModbusAddress
Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Size inBytes
Earth Fault Protection
0 = Vector Sum1 = CBCT
If user SelectVector Sum
Pickup Set Range =25 to 500% of IFLC
CBCTPickup Set Range =
0.1 to 20 ADefault = 0.1 A
- - 240079E/F Type 0 1
-E/F pick up 40080
10 %orA
21 �200
-200 5000
10
E/F pick up Reset 40081 210 -%
Pickup Set Value -(Pickup Set Value *Current Band/1000)
E/F Alarm pick up 40082 10 % 21 �200
-900 900
E/F Alarm Reset 40083 210 -%
Pickup Set Value -(Pickup Set Value *Current Band/1000)
Table A-22 (7): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
199MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Trip Delay/Trip Delay(RUN)
40084 Sec 20 3000
-0 3000
Range of dataParameter Notes
Min
ModbusAddress
Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Size inBytes
50
50
Trip Delay (Start) 40085 0 1250 50 Sec 2
Alarm Delay (Start) 40086 0 3000 50 Sec 2
Alarm Delay (Run) 40087 0 3000 50 Sec 2
This delay is applicable if userselect E/F Type as CBCT
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 8: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 9: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 10: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Bit 11: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Mode: Alarm (AL): 1
(Bit 0)
Mode: Trip (TR):1
(Bit 1)
Reserved:(Bit 2 to Bit 7)
Modes of Reset:
Local (MRL): 1 (Bit 8)
Modes of Reset:
Remote (MRR): 1 (Bit 9)
Modes of Reset:
Communication/Serial
(MRC): 1 (Bit 10)
Modes of Reset: Auto
(MRA): 1
(Bit 11)
40088
AL = 0
TR = 0
MRL = 0
MRR = 0
MRC = 0
MRA = 0
- - 2
AL = 1
TR = 1
MRL = 1
MRR = 1
MRC = 1
MRA = 1
Table A-22 (8): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
Voltage Unbalance Protection
Voltage Unbalancepick up
40089 500 10 % 2 -50
Voltage Unbalancepick up reset 40090 210 -%
Pickup Set Value -(Pickup Set Value *Current HysteresisBand/1000)
Voltage UnbalanceAlarm Set
40091 900 10 % 2 -900
Voltage UnbalanceAlarm Reset
40092
210 -%
Pickup Set Value -(Pickup Set Value *Current HysteresisBand/1000)
Voltage UnbalanceTrip Delay
40093
1000 50 Sec 2 -10
200MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Range of dataParameter Notes
Min
ModbusAddress
Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Size inBytes
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 8: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 9: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 10: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 11: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Mode: Alarm (AL): 1(Bit 0)Mode: Trip (TR):1(Bit 1)Reserved:(Bit 2 to Bit 7)Modes of Reset:Local (MRL): 1 (Bit 8)Modes of Reset:Remote (MRR): 1 (Bit 9)Modes of Reset:Communication/Serial(MRC): 1 (Bit 10)Modes of Reset: Auto(MRA): 1(Bit 11)
40094
AL = 0TR = 0
MRL = 0MRR = 0MRC = 0MRA = 0
- - 2
AL = 1TR = 1
MRL = 1MRR = 1MRC = 1MRA = 1
Over Voltage Protection
Over Voltagepick up
40095 1300 10 % 2 -1010
Over Voltage pickup reset 40096 210 -%
Pickup Set Value -(Pickup Set Value *Current HysteresisBand/1000)
Over VoltageAlarm Set
40097 950 10 % 2 -950
Over VoltageAlarm Reset
40098 210 -%
Pickup Set Value -(Pickup Set Value *Current HysteresisBand/1000)
Over VoltageTrip Delay
40099 1250 50 Sec 2 -10
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 8: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 9: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 10: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 11: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Mode: Alarm (AL): 1(Bit 0)Mode: Trip (TR):1(Bit 1)Reserved:(Bit 2 to Bit 7)Modes of Reset:Local (MRL): 1 (Bit 8)Modes of Reset:Remote (MRR): 1 (Bit 9)Modes of Reset:Communication/Serial(MRC): 1 (Bit 10)Modes of Reset: Auto(MRA): 1(Bit 11)
40100
AL = 0TR = 0
MRL = 0MRR = 0MRC = 0MRA = 0
- - 2
AL = 1TR = 1
MRL = 1MRR = 1MRC = 1MRA = 1
Table A-22 (9): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
201MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Range of dataParameter Notes
Min
ModbusAddress
Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Size inBytes
Under Frequency Protection
Under Frequencypick up
40101 980 10 % 2 -940
Under Frequency pickup reset 40102 210 -%
Pickup Set Value -(Pickup Set Value *Current HysteresisBand/1000)
Under FrequencyAlarm Set
40103 1010 10 % 2 -1010
Under FrequencyAlarm Reset
40104 210 -%
Pickup Set Value -(Pickup Set Value *Current HysteresisBand/1000)
Under FrequencyTrip Delay
40105 1500 50 Sec 2 -50
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 8: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 9: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 10: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 11: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Mode: Alarm (AL): 1(Bit 0)Mode: Trip (TR):1(Bit 1)Reserved:(Bit 2 to Bit 7)Modes of Reset:Local (MRL): 1 (Bit 8)Modes of Reset:Remote (MRR): 1 (Bit 9)Modes of Reset:Communication/Serial(MRC): 1 (Bit 10)Modes of Reset: Auto(MRA): 1(Bit 11)
40106
AL = 0TR = 0
MRL = 0MRR = 0MRC = 0MRA = 0
- - 2
AL = 1TR = 1
MRL = 1MRR = 1MRC = 1MRA = 1
Over Frequency Protection
Over Frequencypick up
40107 1050 10 % 2 -1010
Over Frequencypick up reset 40108 210 -%
Pickup Set Value -(Pickup Set Value *Current HysteresisBand/1000)
Over FrequencyAlarm Set
40109 990 10 % 2 -990
Over FrequencyAlarm Reset
40110 210 -%
Pickup Set Value -(Pickup Set Value *Current HysteresisBand/1000)
Table A-22 (10): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
202MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Range of dataParameter Notes
Min
ModbusAddress
Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Size inBytes
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 8: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 9: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 10: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 11: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Mode: Alarm (AL): 1(Bit 0)Mode: Trip (TR):1(Bit 1)Reserved:(Bit 2 to Bit 7)Modes of Reset:Local (MRL): 1 (Bit 8)Modes of Reset:Remote (MRR): 1 (Bit 9)Modes of Reset:Communication/Serial(MRC): 1 (Bit 10)Modes of Reset: Auto(MRA): 1(Bit 11)
40112
AL = 0TR = 0
MRL = 0MRR = 0MRC = 0MRA = 0
- - 2
AL = 1TR = 1
MRL = 1MRR = 1MRC = 1MRA = 1
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 1: 0 = 1-2-3 (R YB); 1 = 1-3-2 (R B Y)Bit 8: 0 = Disable;
1 = EnableBit 9: 0 = Disable;
1 = EnableBit 10: 0 = Disable;
1 = EnableBit 11: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable
Mode (PR) Enable/Disable: 1 (Bit 0)Phase Sequence (PS)setting: 1 (Bit 1)Reserved: (Bit 2 toBit 7)Modes of Reset(MRL): Local: 1 (Bit 8)Modes of Reset(MRR): Remote: 1(Bit 9)Modes of Reset(MRC):Communication/Serial: 1 (Bit 10)Modes of Reset(MRA): Auto:1(Bit 11)
40113
AL = 0TR = 0
MRL = 0MRR = 0MRC = 0MRA = 0
- - 2
AL = 1TR = 1
MRL = 1MRR = 1MRC = 1MRA = 1
Phase Loss Protection
Phase Loss Trip Delay 40114 1500 50 Sec 2 -5
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 8: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 9: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 10: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 11: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Trip Delay (TD)Enable/Disable: 1(Bit 0)Reserved: (Bit 1 toBit 7)Modes of Reset(MRL): Local: 1 (Bit 8)Modes of Reset (MRR):Remote: 1 (Bit 9)Modes of Reset (MRC):Communication/ Serial:1 (Bit 10)Modes of Reset(MRA): Auto:1 (Bit 11)
40115
TD = 0MRL = 0MRR = 0MRC = 0MRA = 0
- - 2
TD = 1MRL = 1MRR = 1MRC = 1MRA = 1
Over FrequencyTrip Delay
40111 1500 50 Sec 2 -50
Table A-22 (11): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
203MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Range of dataParameter Notes
Min
ModbusAddress
Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Size inBytes
Re Acceleration
Voltage Dip 40116 950 10 % 2 -200
VoltageRestoration
40117 950 10 % 2 -650
Re Accelerationrestart time
40118 3000 50 Sec 2 -10
Re Accelerationrestart delay 40119 60000 50 Sec 2 -200
Re AccelerationEnable/Disable: 1
(Bit 0)Aux & Motor Supply:
1 (Bit 1)
Bit 0: 0 = Disable1 = Enable
Bit 1:0 = Same;
1 = Separate
40120 0 1 2--
Max number of Start Protection
Reference period 40121 180000 3000 Min 4 -45000
Permissive starts 40122 30 1 - 2 -1
Inhibit period 40123 360000 3000 Min 4 -3000
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 8: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 9: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 10: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 11: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Max Start (SS)Enable/Disable: 1(Bit 0)Reserved: (Bit 1 toBit 7)Modes of Reset(MRL): Local: 1 (Bit 8)Modes of Reset(MRR): Remote: 1(Bit 9)Modes of Reset(MRC):Communication/Serial:1 (Bit 10)Modes of Reset(MRA):Auto:1 (Bit 11)
40126
SS = 0MRL = 0MRR = 0MRC = 0MRA = 0
- - 2
SS = 1MRL = 1MRR = 1MRC = 1MRA = 1
Excessive Start Time Protection
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 8: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 9: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Excessive Start TimeProtection (ESTP)Enable/Disable: 1(Bit 0)Modes of Reset(MRL): Local: 1 (Bit 8)Modes of Reset(MRR): Remote: 1
40128
TD = 0MRL = 0MRR = 0MRC = 0MRA = 0
- - 2
TD = 1MRL = 1MRR = 1MRC = 1MRA = 1
Table A-22 (12): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
204MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Range of dataParameter Notes
Min
ModbusAddress
Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Size inBytes
Excessive Start Time Protection
Bit 10: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 11: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
(Bit 9)Modes of Reset(MRC):Communication/Serial:1 (Bit 10)Modes of Reset(MRA): Auto: 1(Bit 11)
Hysteresis Band settings
Current 40129 150 10 % 2 -30
Voltage 40130 150 10 % 2 -30
Frequency 40131 150 10 % 2 -30
Under current Protection
Over current pick up 40132 10000 10 % 2 -500
Over current pickup reset
40133 210 -%
Pickup Set Value -(Pickup Set Value*Current Band/1000)
Over currentAlarm Set
40134 900 10 % 2 -900
Over currentAlarm Reset
40135 210 -%
Pickup Set Value -(Pickup Set Value *Current Band/1000)
Over currentTrip Delay
40136 500 50 Sec 2 -5
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 8: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 9: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 10: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Bit 11: 0 = Disable;1 = Enable
Mode: Alarm (AL): 1(Bit 0)Mode: Trip (TR):1(Bit 1)Reserved:(Bit 2 to Bit 7)Modes of Reset:Local (MRL): 1 (Bit 8)Modes of Reset:Remote (MRR): 1 (Bit 9)Modes of Reset:Communication/Serial(MRC): 1 (Bit 10)Modes of Reset:Auto (MRA): 1(Bit 11)
40137
AL = 0TR = 0
MRL = 0MRR = 0MRC = 0MRA = 0
- - 2
AL = 1TR = 1
MRL = 1MRR = 1MRC = 1MRA = 1
Table A-22 (13): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
205MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Range of dataParameter Notes
Min
ModbusAddress
Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Size inBytes
System Settings Address (40151 - 40177)
Motor Settings
Full Load Current 40151 8000 10 A 2 -6
Motor Voltage 40152 480 1 V 2 Setting must be 380 or 415 or 480380
Auxiliary Supply 40153 230 1 V 2 -24
Voltage connect 40154 1 1 - 2 0=Disable / 1=Enable0
5 = Class 510 = Class 1015 = Class 1520 = Class 2025 = Class 2530 = Class 30
40155 405 1 - 2Trip Class
Starting Time 40156 10000 50 Sec 2 -50
Frequency selection 40157 600 10 Hz 2 50 Hz or 60 Hz500
Running Current 40158 100 1 % 2 -20
System type 40159 1 1 - 20 = 3 Phase � 4 Wire1 = 3 Phase � 3 Wire
0
MCOMP Software
Software version 40163 9999 100 - 2 -0
Type of starter 40164 4 1 - 20-DOL
1-RDOL2-Star Delta
0
Time in Star 40165 1500 50 Sec 2Max value of Time in star =(Starting time -1) seconds
50
Chang Over Delay 40166 10000 50 Sec 2 -5
Bit Field - Description----------------------0 - Local1 - Remote2 - Communication When LOCAL Selected-------------------------5 - Local Only6 - Remote OnlyWhen REMOTE Selected-----------------------------Remote Start1 (In case of RDOL showStart1 & Start2)7 - Local Only8 - Remote OnlyRemote Start2 (In case of RDOL show Start3 & Start4)
Mode- Display/Local/Remote/Comm
40167 0 1 - 24095
Table A-22 (14): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
Motor Tag
Characters allowed are A-Z, a-z, 0-9and Special chars: #, - , _ , . , ' & space(Hex values will be shown at registeraddress).For e.g. if Motor Tag is 1234567890then Address 40173 will show 3231,40174 = 3433, 40175 = 3635,40176 = 3837 & 40177 = 3039User can select maximum of 10Characters Motor tag number.If Motor Tag is of less than 10 chars,special char �space� (Hex 20) will beadded for remaining characters.
Max 10 Ascii Charwide Motor Tag
40173 - - - 2-
40174 - - - 2-
40175 - - - 2-
40176 - - - 2-
40177 - - - 2-
206MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Range of dataParameter Notes
Min
ModbusAddress
Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Size inBytes
9 - Local Only10 - Remote Only When COMMUNICATION Selected---------------------------------11 - Local Only12 - Remote Only
Ratio 40168 10000 10 - 2 -1
Primary Current 40169 10000 1 - 2 -1
Secondary Current 40170 5 1 - 2 Setting must be 1 or 51
Mode 40171 1 1 - 2 0=Disable / 1=Enable0
External CT settings
Bit 0 - 0 = Disable/
1 = Enable
Bit 1 - 0 = Disable/
1 = Enable
Bit 2 - 0 = Disable/
1 = Enable
Bit 8 - 0 = Disable/
1 = Enable
Bit 9 - 0 = Disable/
1 = Enable
Bit 10 - 0 = Disable/
1 = Enable
EventPickup (EP): 1
(Bit 0)
EventTrip (ET): 1
(Bit 1)
EventAlarm (EA): 1
(Bit 2)
Reserved: 5
Auto Start Detect
(AS): 1 (Bit 8)
Voltage Auto Stop
(VAS): 1 (Bit 9)
Current Auto Stop
(CAS): 1 (Bit 10)
Reserved1: 5
40172
ES = 0
ET = 0
EA = 0
AS = 0
VAS = 0
CAS = 0
- - 2
ES = 1
ET = 1
EA = 1
AS = 1
VAS = 1
CAS = 1
Table A-22 (15): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
207MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Range of dataParameter Notes
Min
ModbusAddress
Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Size inBytes
Communication Settings Address (40191 - 40213)
Modbus
40191 1 - - 22
40192 1 - - 2247
40193 0 - - 21
40194 0 - - 22
40195 0 - - 21
Mode
Node Address
Baud Rate
Parity
Stop Bits
1 = RTU
1 to 247
0 = 96001 =19200
0 = No parity1 = Even Parity2 = Odd Parity
0 = 1 Stop bit1 = 2 Stop bits
40196 0 - - 22
40197 1 - - 2126
Mode
Node Address
0 = MODBUS1 = Profibus2 = Ethernet
Manual Address 01 - 125Auto Address = 126
Modbus
Ethernet
40203 0 - - 21Mode: DHCP: 1(Bit 0)
Time Zone Sign: 1(Bit 1)Reserved: (Bit 2 to Bit 15)
Bit 0 0 -Disable / 1 - Enable
Bit 1 0 = '-' / 1 = '1�
40204 0 - - 44294967
296IP Address
40206 0 - - 4Subnet Mask
40208 0 - - 4Default Gateway
40210 0 - - 4SNTP Server Address
e.g if Address is192(0xCO).168(0x78).120(0xA8).
105(0x69)then value will be
0x69A878C0 = 1772648640
4294967296
4294967296
4294967296
40212 0 - - 4
Time Zone GMTHour: 8 (Bit 0-7)
Time Zone GMT Min:8 (Bit 8-15)
Reserved: (Bit 16to bit 31)
Hrs = 0 to 13Min = 0 to 59
4294967296
Table A-22 (16): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
208MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Range of dataParameter Notes
Min
ModbusAddress
Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Size inBytes
DIO Settings Address (40231 - 40282)
Input 1
Bit 0 - ResetBit 1- Start 1Bit 2 - Start 2Bit 3 - Stop
Bit 4 - Local/Remote(0 - Local and 1 - Remote)
Bit 5 - Interlock 1Bit 6 - Interlock 2Bit 7 - Interlock 3
Bit 8 - ESTOPBit 9 -Contactor Feedback
Bit 10 - Start 3Bit 11 - Start 4
Bit 12 - TestBit 13 - None========1 - Enable0 - Disable
Mode- Display/Local/Remote/
Comm40231 1 1 - 28192
40232 5 50 Sec 23000Validation Period -
0 = Disable1 = Alarm
2 = Trip and Trip Delay3 = Interlock 14 = Interlock 25 = Interlock 36 = Local Reset
7 = Communication Reset8 = Auto Reset
9 = Remote Reset10 = STOP
Interlock Config 40233 1 1 - 21024
Bit 0 - 7 Note: Thisshould be updated ifuser selects interlock
type as tripBit 8/9/10/11 - 0 =Disable/1 = Enable
Note: This should beupdated if user
selects interlock typeas trip
Bit 12/13 - 0 =Disable/1 = Enable
Interlock Trip Delay(ITD) (Bit 0 -7)
Modes of Reset:Local/Manual (MRL)
(Bit - 8)Modes of Reset:Remote (MRR)
(Bit - 9)Modes of Reset:Communication/
Serial (MRC)(Bit - 10)
40234
ITD = 1MRL = 0MRR = 0MRC = 0MRA = 0
TI = 0MM = 0
ITD = 10MRL = 1MRR = 1MRC = 1MRA = 1
TI = 1MM = 1
ITDin
Sec2
ITD = 100MRL = 1MRR = 1MRC = 1MRA = 1
TI = 1MM = 1
Table A-22 (17): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
209MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Range of dataParameter Notes
Min
ModbusAddress
Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Size inBytes
Input 2
Bit 0 - ResetBit 1- Start 1Bit 2 - Start 2Bit 3 - Stop
Bit 4 - Local/Remote(0 - Local and 1 - Remote)
Bit 5 - Interlock 1Bit 6 - Interlock 2Bit 7 - Interlock 3
Bit 8 - ESTOPBit 9 -Contactor Feedback
Bit 10 - Start 3Bit 11 - Start 4
Bit 12 - TestBit 13 - None========1 - Enable0 - Disable
Type of Input 40235 1 1 - 28192
40236 5 50 Sec 23000Validation Period -
Note: This should beupdated if user
selects interlock typeas STOP otherwise
must be Load DefaultValue 0
Modes of Reset:Auto (MRA) (Bit - 11)
Test Input (TI)(Bit - 12)
Maintained Mode(MM) (Bit - 13)
0 = Disable1 = Alarm
2 = Trip and Trip Delay3 = Interlock 14 = Interlock 25 = Interlock 36 = Local Reset
7 = Communication Reset8 = Auto Reset
9 = Remote Reset10 = STOP
Interlock Config 40237 1 1 - 21024
Bit 0 - 7 Note: Thisshould be updated ifuser selects interlock
type as tripBit 8/9/10/11 - 0 =Disable/1 = Enable
Interlock Trip Delay(ITD) (Bit 0 -7)
Modes of Reset:Local/Manual (MRL)
(Bit - 8)Modes of Reset:Remote (MRR)
(Bit - 9)
40238
ITD = 1MRL = 0MRR = 0MRC = 0MRA = 0
TI = 0MM = 0
ITD = 10MRL = 1MRR = 1MRC = 1MRA = 1
TI = 1MM = 1
ITDin
Sec2
ITD = 100MRL = 1MRR = 1MRC = 1MRA = 1
TI = 1MM = 1
Table A-22 (18): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
210MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Range of dataParameter Notes
Min
ModbusAddress
Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Size inBytes
Note: This should beupdated if user
selects interlock typeas trip
Bit 12/13 - 0 =Disable/1 = Enable
Note: This should beupdated if user
selects interlock typeas STOP otherwise
must be Load DefaultValue 0
Modes of Reset:Communication/
Serial (MRC)(Bit - 10)
Modes of Reset:Auto (MRA) (Bit - 11)
Test Input (TI)(Bit - 12)
Maintained Mode(MM) (Bit - 13)
Input 3
Bit 0 - ResetBit 1- Start 1Bit 2 - Start 2Bit 3 - Stop
Bit 4 - Local/Remote(0 - Local and 1 - Remote)
Bit 5 - Interlock 1Bit 6 - Interlock 2Bit 7 - Interlock 3
Bit 8 - ESTOPBit 9 -Contactor Feedback
Bit 10 - Start 3Bit 11 - Start 4
Bit 12 - TestBit 13 - None========1 - Enable0 - Disable
Type of Input 40239 1 1 - 28192
40240 5 50 Sec 23000Validation Period -
0 = Disable1 = Alarm
2 = Trip and Trip Delay3 = Interlock 14 = Interlock 25 = Interlock 36 = Local Reset
7 = Communication Reset8 = Auto Reset
9 = Remote Reset10 = STOP
Interlock Config 40241 1 1 - 21024
Table A-22 (19): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
211MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Range of dataParameter Notes
Min
ModbusAddress
Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Size inBytes
Bit 0 - 7 Note: Thisshould be updated ifuser selects interlock
type as tripBit 8/9/10/11 - 0 =Disable/1 = Enable
Note: This should beupdated if user
selects interlock typeas trip
Bit 12/13 - 0 =Disable/1 = Enable
Note: This should beupdated if user
selects interlock typeas STOP otherwise
must be Load DefaultValue 0
Interlock Trip Delay(ITD) (Bit 0 -7)
Modes of Reset:Local/Manual (MRL)
(Bit - 8)Modes of Reset:Remote (MRR)
(Bit - 9)Modes of Reset:Communication/
Serial (MRC)(Bit - 10)
Modes of Reset:Auto (MRA) (Bit - 11)
Test Input (TI)(Bit - 12)
Maintained Mode(MM) (Bit - 13)
40242
ITD = 1MRL = 0MRR = 0MRC = 0MRA = 0
TI = 0MM = 0
ITD = 10MRL = 1MRR = 1MRC = 1MRA = 1
TI = 1MM = 1
ITDin
Sec2
ITD = 100MRL = 1MRR = 1MRC = 1MRA = 1
TI = 1MM = 1
Input 4
Bit 0 - ResetBit 1- Start 1Bit 2 - Start 2Bit 3 - Stop
Bit 4 - Local/Remote(0 - Local and 1 - Remote)
Bit 5 - Interlock 1Bit 6 - Interlock 2Bit 7 - Interlock 3
Bit 8 - ESTOPBit 9 -Contactor Feedback
Bit 10 - Start 3Bit 11 - Start 4
Bit 12 - TestBit 13 - None========1 - Enable0 - Disable
Type of Input 40243 1 1 - 28192
40244 5 50 Sec 23000Validation Period -
0 = Disable1 = Alarm
2 = Trip and Trip Delay3 = Interlock 14 = Interlock 25 = Interlock 36 = Local Reset
7 = Communication Reset8 = Auto Reset
9 = Remote Reset10 = STOP
Interlock Config 40245 1 1 - 21024
Table A-22 (20): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
212MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Range of dataParameter Notes
Min
ModbusAddress
Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Size inBytes
Bit 0 - 7 Note: Thisshould be updated ifuser selects interlock
type as tripBit 8/9/10/11 - 0 =Disable/1 = Enable
Note: This should beupdated if user
selects interlock typeas trip
Bit 12/13 - 0 =Disable/1 = Enable
Note: This should beupdated if user
selects interlock typeas STOP otherwise
must be Load DefaultValue 0
Interlock Trip Delay(ITD) (Bit 0 -7)
Modes of Reset:Local/Manual (MRL)
(Bit - 8)Modes of Reset:Remote (MRR)
(Bit - 9)Modes of Reset:Communication/
Serial (MRC)(Bit - 10)
Modes of Reset:Auto (MRA) (Bit - 11)
Test Input (TI)(Bit - 12)
Maintained Mode(MM) (Bit - 13)
40246
ITD = 1MRL = 0MRR = 0MRC = 0MRA = 0
TI = 0MM = 0
ITD = 10MRL = 1MRR = 1MRC = 1MRA = 1
TI = 1MM = 1
ITDin
Sec2
ITD = 100MRL = 1MRR = 1MRC = 1MRA = 1
TI = 1MM = 1
Input 5
Bit 0 - ResetBit 1- Start 1Bit 2 - Start 2Bit 3 - Stop
Bit 4 - Local/Remote(0 - Local and 1 - Remote)
Bit 5 - Interlock 1Bit 6 - Interlock 2Bit 7 - Interlock 3
Bit 8 - ESTOPBit 9 -Contactor Feedback
Bit 10 - Start 3Bit 11 - Start 4
Bit 12 - TestBit 13 - None========1 - Enable0 - Disable
Type of Input 40247 1 1 - 28192
40248 5 50 Sec 23000Validation Period -
0 = Disable1 = Alarm
2 = Trip and Trip Delay3 = Interlock 14 = Interlock 25 = Interlock 36 = Local Reset
7 = Communication Reset8 = Auto Reset
9 = Remote Reset10 = STOP
Interlock Config 40249 1 1 - 21024
Table A-22 (21): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
213MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Range of dataParameter Notes
Min
ModbusAddress
Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Size inBytes
Bit 0 - 7 Note: Thisshould be updated ifuser selects interlock
type as tripBit 8/9/10/11 - 0 =Disable/1 = Enable
Note: This should beupdated if user
selects interlock typeas trip
Bit 12/13 - 0 =Disable/1 = Enable
Note: This should beupdated if user
selects interlock typeas STOP otherwise
must be Load DefaultValue 0
Interlock Trip Delay(ITD) (Bit 0 -7)
Modes of Reset:Local/Manual (MRL)
(Bit - 8)Modes of Reset:Remote (MRR)
(Bit - 9)Modes of Reset:Communication/
Serial (MRC)(Bit - 10)
Modes of Reset:Auto (MRA) (Bit - 11)
Test Input (TI)(Bit - 12)
Maintained Mode(MM) (Bit - 13)
40250
ITD = 1MRL = 0MRR = 0MRC = 0MRA = 0
TI = 0MM = 0
ITD = 10MRL = 1MRR = 1MRC = 1MRA = 1
TI = 1MM = 1
ITDin
Sec2
ITD = 100MRL = 1MRR = 1MRC = 1MRA = 1
TI = 1MM = 1
Input 6
Bit 0 - ResetBit 1- Start 1Bit 2 - Start 2Bit 3 - Stop
Bit 4 - Local/Remote(0 - Local and 1 - Remote)
Bit 5 - Interlock 1Bit 6 - Interlock 2Bit 7 - Interlock 3
Bit 8 - ESTOPBit 9 -Contactor Feedback
Bit 10 - Start 3Bit 11 - Start 4
Bit 12 - TestBit 13 - None========1 - Enable0 - Disable
Type of Input 40251 1 1 - 28192
40252 5 50 Sec 23000Validation Period -
0 = Disable1 = Alarm
2 = Trip and Trip Delay3 = Interlock 14 = Interlock 25 = Interlock 36 = Local Reset
7 = Communication Reset8 = Auto Reset
9 = Remote Reset10 = STOP
Interlock Config 40253 1 1 - 21024
Table A-22 (22): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
214MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Range of dataParameter Notes
Min
ModbusAddress
Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Size inBytes
Bit 0 - 7 Note: Thisshould be updated ifuser selects interlock
type as tripBit 8/9/10/11 - 0 =Disable/1 = Enable
Note: This should beupdated if user
selects interlock typeas trip
Bit 12/13 - 0 =Disable/1 = Enable
Note: This should beupdated if user
selects interlock typeas STOP otherwise
must be Load DefaultValue 0
Interlock Trip Delay(ITD) (Bit 0 -7)
Modes of Reset:Local/Manual (MRL)
(Bit - 8)Modes of Reset:Remote (MRR)
(Bit - 9)Modes of Reset:Communication/
Serial (MRC)(Bit - 10)
Modes of Reset:Auto (MRA) (Bit - 11)
Test Input (TI)(Bit - 12)
Maintained Mode(MM) (Bit - 13)
40254
ITD = 1MRL = 0MRR = 0MRC = 0MRA = 0
TI = 0MM = 0
ITD = 10MRL = 1MRR = 1MRC = 1MRA = 1
TI = 1MM = 1
ITDin
Sec2
ITD = 100MRL = 1MRR = 1MRC = 1MRA = 1
TI = 1MM = 1
Output 1
Bit 0 - AlarmBit 1 - Interlock 1Bit 2 - Interlock 2Bit 3 - Interlock 3Bit 4 - Follow 1Bit 5 - Follow 2
Bit 6 - RUNBit 7 - RDOL-Forward RelayBit 8 - RDOL-Reverse Relay
Bit 9 - StarBit 10 - DeltaBit 11 - Trip
Bit 12 - MainBit 13 - Drive Available
=====1 - Enable/0 - Disable
Type of Output 40255 1 1 - 416384
40257 0 1 - 21Mode (Level/Pulse) 0 = Level /1 =Pulse
40258 5 50 Sec 250000Hold Time Only used if mode is pulse
40259 5 50 Sec 250000Time Delay for Follow Relay -
Output 2
Bit 0 - AlarmBit 1 - Interlock 1Bit 2 - Interlock 2Bit 3 - Interlock 3Bit 4 - Follow 1Bit 5 - Follow 2
Bit 6 - RUN
Type of Output 40260 1 1 - 416384
Table A-22 (23): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
215MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Range of dataParameter Notes
Min
ModbusAddress
Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Size inBytes
40262 0 1 - 21Mode (Level/Pulse) 0 = Level /1 =Pulse
40263 5 50 Sec 250000Hold Time Only used if mode is pulse
40264 5 50 Sec 250000Time Delay for Follow Relay -
Output 3
Bit 0 - AlarmBit 1 - Interlock 1Bit 2 - Interlock 2Bit 3 - Interlock 3Bit 4 - Follow 1Bit 5 - Follow 2
Bit 6 - RUNBit 7 - RDOL-Forward RelayBit 8 - RDOL-Reverse Relay
Bit 9 - StarBit 10 - DeltaBit 11 - Trip
Bit 12 - MainBit 13 - Drive Available
=====1 - Enable/0 - Disable
Type of Output 40265 1 1 - 416384
40267 0 1 - 21Mode (Level/Pulse) 0 = Level /1 =Pulse
40268 5 50 Sec 250000Hold Time Only used if mode is pulse
40269 5 50 Sec 250000Time Delay for Follow Relay -
Bit 7 - RDOL-Forward RelayBit 8 - RDOL-Reverse Relay
Bit 9 - StarBit 10 - DeltaBit 11 - Trip
Bit 12 - MainBit 13 - Drive Available
=====1 - Enable/0 - Disable
Output 4
Bit 0 - AlarmBit 1 - Interlock 1Bit 2 - Interlock 2Bit 3 - Interlock 3Bit 4 - Follow 1
Type of Output 40270 1 1 - 416384
Table A-22 (24): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
216MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Range of dataParameter Notes
Min
ModbusAddress
Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Size inBytes
40272 0 1 - 21Mode (Level/Pulse) 0 = Level /1 =Pulse
40273 5 50 Sec 250000Hold Time Only used if mode is pulse
40274 5 50 Sec 250000Time Delay for Follow Relay -
Analog Output
0 - Ir1 - Iy2 - Ib
3 - Iavg4 - Vr5 - Vy6 - Vb
7 - Vavg8 - Vry9 - Vyb10 - Vbr
11 - Apparent Power12 - Reactive Power13 - Active Power14 - Temperature15 - Frequency
Type of Input 40275 0 1 - 215
Current (Ir, Iy, Ib, Iavg)= 0Voltage (Vr,Vy,Vb,Vavg,
Vry, Vyb, Vbr) = 0Power (Apparent,
Reactive, Active) = 0Temperature = 0Frequency = 0
Min 40276 0 1 - 4<MinValue
Bit 5 - Follow 2Bit 6 - RUN
Bit 7 - RDOL-Forward RelayBit 8 - RDOL-Reverse Relay
Bit 9 - StarBit 10 - DeltaBit 11 - Trip
Bit 12 - MainBit 13 - Drive Available
=====1 - Enable/0 - Disable
Current (Ir, Iy,Ib, Iavg) = 3600Voltage (Vr,Vy,Vb,Vavg) = 375
Line Voltage (Vry, Vyb,Vbr) = 650Power (Apparent,
Reactive, Active) =28.3Temperature = 200
Frequency = 75
Max 40278 10 - 4>MinValue
3600
Table A-22 (25): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
217MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
MEMORY MAPS
Range of dataParameter Notes
Min
ModbusAddress
Max
ScaleFactor
(SF)Unit
Size inBytes
40280 0 1 - 21Scale Factor0 = Factory Set
1 = Manual
40281 4 10 mA 220Expected Output -
40282 1 10 mA 224Actual Output -
Real Time Clock Data Address (40501 - 40506)
40501 0 - Sec 259Sec -
40502 0 - Min 259Min -
40503 0 - - 223Hours -
40504 1 - - 231Date -
40505 1 - - 212Month -
40506 0 - - 299Year -
Note: The memory map provided in this manual is for basic version of the Relay. Memory map may change depending on the add-on/optional functions present in the Relay. In such cases, the user is recommended to consult the manufacturer for the appropriate memory map by providing the Relay �rmware version.
Table A-22 (26): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.
218MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
ANNEXURE B - APPLICATION NOTES
Overview
The Relay supports three communication protocols as Modbus serial, Pro�bus DP and Modbus over TCP/IP. The memory map for all these communication protocols is described below.
A] Modbus RTU Memory Map
DOL Starter
This is the simplest and widely used type of starter. The selection of a DOL starter is based on the rating of the motor.
Basic settings required in the Relay for DOL starter:
� Starter type to be selected as DOL.
� One Digital Input to be selected as START1.
� One Digital Output to be selected as RUN.
Figure B�1 shows the DOL starter wiring diagram. The connections in the diagram are shown considering 3P-4W system. The connection may be different for different type of system selection.
When the Relay receives START1 input, RUN output picks up after validating all the start inhibit conditions (Refer Inhibit Status in chapter Testing and Troubleshooting). When the RUN output is activated, the contactor picks up, which starts the Motor. When a STOP command is received by the Relay, RUN output drops out, contactor drops out and the motor stops.
Figure B-1: DOL Starter Wiring Diagram
61 Dl1
62 Dl2
63 Dl3
64 Dl4
65 Dl5
66 Dl6
67 COM
DIG
ITA
L IN
PUTS
3 4
Y R
3-PH.VOLTAGE
1 2
N B
71
N/-
72
L/+
AUX.VOLT
DIG
ITA
L O
UTP
UT
CO
NTA
CTS 82
8381858684888987919290
RTD/PTC
Tl1 Tl2
ANALOG O/P
AO1 AO2 D+ D-
RS485
PWR/COMM
MOTOR STATUS
ALARM/PICKUP
TRIPRST ENT
Mini USB PortLN
MODBUS RS485 LOOPING
4-20mA OUTPUTTO FIELD AMMETER
RTD/PTC
CONTACTOR COIL
TRIP INDICATION
L/+
N/-
RYBN
FUSE
START
STOP
RESET
CM UNIT
R Y B
CBCTCM UNIT
R Y BS2
S1
M
SFU / MCCB
CONTACTOR1 3 5
2 4 6
219MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
APPLICATION NOTES
RDOL Starter
This type of starter is used when the motor is required to run in both forward as well as reverse directions depending upon the application.
Basic settings required in the Relay for RDOL starter:
� Starter type to be selected as RDOL.
� One Digital Input to be selected as START1.
� One Digital Input to be selected as START2.
� One Digital Output to be selected as FORWARD RELAY.
� One Digital Output to be selected as REVERSE RELAY.
Figure B-2 shows the RDOL starter wiring diagram. The connections in the diagram are shown considering 3P-4W system. The connection may be different for different type of system selection.
When the Relay receives START1(forward start) input, FORWARD RELAY output picks up after validating all the start inhibit conditions. When the FORWARD RELAY output is activated, the contactor A picks up starting the Motor in forward direction. When the Relay receives START2(reverse start) input, REVERSE RELAY output picks up after validating all the start inhibit conditions. When the REVERSE RELAY output is activated, the contactor B picks up starting the Motor in reverse direction. When a STOP command is received by the Relay, FORWARD RELAY/REVERSE RELAY output drops out, corresponding contactor drops out and the motor stops.
When motor is running in forward direction and Relay receives START2 input, it will ignore the command and will continue to run in forward direction. When motor is running in reverse direction and Relay receives START1 input, it will ignore the command and will continue to run in reverse direction.
Figure B-2: RDOL Starter Wiring Diagram
61 Dl1
62 Dl2
63 Dl3
64 Dl4
65 Dl5
66 Dl6
67 COM
DIG
ITA
L IN
PUTS
3 4
Y R
3-PH.VOLTAGE
1 2
N B
71
N/-
72
L/+
AUX.VOLT
DIG
ITA
L O
UTP
UT
CO
NTA
CTS 82
8381858684888987919290
RTD/PTC
Tl1 Tl2
ANALOG O/P
AO1 AO2 D+ D-
RS485
PWR/COMM
MOTOR STATUS
ALARM/PICKUP
TRIPRST ENT
Mini USB PortLN
MODBUS RS485 LOOPING
4-20mA OUTPUTTO FIELD AMMETER
RTD/PTC
CONTACTOR COIL
TRIP INDICATION
L/+
N/-
RYBN
FUSE
START1
STOP
RESET
START2CONTACTOR B
1 13 3 55
2 24 4 66
CM UNIT
R Y B
CBCTCM UNIT
R Y BS2
S1
M
SFU / MCCB
CONTACTOR A
220MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
APPLICATION NOTES
STAR/DELTA Starter
This type of starter provides two types of connections, Star and Delta. During starting time, the star connection reduces the high starting current and then automatically switches to delta after set time in star setting.
Basic settings required in the Relay for STAR-DELTA starter:
� Starter type to be selected as STAR-DELTA.
� Time in Star setting to be set as per requirement.
� Star-Delta change over delay setting to be set as per requirement.
� One Digital Input to be selected as START1.
� One Digital Output to be selected as MAIN.
� One Digital Output to be selected as STAR.
� One Digital Output to be selected as DELTA.
Figure B-3 shows the Star-delta wiring diagram. The connections in the diagram are shown considering 3P-4W system. The connection may be different for different type of system selection.
When the Relay receives START1 input, MAIN and STAR output picks up after validating all the start inhibit conditions. Also the 'time in star' timer starts. When the MAIN and STAR output is activated, the contactor A and contactor C picks up starting the Motor in reduced voltage condition. The 'time in star' timer expires and STAR output drops out, dropping contactor C. The DELTA output picks up after the set 'change over delay' timer expires. When the DELTA output is activated, the contactor B picks up and motor comes in running condition. When a STOP command is received by the Relay, MAIN and DELTA outputs drop out, corresponding contactors drop out and the motor stops.
The MAIN output remains in pick up condition during change over between STAR to DELTA.
Figure B-3: STAR/DELTA Starter Wiring Diagram
FUSE
61 Dl1
62 Dl2
63 Dl3
64 Dl4
65 Dl5
66 Dl6
67 COM
DIG
ITA
L IN
PUTS
3 4
Y R
3-PH.VOLTAGE
1 2
N B
71
N/-
72
L/+
AUX.VOLT
DIG
ITA
L O
UTP
UT
CO
NTA
CTS 82
8381858684888987919290
RTD/PTC
Tl1 Tl2
ANALOG O/P
AO1 AO2 D+ D-
RS485
PWR/COMM
MOTOR STATUS
ALARM/PICKUP
TRIPRST ENT
Mini USB PortLN
CONTACTOR A COIL (MAIN)
CONTACTOR C COIL (DELTA)
L/+
N/-
CONTACTOR B COIL (STAR)
MODBUS RS485 LOOPING
4-20mA OUTPUTTO FIELD AMMETER
RTD/PTC
CM UNIT
R Y B
CBCTCM UNIT
S2
S1
START
STOP
RESET
RYBN
FUSE
SFU / MCCB
R1 Y1 B1
M
1 3 5
R2 Y2 B2
1 3 5 1 3 5
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
CONTACTOR A CONTACTOR BCONTACTOR C
221MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
APPLICATION NOTES
B] Non Motor Load Application
The MCOMP relay is suitable for non-motor load application as well. The application can be of heater feeder or MCCB feeder used in case of lighting load etc.
For such applications, one should correctly set the �Feeder type� in System setting as �Non-Motor�.
Certain protections and related functions (alarm, trip, inhibit) are not available in case of Non-Motor application which are as follows:
1. Thermal Overload
2. Locked Rotor
3. Current Unbalance
4. Phase Loss
5. Phase Reversal
6. Under Current
7. Maximum number of starts
8. Excessive Start Time
9. All voltage based protections and functions
Whenever there is an attempt to change in this �Feeder type� setting (in case of drive is running or not running), the relay and display unit needs to be power recycled for successful intended operation.
C] Re-acceleration Application
Re-acceleration is a method where the Relay restarts the motor automatically without user intervention for momentary voltage dips. The re-acceleration or motor restart function plays very important role in industries where the critical motor needs to be restarted immediately (or with some delay) without manual intervention in case of process interruption due to under-
voltage/no voltage condition.
Conventionally two aux contacts, 1ON delay and 1 OFF delay timer per feeder is required to implement the reacceleration scheme which causes the increase in module size, increase in cost and reduction in reliability as the number of dependent component increases.
The MCOMP relay provides the re-acceleration function as an inbuilt feature with no need of any additional aux contacts and external timer.
The two cases in Re-acceleration supported by MCOMP are as follows:
1. Motor Re-acceleration function:
Voltage restores within 200 ms from the last voltage dip or no-voltage condition: If there is a sudden voltage dip in the power source for a duration of less than 200 ms then the motor should continue to run without any interruption. The output contact of the Relay holds the contacts for 200 ms. The motor will continue to run when voltage restores within 200 ms from the last voltage dip or no-voltage condition.
2. Motor Re-start function:
Voltage restores after 200 ms from last voltage dip or no-voltage condition: If the voltage dip persists for more than 200 ms, then the motor will stop. In this case, if voltage is restored within the restart time, then voltage will be validated for restart delay time. If the restored voltage persists for the set restart delay, then the motor will restart. However, if the motor is tripped due to UV fault during voltage dip condition, then after healthy restoration of voltage, the trip will be reset and the motor will be restarted. Table 6�16 lists the Re-acceleration Protection settings available in the Relay.
Table B-1: Re-acceleration Protection Settings
Parameter
Voltage Dip
Setting range Description
Motor Voltage should go below/equal to thisthreshold value to sense as valid voltage dip
20 to 90 % of VN
Voltage RestorationMotor Voltage should restore higher than orequal to this set value to sense as validvoltage recovery
60 to 95 % of VN
Restart TimeTime for which relay will wait for voltagerestoration
0.2 to 60 sec
Restart DelayValidation time (healthy voltage should sustainfor this much period) before actual starting themotor after successful voltage recovery
4 to 1200 sec
Aux and Motor SupplyLetting know the MCOMP relay if the auxiliarysupply for it is from the same 3 phase motorsupply bus or it is from separate source
Same and Separate
Mode To enable or disable motor restart functionEnable or Disable
222MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
APPLICATION NOTES
After healthy restoration of the voltage if all the critical motors gets restarted at the same time, there may be a chance that the incoming feeder will again see a power deep and trips on under-voltage. To avoid this situation, one should group the critical motors with different priorities. The highest priority motor group should start �rst and should have same restart delay settings. The next priority motor group should then start and should have �restart delay� setting higher than �restart delay� setting of highest priority motor group. The wide range of �restart delay� setting present in the relay will allow the user to con�gure for the staggered starting of the motors and thereby ful�lling the requirement.
Presence of any maintained stop command at the time of restart command from the Relay will inhibit starting of the motor.
D] 3P-3W, 3P-4W Application
The MCOMP relay can be con�gured as per the system voltage availability. There is a setting available as �Input Voltage� in System Setting for selection of system voltage as 3P-3W or 3P-4W. In case of 3P-3W, R-Y-B voltage needs to be connected to therelay voltage terminals with 1st terminal of the relay required to be body or panel earthed. In case of 3P-4W, R-Y-B-N voltage needs to be connected to relay voltage terminals.
In case of 3P-3W, V = V and N L-L
in case of 3P-4W, V = V / �3, N L-L
where V = Line to line voltage or Motor Rated Voltage and L-L
V = Nominal voltage used in the relay for protections.N
All the voltage based protection is dependent on V and hence N
proper selection of input voltage is necessary for the required function.
Figure B-5: 3P-3W, 3P-4W Connection Diagram
3P-3W CONNECTION
1 2 3 4
N B Y R
3-PH.VOLTAGE
EARTH
SFU/MCCB
R
Y
FUSE
B
3P-4W CONNECTION
1 2 3 4
N B Y R
3-PH.VOLTAGE
SFU/MCCB
R
Y
FUSE
B
N
Note: Motor must be in running condition before voltage dip/no-voltage condition occurs.
223MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
APPLICATION NOTES
E] Two Phase Voltage Inputs (R and Y phase input) Application
In certain applications where due to space constraint only two phase inputs are required to be connected to the relay for voltage metering and protections, the MCOMP relay comes as an intelligent option.
There is a setting available in the relay as �Phase Selection� in System Setting for the same. When selected as two phase, there is no need to connect the third voltage phase to the relay and relay will calculate the same internally.
The terminal number 1 of the relay needs to be connected to clean earth for intended operation of the relay in case �two phase� is selected in setting. While selection is on three phase, one needs to necessarily follow the connections as mentioned in 3P-3W or in 3P-4W cases.
F] Winding Heating Application
In small motors (typically < 30kW) when the motors are in off condition for a very long duration and the moisture content in the environment is high, it is necessary to keep the motor winding warm to have proper starting of the motor during next start. Generally 24VAC supply is provided in two windings of the motor to achieve this with some delay after motor gets stopped.
Figure B-6: Two Phase Input Connection
Conventionally a separate winding heating contact with delay timer is required to ful�ll the requirement.
The relay provides a dedicated output called heater output for energizing the winding heating coil present in the feeder and gives the setting of time delay as �heater delay� from 1 � 3600 sec in Digital output setting section. This eliminates the need of extra timer required in the feeder to achieve the winding heating requirement in a compact scheme.
Refer digital output settings present in chapter 9 Settings for con�guration of heater output of this application.
G] Analog Output Application
Analog meters are generally used for remote metering. In a �eld where motor is present, the operator comes to know the current drawn by the motor during running condition (or any other intended parameter such as availability of healthy three phase voltage before motor starting) with the help of analog meters. This meter accept the input in form of 4-20 mA current and provides the corresponding equivalent analog scale depending on the selected parameter.
Conventionally a separate transducer along with CT is required to provide the 4�20 mA signal corresponding to one of the three phase current. This increases the space requirement of the motor feeder, cost and reduces the reliability. The required 4-20 mA signal can be generated from MCOMP as an analog output and can be directly wired to analog meter for metering. One user con�gurable 4-20 mA analog output is provided in the Relay which can be con�gured to any of the parameter such as R/Y/B phase current, R/Y/B phase voltage, power, frequency etc. The relay terminals for wiring analog output are AO1 and AO2. It is necessary to know the loading requirement of the device for proper operation of the relay.
Maximum Burden (load) the MCOMP relay can see without affecting its output current of 4-20mA is 100 ohm. So the total burden on MCOMP should be less than 100 ohm on analog output channels for intended functionality of MCOMP analog output section. If the burden exceeds 100 ohm, variation in output current can be observed.
For calculating maximum length of wire which can be connected from analog meter present in �eld (or from DCS) to the relay without affecting its output (4-20mA), one needs to know resistivity of the wire and cross sectional area of the wire used. The consideration of LCS meter (Analog meter) burden or DCS terminal burden in the calculation is important for proper functioning.
Here is the example for length calculation for copper wire having resistivity of 1.72E-08 m and considering area of 2.5E-06 sq.m. For 500 meter length of wire, using the standard formula of resistivity (R = �L/A where, R=resistance, � = resistivity, L=length, A=area), the burden offer from wire comes to be 3.44 ohm. Considering the approximate burden of 20 ohm of Analog meter (or DCS terminal), the total burden comes out to be 20 + 3.44 = 23.44 Ohm which is less than 100 ohm (MCOMP burden handle capacity).
1 2 3 4
N B Y R
3-PH.VOLTAGE
EARTH
SFU/MCCB
R
Y
2 PHASE INPUT CONNECTION
224MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
APPLICATION NOTES
The relay�s analog output will continue to provide correct 4-20mA signal as long as total external burden is less than 100 ohm.
H] Pro�bus Communication Application
Basic info regarding Pro�bus protocol:
Parameter
Media
Transmission Rate
Topology
Number of nodes
Number of repeaters
Profibus Cable
Specification of Profibus DP RS 485
Copper or Fiber
9.6 kbps to 12 mbps
Line topology with termination
Up to 32 nodes per segment (including master, Redundancy module, slave devices, repeaters)
Max total 126 per network (including master, Redundancy module, slave devices, repeaters)
Max 9 with signal refreshing
Twisted, shielded two-wire cable, cable type A
As per standard,Maximum number of nodes in a segment = 32Maximum number of nodes in a loop = 126
Segment 1 => Master to R1Segment 2 => R1 to R2Loop => Master to R2
Note: DCS burden considered for calculations is just an assumption. User should consider actual values for the calculations.
Table B-2: Pro�bus speci�cation
Figure B-7: Typical pro�bus loop connection
225MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
APPLICATION NOTES
General Calculation for �nding number of slaves which can be connected in a single loop:
Within a segment all PROFIBUS masters, slaves, repeaters, optical link modules etc. count towards the 32-device limit. This means, for example, that when two repeaters are connected to a segment the maximum number of PROFIBUS stations is reduced to 30. It is good practice to leave at least 10% spare capacity per segment for future expansion and one for diagnostic tool etc.
Pre-requisites for calculation:
� Transmission rate
� Number of data bytes expected from each slave = �A�
� Master�s(PLC/DCS) IO byte handling capability = �B�
� Redundancy module�s IO byte handling capability (if present in the network) = �C�
� Repeater use permissible?
Calculation:
� Select the lowest Input/Output byte handling capability number from �B� & �C�.
� Divide that number by �A�. (D=B/A or D=C/A)
� The value of �D� indicates the maximum number of slaves which can be ef�ciently handled by the master through Redundancy module and can be connected in a single loop.
Now if value of
�D� < 26 then repeater is not required.
26 < �D� < 28 then Repeater may or may not be required.
�D� > 28 then Use of repeater is mandatory.
So it is recommended to restrict the maximum number of slave devices (including spares) in a particular segment up to 26. User may go beyond this as per feasibility study results.
Deciding repeater usage in a project:
Repeater usage is mandatory if any of the following is true:
� Number of devices in a segment (including master, Redundancy modules, slave devices) exceeds 32
� Total segment length for desired transmission rate exceeds beyond the permissible segment length.
Refer below table for standard segment length for each transmission rate.
An application of a repeater is shown in below �gure
The standard says that a maximum of 9 repeaters may be used between any master and slave station. However many repeaters exhibit an increased delay, meaning a maximum of only 4 repeaters giving 5 in-line segments is recommended practically. This implies a maximum of 5 in-line segments from a master to the furthest slave. It is strictly recommended to use the repeaters of same make in a single loop.
The repeater location is based on below two conditions. The repeaters can be placed anywhere as long as below two conditions are ful�lled:
� Each segment generated by using repeater should have maximum 32 numbers of nodes (including repeater) as per standard.
� Each segment length should be less than the standard segment length of selected transmission rate.
Pro�bus Cabling and Installation:
General Guidelines:
� In case of RS485 transmission technology, cable type A should be used.
� When connecting the nodes, ensure that the data cables are not mixed up.
� To achieve high interference resistance of the system against electro-magnetic radiation, a shielded data cable (type A is shielded) should de�nitely be used.
� The shielding is to be connected to the protective ground on both sides ensuring good conductivity via large-area shield clamps.
� Equipotential bonding of all connected �eld devices is also recommended.
� Ensure that the data cable is laid as far away from all high -current cables as possible and they should not run in parallel as far as possible. If they need to cross, they should cross at right angle.
� Stubs must absolutely be avoided.
� The number of nodes which can be connected to a segment is limited to 32.
� The permissible length of a segment for a selected transmission rate should be considered during routing of Pro�bus cable.
Transmission rate
9.6 kbps to 187.5 kbps
500 kbps
1.5 mbps
3, 6, 12 mbps
Transmission range per Segment (m)
1000 m
400 m
200 m
100 m
Repeater extendingthe transmission path
Repeater forsegmenting
Table B-3: Transmission range
Figure B-8: Repeater
226MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
APPLICATION NOTES
Cable Segregation:
Below table shows the distances according to EN 50174-2 that must be maintained between PROFIBUS cables (shielded data cable) and other cables. The table also lists two variants with a
Profibus cable and cable for
Spacing
Without partition or withnon-metallic partition
Partition made out ofAluminum Partition made out of Steel
Signal Transmission
� Network signals such as PROFIBUS.� Digital data signals for PCs, programming devices, printers, etc.� Shielded analog inputs or outputs
0 mm 0 mm 0 mm
Power Supply or 3 phase power
200 mm
0 mm
100 mm
0 mm
50 mm
0 mm
Un-Shielded
Shielded
Shielding of Pro�bus Cable:
As per Pro�bus international document (PROFIBUS Installation Guideline for Cabling and Assembly Version 1.0.6 May 2006 Order No: 8.022), if no shield connection exists, the shielding of the PROFIBUS cable must be connected to the equipotential
e.g. power supply
Shieldingconnection
JunctionBox
Drop Cable
Drop Cable
Field Device
Field Device
Other shieldedcables
safe area explosion hazardous area
equipotential bonding system
Trunk Cable
metal isolating segment. Here, it is assumed that a metal partition has the same effect as a cable shield.
bonding as close as possible to the PROFIBUS station. For electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) reasons you should connect the shield of the PROFIBUS cable to the equipotential bonding system at both ends.
Parameter
Impedance
Operational Capacity
Loop Resistance
Wire diameter
Wire CSA
Construction
Specified Limits
135..165 � with f = 3�.20 MHz
< 30 pF / m
< 110 � / km
> 0.64 mm
> 0.34 mm2
Shielded, twisted pair
Table B-4: Cable type A Electrical speci�cations
Table B-5: Cable segregation
Figure B-9: Pro�bus cable shielding
227MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
APPLICATION NOTES
Several options are available for establishing the large-area connection between the shielding and the equipotential bonding system. The following �gure shows various techniques that can be adapted in the �eld. For more information regarding connection, refer PROFIBUS Installation Guideline for Cabling and Assembly Version 1.0.6 May 2006 Order No: 8.022 document.
Special requirements for transmission rates >1.5 Mbit/s:
� Use of bit-rate greater than 1.5 Mbit/s requires special connectors with built in inductors.
� Spur lines are not allowed when using bit rates greater than 1.5 Mbit/s.
� The maximum segment length is 100m.
� A minimum cable length of 1m is recommended between any two stations.
Guidelines for redundancy module placement in a switchboard:
� It is always recommended to place a redundancy module at the start of the loop.
� In case of more than one redundancy module, it is recommended to keep all the redundancy modules at one location for easy automation. Starting loop connection of slave devices for each redundancy module needs to be brought up to that single location.
Common Errors in Pro�bus communication:
1. Termination problems:
� Lack of terminations at the end of a segment.
� Double termination, caused by devices with inbuilt termination.
� Termination in the middle of a segment (can be caused by devices with inbuilt termination).
� Unpowered terminations (unplugged or unpowered devices).
� Incorrectly wired isolating connectors (only becomes a problem when switched on).
2. Pickup and interference caused by:
� Laying bus cables too close to electrically noisy power cables or equipment.
� Screen current due to earth potential differences between areas of the network.
3. Wiring problems:
� Wrong cable used (e.g. using PA cable for DP segments).
� Damaged cable (including squashed, over-bent)
� Swapped cores at a device (B-RED rule broken)
� Un-earthed screen (not connected at every device)
4. Segment rules broken:
� Cable too long for the bit rate used.
� Too many devices (never more than 32 RS-485 drivers on a segment).
� Use of spur lines (keep short at lower bit rates and don�t use at higher bit rates).
5. Damaged or uncerti�ed devices
� Excessive connection capacitance.
� Faulty or poor quality RS-485 driver chips
I] Protection Function Application
Thermal Overload Case Study
In MCOMP Relay due to constant asymptotic factor k the thermal curve plotted is shifted by 1.15 Times of Iset i.e. If IFLC = 100A, Iset = 100% (Step Size � 5%) the curve starts from 1.15 Time of IFLC.
In certain applications thermal Overload Curve calculations should start from 100% of FLC. To achieve the thermal overload curve starting at 98% of FLC we have to set Iset at 85% so that the curve starts at 98% of FLC (i.e. 85 * 1.15).
But when user is setting Iset = 85% in thermal overload setting, it means any current above 85% of FLC is not the normal running current. However relay will not trip on overload until current goes above 98% of FLC as thermal overload curve starts from 98%.
Tripping of Motor on Thermal Overload during Starting state of the motor:
As soon as the motor receives a start command and as per current drawn by the motor, the relay starts accumulating thermal memory and during starting if the thermal memory/capacity reaches 100 % it does not issue a trip command till starting time (Start Time Set in Relay) expires. Relay issues a trip command immediately after start time (Start Time Set in Relay) is elapsed on Thermal Overload Protection.
Figure B-10: Shielding and equipotential bonding system
228MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
APPLICATION NOTES
Tripping of Motor on Thermal Overload during Running state of the motor:
Relay starts accumulating thermal memory during starting condition and gets settle as soon as motor is started successfully.
During running condition if the currents exceeds 98% of FLC the Thermal Memory start increasing and if the memory reaches 100 % issue a trip command as per the time calculated by the relay.
Motor Current
Thermal OLProtection Trip
Thermal Memory= 100%
Relay ThermalCurveStart Time = 10 Sec
100%
98% of FLC
70%
Motor Starting Motor Running
ThermalO/L Pick Up
Motor Current
Thermal OLProtection Trip
ThermalMemory = 100%
Relay ThermalCurveStart Time = 10 Sec
100%
98% of FLC
Figure B-11: Thermal overload during starting state of the motor
Figure B-12: Thermal overload during running state of the motor
Effect on Excessive Start Time Protection due to settingIset = 85%:
During excessive start time protection, MCOMP relay checks if the motor has gone above IFLC and comes back to the Iset or less than Iset (will be equal to IFLC in case of Iset=100%) as speci�ed by the user within the set starting time (i.e. Time Delay Set in Relay for Starting Time).
When user is setting Iset = 85%, during Starting MCOMP relay checks if the motor has gone above IFLC and whether it has come back to 85% of IFLC within the set starting time. If the current drawn by the motor after starting time has just elapsed is greater than 85% of IFLC then MCOMP issues a trip command on Excessive Start Time Protection.
229MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
APPLICATION NOTES
Locked Rotor Protection
MCOMP relay checks if the motor current has gone above the Locked Rotor Setting in Starting or in Running Condition. The trip command will be generated by the relay only after speci�ed delay in Lock Rotor Setting; however the relay issues actual trip command as per following:
Locked rotor during starting state of the motor:
Case a) Locked rotor condition occurs and resets before starting time expires: (i.e. during starting state of the motor and after start command is issued)
If the measured current is greater than the set value, locked rotor timer gets activated and does not issue a trip command till starting time expires. If the measured current reduces below Locked Rotor Pickup before the start time is elapsed, locked rotor timer will get reset and trip will not be issued.
Case b) Locked rotor condition occurs and does not reset before starting time expires:
If the measured current is greater than the set value, locked rotor timer gets activated and does not issue a trip command till starting time expires. Relay issues a trip command immediately after start time is elapsed if the current doesn�t fall below Lock Rotor Pickup. Assumption: Starting Time = 10 Sec / Lock Rotor Trip Delay = 2 Sec.
Locked rotor during running state of the motor:
During Running Condition if the measured current is greater than the pick-up set value, locked rotor timer gets activated and issues a trip command after the Locked Rotor Timer is elapsed provided the locked rotor condition is persisting at the time of tripping.
J] Watchdog Application
In the unlikely event of internal relay failure, the relay shall changeover one of its con�gured output contacts so that user can interpret that the relay has failed, thereby corresponding corrective or preventive action can be taken. To meet this, watchdog register is available in MCOMP on Modbus communication protocol and as well as in MCOMP COMPlogic input list. This gives the user �exibility to con�gure the watchdog bit in any of the Digital output/COMPlogic modules of the MCOMP. Following 10 individual watchdog error bits & 1 common bit obtained by logically OR all 10 watchdog bits is available in MCOMPs �COMP logic input� list.
1. Vref error of R-Phase Current Channel
2. Vref error of Y-Phase Current Channel
3. Vref error of B-Phase Current Channel
4. Vref error of R-Phase Voltage Channel
5. Vref error of Y-Phase Voltage Channel
6. Vref error of B-Phase Voltage Channel
7. Descriptor Error
8. ADC Failure
9. RTC Failure
10. CM detect error
11. Common watchdog bit
User gets �exibility to con�gure the individual watchdog bits & the common watchdog bit into COMPlogic modules. These complogic modules can be assigned to any of the Digital output of MCOMP to achieve intended functionality.
Lock Rotor TripDelay Timer Starts
Lock Rotor TimeElapsed
L.R. Delay2 Sec
Start Time = 10 Sec
Lock Rotor PickupReset Lock Rotor Plot
L.R.Pickup
Starting Curve
Figure B-13: Motor does not trip on locked rotor (Starting state)
Lock Rotor Plot
Lock RotorProtectionTripped
Motor Trip on Lock Rotor
Starting CurveL.R.Pickup
Start Time = 10 Sec
Lock Rotor TripDelay Timer Starts
Lock Rotor TimeElapsed
L.R. Delay2 Sec
Figure B-14: Motor tripped on locked rotor (starting state)
230MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
APPLICATION NOTES
Error Name
Vref error (for all channel)
Impact on MCOMP operationPossible error Causes
� Metering of corresponding parameter will not be accurate and can go random. Subsequently the protection operation will be affected.
� Vref error will get reset after troubleshooting & repairing.
� Internal power supply failure.
� Component damage to long run or end of life.
� Temperature drift.
� Dry soldering of component short.
Descriptor error � High voltage on voltage supply channel will corrupt the data stored in EEPROM.
� Noise on data channel will write improper data into EEPROM.
� In case of temporary noise or over voltage on supply, EEPROM memory will be unavailable for reading or writing settings & settings will reset to default.
� In above case EEPROM will become available for normal operation again after Power recycle & descriptor error will get reset.
� In case of component failure, Descriptor error will get reset after hardware repairing.
� High voltage on EEPROM voltage supply channel.
� Noise on EEPROM data channel.
� Component damage.
ADC Failure � Metering will be unde�ned and proper protection operation cannot be guaranteed.
� High voltage on ADC channel.
� Internal module failure.
RTC Failure � Thermal overload, Re-acceleration, Max start per hour calculation fails at power on.
� Time stamp will not be accurate
� Repairing will be required for resetting error.
� RTC battery drained.
� RTC module failure
CM Detect Error � Issues STOP command if Current Auto Stop is enabled.
� If current auto stop is disabled, current based protection will be of�ine.
� MCOMP Auxiliary power recycling after Reconnecting CT module cable will reset error.
� CT module is not connected.
� CT wire is open or CT module disconnection.
Table B-6: Cause & e�ect matrix for watchdog bits
231MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
APPLICATION NOTES
K] Single Phase Motor Application
MCOMP relay can be used for protecting single phase motor. There are two ways for connection depending upon the requirement as follows:
1. When only current based protection and metering is required:
Wiring requirement:
� The single phase (power cable) needs to be passed through R phase of MCOMP current module.
� No connection at MCOMP voltage terminals. (Voltage connect setting should be Disabled in MCOMP relay)
� All other control wiring (DI/DO) as per requirement in the scheme.
Reference connection diagram for Current Module connection is shown below.
Main unitCurrent Module
M
Y B
R
VR VY VB VN
Setting Requirement:
�Voltage connect� setting in system setting needs to be disabled. Following protections should be disabled for faithful operation:
� Current unbalance
� Earth fault
� Voltage based protections
� Frequency based protections
� Phase loss
� Phase reversal
Metering Info:
Following metering parameters needs to be ignored:
� Iy, Ib, Iavg, Ie
� Voltage, Frequency, Energy, Power, PF, Phase sequence parameters
Figure B-15: Single Phase Motor Application 1
232MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
APPLICATION NOTES
2. When current and voltage based protection and metering is required:
Wiring requirement:
� The single phase (power cable) needs to be passed through R phase of MCOMP current module.
� Phase and Neutral needs to be connected at MCOMP voltage terminals as shown in below diagram.
� All other control wiring (DI/DO) as per requirement in the scheme.
Reference connection diagram for Current Module and Main unit connection is shown below.
Setting Requirement:
�Voltage connect� setting in system setting needs to be enabled.
Main unitCurrent Module
M
Y B
R
VR VY VB VN
Ph
Neu
Following protections should be disabled for faithful operation:
� Current unbalance
� Earth fault
� Phase Loss
� Voltage Unbalance
� Frequency based protections
� Phase Reversal
Metering Info:
Following metering parameters needs to be ignored:
� Iy, Ib, Iavg, Ie
� Phase sequence parameters
Figure B-16: Single Phase Motor Application 2
233MCOMP User Manual - REV. C
REVISION LOG
Released DateRev Description
A June 2012
B January 2013
Added CE Certi�cate and Declaration of Conformity (16 & 17)
Modi�ed MCOMP Order Codes (28 - in Introduction)
Modi�ed sensing range for Digital Input(31) & added Relay element Communication Failure (36) in Speci�cation
Modi�ed Speci�cation Labels (41) & added Disposal of the Relay (65) in Installation
Note added for terminal numbers of expandable MCOMP version (11).
Added number of Start Parameter in Monitoring (73 � in Metering & Monitoring)
Added Communication Failure Protection (98 - Protection)
Updated Digital Output settings (104), number of Truth Tables (106), and the List of COMPlogic Inputs (114) in DIO and COMPlogic)
Modi�ed Memory Map and GSD modules for Pro�bus (from 147 in Communication)
Added Mode change settings, Communication failure settings, Trip only remote setting, etc. (from 204 in Setting Sheet)
Added Special Commands table, Inhibit Status table, etc (from 305 in Troubleshooting)
Added Application Notes (309)
Description
C Dec 2015
Brief changes are:
Introduction: added product overview �gure, expansion DIO description, modi�ed order codes
Speci�cations: added 51P, 51N settings in relay elements, modi�ed general speci�cations, corrected minor mistakes in settings
Installation: changed display dimension �gure, removed product speci�cation label, changed display mounting �gure, changed relay main unit overview �gure (terminal numbers changed), added external CT wiring diagram, removed starter types
Protections: corrected mistakes in overload trip chart, added IDMT over current protection, added description in temperature protection
Communication: removed modbus function codes description, memory map moved to separate annexure
Settings: added system setting parameter description, digital input/output setting parameter description, modi�ed case studies, modi�ed setting sheet for new parameters
User Interface: changed display �gure
Testing and troubleshooting : added brief testing methodology
Annexure A Memory Maps: Pro�bus output bytes changed, added detailed GSD modules and input list and their description
Annexure B Application notes : Newly added
Table R-1: Revision log
MC
OM
P23.
11.2
016
Registered Of�ce:L&T House, N. M. MargBallard EstateMumbai 400 001, INDIA
Malaysia
TAMCO SWITCHGEAR (MALAYSIA) SDN BHDSub Lot 24, Lot 16505, Jalan Keluli 1
Section 7
Tel: +603 3361 8200Fax: +603 3341 6200Email: [email protected]
Sales Offices - International
TAMCO Electrical Industries Australia Pty Ltd31 Kitchen Road, Dandenong 3175Melbourne, Victoria, AustraliaTel:+613 9706 7288Fax:+613 9706 9112Email: [email protected]
Australia
Indonesia
PT. TAMCO IndonesiaF-36, Jalan Jababeka Raya Jababeka Industrial EstateCikarang Utara, Bekasi, 17530,IndonesiaTel.: +62 21 893 5070 Fax: +62 21 893 5071 Email: [email protected]
Hyderabad
Post Bag 12, Vasantha Chambers
Hyderabad 500 004Tel: +91-40-6672 0210Fax: +91-40-2324 2356Email: [email protected]
New Delhi
Post Bag 622332, Shivaji MargNew Delhi 110 015Tel: +91-11-4141 9620/9942Fax: +91-11-4141 9625Email: [email protected]
Chennai
L&T Construction CampusTC-1 Building, II FloorMount-Poonamallee Road
Tel:+91-44-2270 6801Fax:+91-44-2270 6930Email: [email protected]
Manapakkam, Chennai 600 089
Radhadaya Complex, J. P. RoadVadodara 390 015Tel: +91-265-66136 37/38Fax: +91-265-2336 184Email: [email protected]
Sales Offices - India
Bengaluru
Bengaluru 560001Tel: 080-25020319Fax: 080-25596397Email: [email protected]
Kolkata
Mumbai
Post Bag 619
Kolkata 700 071Tel. : +91-33-4400 2550 / 2558Fax. : +91-33-22827587 / 1025Email: [email protected]
L&T Gate No. 5, L&T Business Park TC -II,Tower B - 7 th �oor, Saki Vihar road, Powai Mumbai 400 072 Tel:+91-22-6705 3083Fax:+91-22-6705 1556 Email: [email protected]
India
L&T Gate NO. 5, L&T Business Park TC -II,Tower B - 7 th �oor, Saki vihar road, Mumbai 400 072 Tel:+91-22-6705 2813Fax:+91-22-6705 1024 Email: [email protected]
Kuwait
Kana Controls General Trading &Contracting Co. W.L.LP.O Box: 25593 Safat, 13116 Kuwait Tel: +965-2474 1373 Faxs: +965-2474 1537 Email: [email protected]
2203, 22nd Floor
Abu Dhabi, UAETel. : +971-2-676 5988Fax. : +971-2-676 6399Email: [email protected]
Saudi Arabia
L&T Electricals Saudi Arabia Company Limited - L. L. CMH-4, Plot: 17+19
Kingdom of Saudi ArabiaTel: +966-3-8127708Fax: +966-3-8127780Email: [email protected]
Oman
P.O.Box 598, Ruwi, Postal Code-112Sultanate of OmanTel:+968 98034317Mob:+968 98034317EMail: [email protected]
Najma Intersection, Opp: Doha CinemaC-Ring Road,P.O Box No- 24399Doha, QatarTel: +974-44-239 000Fax: +974-44-551 286Email: [email protected]
Qatar
Larsen & Toubro Limited, Electrical Systems & Equipment - Head Of�ce
Email: [email protected] Website: www.lntebg.comThe information contained herein is correct at time of printing, but as the products and its manufacturing processes are being developed continuously,this information is subject to change without notice and the company cannot be held liable for any alleged misinterpretation howsoever arising.
7C, TC II, Tower B, Level 7, L&T Gate No. 5, Saki Vihar Road, Powai, Mumbai 400 072.Tel: +91-22-6705 1748 Fax: +91-22-6705 1556